CONSTRUCTION OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH

(COSH) draft Manual as of October 22, 2020 F4

– FOR OHSC REVIEW AND APPROVAL
Table of Contents
Module 1: IMPORTANCE OF SAFETY AND HEALTH in the CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 2

Module 2: UNSAFE ACT AND UNSAFE CONDITION 7

Module 3: CONSTRUCTION SITE PREMISES 16

Module 4: EXCAVATION SAFETY 37

Module 5: TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY 45

Module 6: CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY (MOBILE EQUIPMENT SAFETY) 56

Module 7: CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY (CRANE SAFETY) 64

Module 8: FALL PROTECTION IN CONSTRUCTION 73

Module 9: TEMPORARY STRUCTURES 82

Module 10: TEMPORARY STRUCTURES (ERECTION AND DISMANTLING) 96

Module 11: ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY 121

Module 12: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARDS 153

Module 13: CoViD-19 PREVENTION MEASURES 172

Module 14: PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 183

Module 15: DEMOLITION and EXPLOSIVES 193

Module 16: ROUTINE SITE SAFETY INSPECTION 203

Module 17: JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS 209

Module 18: ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION 215

Module 19: ROLES of SAFETY OFFICER 223

Module 20: TOOL BOX MEETING 226

Module 21: EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS 230

Module 22: EMPLOYEES COMPENSATION PROGRAM 242

Module 23: OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY and HEALTH LEGISLATION 247

Module 24: CONSTRUCTION SAFETY and HEALTH PROGRAMS 265

: RE-ENTRY PROGRAM 280

1 | P a g e



MODULE 1:
IMPORTANCE OF SAFETY AND HEALTH in the
CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY

OBJECTIVES
Participants shall be able to:
• explain the status of safety, health and welfare among the workers in the various fields of the
construction industry;
• discuss different factors that contribute to the occurrences of accidents in the construction
industry; and
• define and identify the importance of occupational safety and health

OSH SITUATION IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY

Local OSH Situationer
Situations in the Philippines on Construction Site Occupational Injuries
2013 2015

With workdays lost 525 715

Without workdays lost 1,590 1,399

Total 2,115 2,115

Source: LABSTAT Updates Vol. 21 No. 19 Safety and Health in the Workplace Cases of Occupational

2 | P a g e



GLOBAL OSH Situationer

According to the International Labor Organization estimates (World Day for Safety and
Health at Work 28th April 2015), every year:
• 2.3 Million women and men workers die at work from occupational injury or disease
• 2 Million deaths are due to fatal work-related diseases
• 350,000 of which are fatal accident
• 313 Million workers are involved in non-fatal occupational accidents
• 160 Million cases of non-fatal work-related diseases occur annually
• 6,400 people die from occupational accident or diseases everyday
• 860,000 are injured on the job everyday
• Work-related diseases represent main cause of death at work killing 6 times more
workers than occupational accidents

The human cost of this daily adversity is vast, and the economic burden of poor occupational safety
and health practices is estimated at 4% of global Gross Domestic product each year.

With a highly mobile population of workers and different contractors working on dangerous
construction sites at the same time, CONSTRUCTION continues to be a major cause of death and
disabilities.

ILO report for 2005 Construction sites accident around the world

• 60 000 fatal accidents each year

• 1 fatal accident every 10 minutes
• 1 in every 6 fatal accidents recorded at work annually
• 25 to 40 % of work-related deaths even though only 6 to
10% of the workforce are employed in construction
• 30% of construction workers in some countries suffer
from back pain or other musculoskeletal disorders

Leading causes of fatal accidents in construction sites

1) Falls from Heights

§ Temporary structures
§ Excavation
§ Roof
§ Moving vehicle and equipment

2) Excavation and Trench Work

§ Cave-in
§ Falling of persons, materials and equipment
§ Asphyxiation

3) Construction Machineries and Equipment

§ Power tools
§ Woodworking machines
§ Heavy machines

3 | P a g e



4) Cranes and Elevators

§ Overloading
§ Lifting and carrying of loads
§ Erection and dismantling

5) Electrical Accidents
§ Electrical Shock and Burns
§ Contact with electric lines and underground cables

COST OF AN ACCIDENT
Direct Costs of Accidents
1. Emergency Medical Care
2. Equipment Damage or Material Spoilage
3. Compensation Payments
4. Investigations of Legal Authority
5. Insurance Premiums

Indirect Costs of Accidents

1) Injured Worker
§ lost productivity on day of injury
§ lost productivity due to follow-up care
§ lost productivity after returning to work

2) Worker’s Crew
§ completing added work
§ assisting injured worker
§ lost productivity due to inspection

3) Crew Around Accident Site

§ watching events and discussing accident

4) Training Replacement Worker

5) Supervisors
§ investigating accident
§ preparing reports
§ time with management, owner or regulatory agencies

Reminder:

The first duty of business is to survive, and the guiding principle of business economics is
NOT the maximization of profit, it is the avoidance of LOSS - Peter Drucker

4 | P a g e



FACTORS THAT CONTRIBUTE TO THE OCCURENCES OF ACCIDENTS IN

THE CONSRTUCTION INDUSTRY
a) Fall from heights is the predominant causes of accidents
b) Lack of supervision for workers working at heights
c) Workers lack awareness on OSH
d) Workers have limited trainings
e) Due to lack of training, workers
a. build improper temporary structures
b. tolerate improperly guarded floors
c. work with unstable/unsecured/ scaffolds
d. use defective equipment
f) Accident reports lack relevant information
g) Proper investigations are hardly conducted

RECOMMENDATIONS

1) Policy Makers and Enforcers

§ Strict enforcement of DO 13
§ Strict implementation of reporting mechanism and revision of report form
§ Continuous development of Construction Safety Training
§ Research on KAP
2) Employers and Construction Companies
§ Compliance to DO 13
§ Provision of adequate trainings and information
§ Supervision on works at heights
§ Provision of adequate access and egress in construction sites
§ Conduct of accident investigation3) Employees and Workers
§ Comply with OSH rules and policies
§ Take initiative in learning OSH
§ Demand for approved type PPE
§ Observe proper hand signals
§ Report any hazard found

THE IMPORTANCE OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH

Why workplace safety is important?

Workplace safety is very important for each and every employee in the industry because all the
workers desire to work in a safe and protected atmosphere. Health and safety is the key factor for
all the industries in order to promote the wellness of both employees and employers.
It is a duty and moral responsibility of the company to look after the employee’s protection.
There are the obvious reasons why workplace safety should be our priority including:
1. Injury
2. Death
These two reasons should need no explanation. Improved safety training and awareness can help
save lives and reduce injury.
Along with the above-mentioned pain, suffering and death, there is the financial impact.
3. Corporate financial loss
5 | P a g e



4. Property damage
In order for a company to survive and employ people, it must be profitable. Death & injury
impact the company financially. It is in the best interest for both employee and employer to put
safety first, minimize risk to life and therefore reduce financial loss and property damage.
Why do we work safe? When a company puts their employees first and implements proper safety
training and education and then enforces it, several positive results happen.
5. Worker productivity increases
6. The Service or Quality of the product improves
7. Corporate reputation / public relations improves
Why is safety so important in the workplace? Nobody wants to do business with corporations
risk the quality of the product and the safety of their employees to increase the bottom line.
Companies who care about their employees put them first and when that happens, productivity
increases. Suddenly, the employee is no longer a number, but a person who can make a
difference. The benefits of safety in the workplace will be clearly seen by employees and outside
visitors.
Establishing good safety practices including training, education and the appropriate safety
supplies (PPE) begins with the employers' commitment to safety. Why is workplace safety so
important? Workplace safety benefits both the company and the worker. The benefits of
workplace safety are overwhelming. Safety transforms a company and it's employees into a team
of people with a common goal. It is a win for everybody.

6 | P a g e



MODULE 2:
UNSAFE ACT AND UNSAFE CONDITION

OBJECTIVES
Participants shall be able:
• To be able to understand the meaning of safety, health, accidents, hazards and risks.
• To be able to understand work system and accident theory.
• To be able to differentiate unsafe acts and unsafe conditions and how to control them.

DEFINITION
Safety
§ State of freedom from risk, usually achieved through all measures & arrangements set to
protect workers from injury or ill health
§ Is not merely the absence of accidents, but the results of ALL persons taking positive
actions to identify accident causes and implement suitable preventive measures
Health
•
Is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the
absence of disease or infirmity (WHO)
Accidents
§ Is any unplanned occurrence which results in some loss, often an injury
§ An undesired event that results in injury and/or property damage
Hazard – anything (source, situation or act) with the potential to cause harm
Risk – the chance, large or small, that somebody (not necessarily a worker) could be harmed by
hazards, together with an indication of how serious that harm might be

7 | P a g e



What is Occupational Safety and Health (OSH)?

- Is a discipline with a broad scope involving three major fields:
§ Occupational Safety
§ Occupational Health
§ Industrial Hygiene
Occupational Safety deals with understanding the causes of accidents at work and ways to prevent
unsafe act and unsafe conditions in any workplace. Safety at work discusses concepts on good
housekeeping, proper materials handling and storage, machine safety, electrical safety, fire
prevention and control, safety inspection, and accident investigation.
Occupational Health is a broad concept which explains how the different hazards and risks at work
may cause an illness and emphasizes that health programs are essential in controlling work-related
and/or occupational diseases.
Industrial Hygiene discusses the identification, evaluation, and control of physical, chemical,
biological and ergonomic hazards
Work System is a system in which human participants and/or machines perform work (processes and
activities) using information, technology, and other resources to produce products/services for internal or
external customers. This system is very important in identifying the strengths and weaknesses of health,
safety and environmental management while performing work. Work system is an important part of risk
assessment maintains a controlled completion of work with minimum risk

WORK SYSTEM AND ACCIDENT THEORY

There are 4 key elements of work system:
People – are people who perform the work
Equipment – anything kept, furnished, or provided for a specific purpose. the act of equipping a
person or thing
Material – the elements, constituents, or substances of which something is composed or can be
made
Environment – includes the organizational, cultural, competitive, technical, and regulatory
environment within which the work system operates

8 | P a g e



Iceberg Theory
Direct Costs (Insured)
- Medical Costs
- Wasted raw materials
- Damaged property / equipment
- Insurance premium

Injured Workers
- Loss of productivity due to interruption on the day of accident
- Loss of productivity during medical leave
- Loss of productivity due to follow up care

Other Employees
Loss of productivity due to the following:
- Work stoppage due to accident
- Participate in rescue operation
- Participate in accident investigation (inspection and interview)
Lesser productivity due to the following:
– Slowdown in production for fear that same thing will happen to them
– Sympathy to the injured worker
– Additional cost due to completion of added work
Supervisors
Loss of productivity due to the following:
– Participate in rescue operation
– Participate in accident investigation (inspection and interview)
– Preparation of accident investigation report
Replacement Worker
- Hiring and training
Equipment
- Downtime
- Repair or replacement

EXAMPLES OF TYPES OF ACCIDENT

Types of Accidents:
• Struck by the load
• Fall from height
• Slips and trips
• Electrocution
• Fire

DIRECT CAUSES OF ACCIDENTS

Causes of Accidents are classified as:
1. Unsafe Condition - seen as a physical or chemical property in the material
2. Unsafe Act - a violation of safe procedure
• Act of omission – omitted the action which resulted in an accident
• Act of commission – committed the action which resulted in an
accident

9 | P a g e



Unsafe Condition – physical or chemical property of a material, machine or the

environment which could possibly cause injury to people, damage to property,
disrupt operations in a plant or office or other forms of losses - American National
Standards Institute (ANSI). These conditions could be guarded or prevented.

Ex. Slippery and wet floors; dusty work area; congested plant lay-
out; octopus wiring; scattered objects on the floor/work area; poor storage
system

Unsafe Act – “any human action that violates a commonly accepted safe work
procedure or standard operating procedure” - American National Standards
Institute (ANSI). This is an act done by a worker that does not conform or departs
from an established standard, rules or policy. These often happen when a worker
has improper attitudes, physical limitations or lacks knowledge or skills.

Ex. Horse playing; smoking in non-smoking areas; non-wearing of

goggles/gloves; using substandard/defective tools; driving without license

FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO UNSAFE ACTS

1. Unaware
- Lack of knowledge
- Not trained
- Insufficient training
- Improper training
- Communication barrier
2. Unable
- Lack of Skills
- Lack of no experience
- Limited understanding
- Physical limitation
- Defective eyesight
- Muscular weakness due to fatigue
- Impaired hearing
- Short in height
- Too tall in height
- Slow reactions
3. Unmotivated
- Improper attitude
- Shortcut or deviation from the standard or procedures

SYSTEM TO CONTROL UNSAFE ACTS AND UNSAFE CONDITIONS

Three Steps to Control Hazards and Accidents
1. Identify
2. Evaluate
3. Correct or Control

10 | P a g e



1. Identify the hazard

• Inspection (before the accident occurs)
• Investigation (after the accident occurs)
2. Evaluate
• Determine if what you identified complies with safety standards,
by means of Occ. Health & Safety Standards, OEL, TLV, PEL,
NIOSH, others.
3. Correct or Control
• Use of the hierarchy of controls

ACCIDENT CAUSATION THEORIES

A work accident, workplace accident, occupational accident, or accident at work is a “discrete
occurrence in the course of work" leading to physical or mental occupational injury.

Accident causation models were originally developed in order to assist people who had to
investigate occupational accidents, so that such accidents could be investigated effectively.
Knowing how accidents are caused is also useful in a proactive sense in order to identify what types
of failures or errors generally cause accidents, and so action can be taken to address these failures
before they have the chance to occur.

The Domino Theory

In 1931, the late H.W. Heinrich (Heinrich et al, 1980) presented a set of theorems known as ‘the
axioms of industrial safety’. The first axiom dealt with accident causation, stating that ‘the
occurrence of an injury invariably results from a complicated sequence of factors, the last one of
which being the accident itself.’
Alongside, he presented a model known as the ‘domino theory’ as this accident sequence was
likened to a row of dominoes knocking each other down in a row. The sequence is:-
• Injury, caused by an;
• Accident, due to an;
• Unsafe act and/or mechanical or physical hazard, due to the;
• Fault of the Person, caused by their;
• Ancestry and Social Environment.

Source: H. Heinrich, Industrial Accident Prevention: A Scientific Approach, 1950 edition.

11 | P a g e



TYPES OF ACCIDENTS

1. STRUCK-BY ACCIDENT

A worker was watching a co-worker sledge a bolt into place on a casting. He was not
wearing eye protection. After several blows had been struck, a sliver of steel broke off the
bolt struck him in the eye.

2. STRUCK-AGAINST ACCIDENT

The worker was attempting to remove the coupling box from a roll stand. He positioned a long
metal bar in the hole at the top of the coupling box and applied force to the box. The bar slipped
from the hole, causing him to fall backwards. He struck his back against the mill housing.

3. CONTACT-BY ACCIDENT

A truck driver was using compressed air to unload acid into a storage tank. During the process
the unloading hose burst praying him and other workers with acid.

12 | P a g e



4. CONTACT WITH ACCIDENT

A worker was erecting a steel beam outside the maintenance shop. While lifting the beam, the
beam made contact with overhead electrical wires. He suffered serious burns.

5. TRAPPED-IN ACCIDENT

(CONFINED SPACE) A worker entered a lateral section of sewer pipe to inspect the lining.
When he reached a vertical section, he fell inside and was unable to climb out. He was rescued
by using a retrieval line.

6. CAUGHT-ON ACCIDENT

A worker was getting off a moving railcar. As he was getting off, the ring on his finger got
caught on the pipe coupling joining the two sections of metal ring. His finger was amputated
from his hand.

13 | P a g e



7. CAUGHT BETWEEN ACCIDENT

A worker was scraping the coal spillage back into the coal conveyor. As he was pushing the
coal back into the conveyor his glove got caught between the belt and an idler roll.

8. DIFFERENT LEVEL FALL ACCIDENT

A worker was standing on a platform 12 feet above ground replacing a guard on the motor of a
bucket elevator. The platform did not have a railing around it. When he stepped back he fell off
the platform.

9. SAME LEVEL FALL ACCIDENT

An office clerk was crossing railroad tracks to pick up time sheets from the shipping office. As
he was crossing the stepped on one of the rails, his foot slipped, and he fell to the ground.

14 | P a g e



10. EXPOSURE ACCIDENT

Two workers assigned to monitor the boiler were overcome by the carbon monoxide gases when
the vapors from the boiler engine accumulated in the boiler room. The ventilation blower as not
working properly.

11. OVEREXERTION ACCIDENT

A worker was attempting to carry a 12-ft metal ladder in a vertical position. The top of the ladder
leaned sideways, and he injured his back while trying to hold the ladder from falling.

15 | P a g e



MODULE 3:
CONSTRUCTION SITE PREMISES

Low accident statistics are the result of safe and orderly construction sites. These workplaces include
ingress and egress to and from the streets and public sewers, hitherto, the air we breathe.

Objective: The aim of the participant is to be able to identify the hazards in a typical
construction workplace; to show to other that these dangers exist’ to list ways to keep the
workplace clean, safe and healthy; and to provide guidelines for all employees to follow.

Accident Prevention
• Real factor in the economic success of any construction job
• Methods of prevention
• Ample evidence
• Profitable
• Lower cost and greater efficiency

General Construction Site Requirements

• Accident prevention is a legal requirement
• Practical experience in running construction jobs
• Accident prevention as part of advance planning
• Protection of workers and the public
• Applicable gov’t standard regulations

SETTING UP SITE

Construction Site Requirements – construction premises shall have adequate

signs for fire, emergency or danger, and safety instructions of standard colors and
sizes visible at all times.

16 | P a g e



Gates
(1) Where the premises are surrounded by fencing, separate entrance and exit gates shall be
provided for pedestrian, vehicular and railroad traffic.
(2) Gates for pedestrian traffic shall be located at a safe distance from those for vehicular
and railroad traffic, shall be of sufficient width to permit the free passage of employees
during rush hours, and, if possible, shall be so located not to cross vehicular or railroad
traffic.

Roadways
(1) Roadways for automobiles, tractors, or other vehicles shall be soundly constructed with
good wearing surfaces.
(2) Roadways shall be of adequate width, and where used by, two-way traffic shall be at
least twice the width of the widest vehicle normally used plus 1.25 m. (4 ft.). Sufficient
clearance from overhead structures shall be provided.
(3) Where the installations of grade or level crossing cannot be avoided such crossing shall
be protected.
(4) Adequate railings or walls shall be provided along bridges, slopes and sharp curves

Parking of Vehicles
Regulations covering the use of driveways for entry and exit, speed limits, space allotments
and methods of parking shall be provided and strictly enforce where parking space is
provided for automobiles of the employee.

Walkways:
(1) Safe walkways shall be constructed along the shortest line between important points.
(2) Walkways shall not be located under the eaves of buildings where they may become
slippery.
(3) Where it is necessary for pedestrians to cross railroad tracks or vehicular roadways,
bridges or
underpasses shall be provided, and the track or roadway should be fenced to prevent direct
crossing at
such points.
(4) Walking along railroad tracks by unauthorized persons shall not be allowed.
(5) Railings shall be installed along walkways, on bridges on steep slopes, at slippery places
and at
places where pedestrians are liable to injury by passing vehicles.

Welfare facilities
Workers’ Welfare Facilities
The employer shall provide the following welfare facilities in order to ensure humane working
conditions:
17 | P a g e



1. Adequate supply of safe drinking water.

a) If the water is used in common drinking areas, it should be stored in closed
containers from which the water is dispensed through taps or cocks. Such
containers should be cleaned and disinfected at regular intervals not exceeding fifteen
(15) days.
b) Notices shall be conspicuously posted in locations where there is water supply that
is not fit for drinking purposes.
2. Adequate sanitary and washing facilities
a) Adequate facilities for changing and for the storage and drying of work clothes
b) Adequate accommodation for taking meals and shelter.
3. Suitable living accommodation for workers, and as may be applicable, for their
families
a) Separate sanitary, washing and sleeping facilities for men and women workers.

Construction Site Hazards

Hazard - The potential of an Act or Condition that can likely cause personal injury or damage
to property, or combination.

Ways to Identify Hazards

One of the "root causes" of workplace injuries, illnesses, and incidents is the failure to identify
or recognize hazards that are present, or that could have been anticipated. A critical element
of any effective safety and health program is a proactive, ongoing process to identify and
assess such hazards.

Collect existing information about workplace hazards

To identify and assess hazards, employers and workers should collect, organize, and review
information with workers to determine what types of hazards may be present and which
workers may be exposed or potentially exposed. Information available in the workplace may
include:

• Equipment and machinery operating manuals.

• Safety Data Sheets (SDS) provided by chemical manufacturers.
• Self-inspection reports and inspection reports from insurance carriers, government
agencies, and consultants.
• Records of previous injuries and illnesses and reports of incident investigations.

Inspect the workplace for safety hazards

Safety hazards are hazards that have the potential for injury. These hazards can be
introduced over time as workstations and processes change, equipment or tools become
worn, maintenance is neglected, or housekeeping practices decline. Setting aside time to
regularly inspect the workplace for safety hazards that can help identify potentials for
injuries so that they can be addressed before an incident occurs.

18 | P a g e



Sources of safety hazards in the construction site:

o Poor Housekeeping
o Electrical
o Fire
o Mechanical

Identify health hazards

Health hazards are something that has the potential to cause illness. Identifying workers' exposure
to health hazards is typically more complex than identifying physical safety hazards. For example,
gases and vapors may be invisible, often have no odor, and may not have an immediately
noticeable harmful health effect.

Sources of health hazards in the construction site:

o Physical
o Biological
o Chemical
o Ergonomics
o Psychosocial
Conduct accident / incident investigations
Workplace incidents –including injuries, illnesses, close calls/near misses, and reports of other
concerns– provide a clear indication of where hazards exist. By thoroughly investigating incidents
and reports, you will identify hazards that are likely to cause future harm. The purpose of an
investigation must always be to identify the root causes (and there is often more than one) of the
incident or concern, in order to prevent future occurrences.

Control Measures in the Workplace

1. Engineering Controls
These eliminate the hazard by considering safety and health provisions, substitution,
modification or process/equipment, isolation, wet methods and industrial ventilation.
Engineering methods of control are the most effective in preventing or reducing work
environment factors or stresses. Examples:

a. Proper design and planning – Initial consideration regarding safety and health
aspects must be made in the planning and construction stage. We should bear in
mind that once the control measures are in place, it is already very hard to alter or
modify the design, especially when we realize that the control measure being
adopted is ineffective. Besides it is more expensive and will cost the company a lot
to do so. The correct identification of the problem and careful evaluation should be
ensured, and we have to make sure that the intervention or control measure to be
employed is the most cost effective.

b. Substitution/replacement of materials used. Use of less (on non-) hazardous

chemicals in place of hazardous chemicals. (Use of water-based rather than oil
–based)

19 | P a g e



c. Modification in the process/equipment. A change in the process offers an

ideal chance to concomitantly improve working conditions. Most changes are
made to improve quality or reduce cost of production. However, in some cases,
a process is modified to reduce the hazard. For instance, in modifying the
process, automation can be used to lessen worker’s exposure to contaminant. In
modifying equipment, the use of lids can prevent dispersion of dust during
mixing.

d. Isolation. Hazardous operations should be isolated to minimize exposure of

workers. The isolation can be physical barrier, such as acoustic panels, to
minimize noise transmission form generator set, whining blower or ripsaw. The
worker may also be isolated or enclosed in a soundproof control booth with a
clean source of air supplied to the booth. Isolation can also be in terms of time
and distance.

e. Wet methods. Airborne dust hazards can be minimized or greatly reduced by

applying water or other suitable liquids. Dampening powder materials or
suppressing dust generation through misting or spaying of water will definitely
control dust dispersion. Dampening or drenching powder materials to prevent it
from getting airborne is one of the simplest methods for dust control. Its
effectiveness, however, depends upon proper wetting of the particulates. Its
application also depends on the nature of process and product. Some powder
conveying systems provide auxiliary water piping systems with sprinklers or
water sprays at the unloading side since formation of dust clouds occur when
powder materials drop.

f. Industrial ventilation. A very important aspect of engineering control has to

do with ventilation. Industrial ventilation is the process of supplying fresh air
and/or removing contaminant laden air by natural or mechanical means to and
from any space.

2. Administrative Controls
If the hazard cannot be removed, then the next approach is to reduce the exposure of
the hazard as in: scheduling hazardous work process, reduced working hours in hot
processes and work areas with excessive noise levels; assigning workers to other less
hazardous work areas of production and training or workers on various health and safety
aspects.

a. Reduction of work periods. Reduction of work periods is a method of control

in limited areas where engineering control methods at the source are not
practical.

b. Adjusting work schedules. For workers who must labor in a compressed-air

environment, schedules of maximum length of work shift and length of
decompression time have been prepared. The higher the pressure, the shorter the
work shift and the longer the decompression time period.

c. Job Rotation. Job rotation when used as a way to reduce employee exposure to
toxic chemicals or harmful agents must be used with care. While rotation keeps
exposure below recommended limits exposes more workers to hazards.

20 | P a g e



d. Training and Education of all workers. The education of supervisors usually

is process equipment oriented. The aim of the safety and health professional
should be to teach them about the safety and health hazards that may be found
in work areas. Supervisors should be knowledgeable and well- informed about
hazardous processes, operations and materials for which they are responsible.

e. Employee information and training. The worker must know the proper
operating procedures that make engineering control effective. If performing an
operation away from an exhaust hood, the purpose of the control measure will
be defeated, and the work area may become contaminated. Workers can be
alerted to safe operating procedures through manuals, instruction materials,
signage, labels, safety meetings, and other educational devices.

f. Emergency response training and education. Also, be sure to give employees

training on how to respond to emergencies. OSH training on when to respond
or not is also critical. Many deaths have occurred when untrained workers rushed
in to save fallen co-workers and were overcome, themselves.

g. Housekeeping and maintenance. Good housekeeping plays a key role in the

control of occupational health hazards. Remove dust on overhead ledges and on
the floor before it can become airborne by traffic, vibration, and random air
currents. Stress that good housekeeping is always important; but where there are
toxic materials, it is of paramount importance.

The concern in administrative control is that the focus is on the worker (man). Since
there are many workers from different walks of life, you can expect different responses
to the aforementioned control methods. Since they are people, they can forget, act
hurriedly, may be stubborn, and have knowledge or attitude problems. There will
always be administrative controls; the problem is complying with it

21 | P a g e



3. Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) –

If the hazard cannot be removed, and a worker is needed for the operation (or
equipment), then the last resort is to put a barrier between the worker and the hazard –
thus the PPE. Actually, PPE can be used together with engineering controls and
administrative methods.
However, PPEs protective devices have one serious drawback – they do not reduce or
eliminate the hazard. These merely put a barrier between the worker and the hazard.
The hazard is still there. So, any defect in the PPE will result in contact of the worker
with the hazard, thus leading to an accident or illness.

The use of this should be confined to certain situations:

• Where temporary control measures are necessary before engineering controls
installed.
• Where engineering controls are not practicable.
• To supplement engineering controls in reducing exposure during maintenance
and repair.
• During emergencies

PPEs vary in design, equipment specifications, application and protective capability. Proper
selection depends on the toxic substance involved, conditions or exposure, human capabilities
and equipment fit. In this module though, we will be giving particular attention to respiratory
protective equipment.

22 | P a g e



Construction safety signage (Rule 1060.01 Premises of Establishments)

Construction Safety Signage (DOLE Department Order No. 13 Section 9 and DO 198
18 Chapter 3 Section 9)
Signage must be provided to warn the workers and the public of hazards existing in the
workplace. Signage shall be posted in prominent positions at strategic locations and, as far as
practicable, be in the language understandable to most of the workers employed.

Safety signage to warn workers and the public of the hazards existing in the workplace:
• Areas where there is potential risk from falling objects
• Tripping or slipping hazards
• Periodic update of man-hours lost

Warning Sign
A visual alerting device in the form of a label, placard or other marking which advises the
observer of the nature and degree of potential hazards, probable consequence of involvement
with the hazards and how it can be avoided.
• Safety Signs and Labels: ANSI Z535.4
• Color Codes: ANSI Z535.1
• Safety Symbols: ANSI Z535.3

Location - Safety signs shall be placed such that they will:

§ Be readily visible to the intended viewer
§ Alert the viewer to the potential hazard in time to take appropriate action

Panel - Area of safety sign having distinctive background color different from adjacent areas
of the sign, which is clearly delineated by a line, border or margin

§ Signal Word Panel - Area of safety sign that contains the signal word and the safety
alert symbol
§ Message Panel - Area of the safety sign that contains the word messages which
identify the hazard, indicate how to avoid the hazard and advise of the probable consequence
of not avoiding the hazard
§ Symbol/Pictorial Panel - Area of the safety sign that contains the symbol/pictorial
23 | P a g e



Standard Color of Signs for Safety

1. Blue – Notice
To designate caution, limited to warning against
starting use of or the movement of equipment,
which is under repair.

2. Green – Designating Safety, First Aid

3. Yellow – Caution
For marking physical hazards, such as striking,
against stumbling falling tripping, and “caught in
between”.

4. Red – Fire Protection

To call attention to fire protection equipment
apparatus and facilities

5. Orange – Warning
To designate dangerous parts of machines energized
equipment. Electrical hazards. (Yellow-Gold)

24 | P a g e



6. White – Traffic
White, black, or a combination of these, are the
basic colors for the designation of traffic and
housekeeping marking.

7. Purple – Radiation
To designate hazards. Yellow is used in
combination with purple for markers, such as
tags, labels, signs.

Other signs:
• Men at work
• Slippery when wet
• Deep excavation
• One way
• No Entry
• Sorry for the inconvenience
• No parking
• STOP

Six group of signs:

1. Prohibition sign – (Please do not do) A round sign with white background and a red border, with a
diagonal cross bar. Symbols and letters should be black.

25 | P a g e



2. Warning sign – (Risk of Danger) Warning of a particular hazard. Sign are made of Triangular with a
yellow background, black border and black symbols.

3. Mandatory sign – (Must Do) Round sign with blue background and white symbols.

4. Safe Condition signs – (Safe way) Square or rectangular signs with white symbols on a green
background.

26 | P a g e



5. Fire Equipment signs – (Fire-fighting use) Square or rectangular signs with white symbols or letters
on a red background.

6. General signs – (For information) Square or rectangular signs with black symbols or letters on a white
or green background.

Worker’s Welfare Facilities

Employers must provide a number of facilities to ensure the welfare and comfort of their
workforce:
• Toilets and washing facilities
• Drinking water
• Storage of clothing and changing areas, if appropriate
• Rest and eating areas
• Showers, depending on the type of work

Construction Hazards
• Open excavation
• Falling objects
• Wielding Operations
• Dust and Dirt
• Temporary wirings
• Temporary overhead electrical lines

27 | P a g e



Electrical safety (OSHS Rule 1210) and lock-out / tag-out

Electricity usually does not look hazardous. Many people have been electrocuted when they
thought they knew what they were doing. Today almost all industries and manufacturing relies
on electricity in the workplace – from lighting to operating complex machinery

Circuit-protection devices:
• Fuses
• Circuit breakers
• Ground-fault circuit-interrupters (GFCI's)

A GFCI is a supersensitive, rapid-action power switch, which breaks a circuit when there is
more than 5 milliamps difference between the hot wire and the neutral or grounded conductors.

Current Overload:
• equipment malfunctions or overheats
• too many electrical appliances are on the same circuit
• there is a temporary power surge in the circuit from lightning or electric motor start up
• insulation between two conductors melts or wears through, creating a short circuit back
to the power source

Resetting Circuit-Protection Devices:

• replace the fuse or reset the breaker
• wait a while to see if the power stays on
• check for any smoke, heat or unusual odor. If you notice anything out of order, de-
energize the circuit ASAP. Don’t replace the fuse or reset the breaker a second time
until you find and correct the problem.

Rules for Circuit Protection

• do not create an octopus connection
• never bypass, bridge nor disable any circuit protection device
• never replace any circuit-protection device in an energized or live circuit always be sure
that the power is safely off
• replace a fuse with an exact duplicate; same rating. Too high – do not protect the circuit;
too low – could explode and shower you with pieces of glass or metal
• use fuse pliers to remove fuses
• wear safety glasses for added protection
• be sure the markings on the old and new fuses match.

LOCKOUT (LOTO) is blocking the flow of energy from the power source to the equipment
– and keeping it blocked out.

LOTO protects you from the unexpected start-up of machines or release of stored energy
during service or maintenance

In a LOTO, place a lock on a disconnect switch, circuit breaker, valve handle to make sure it
cannot be moved from the OFF or closed position.

In a tag out, you attach a written warning tag at the place where the equipment would be
energized, such as at the ON switch or on a valve that opens a supply line.

28 | P a g e



Your Safety and that of your co-workers – depends on the proper recognition
and use of locks or tags. So, remember:
• Never use your LO/TO for locking personal or unauthorized items
• Never lend or borrow a lock or tag
• Never remove someone else’s lock or tag

Steps to Applying Lockout/Tagout

1. Prepare for shutdown – know the equipment /its energy source before
working on it 12
2. Notify employees
3. Shutdown – turn off the equipment
4. Isolate – find and isolate every form of energy that the machine uses. This
includes pulling fuses, throwing disconnects and capping any secondary
sources of energy.
5. Apply LOTO – anything that might restore the flow of energy to the work
area must be locked out.
6. Release stored Energy – from capacitors, relief valves, etc.
7. Verify power is off

In situations where multiple pieces of equipment are being locked, an authorized employee
places all keys in a lock box to which each employee attaches his or her personal lock.

RESTARTING THE EQUIPMENT:

1. Remove tools, restore machine guards

2. Check employees – Notify Personnel that LOTO devices are being removed. Remove
employees from the area or make sure they are a safe distance from the equipment,
3. Remove LOTO Devices - The person who placed each device must be the one to remove
it. If someone who placed a LOTO device is not present, notify your supervisor who will
follow specific procedures. Never remove it yourself.
4. Notify affected employees
5. Restore energy.

29 | P a g e



Fire safety

FIRE – the result of the chemical combination of a combustible material (fuel) with oxygen
in the presence of enough heat.

2017 Bureau of Fire Protection Fire Incident Report

Fire incidents went down by 51%, comparing data gathered from January to June 2016 to
the same period this year.
§ 26,969 Fire incidents in the first semester of 2016
§ 13,215 Fire incidents in the first semester of 2017

Characteristics and Behavior of Fire

It is virtually impossible to predict exactly when a fire will occur and, upon its inception, the
extent of its destructive potential. However, through scientific knowledge of ignition, the
combustibility of solids, liquids, and gases, and the products of combustion, effective ways to
control the dangers of fire and explosion can be determined.

Ordinary fire (one that can be extinguished by ordinary extinguishing agents) results from
combustion of fuel, heat and oxygen. When a substance that will burn is heated to a certain
critical temperature called its “ignition temperature”, it will ignite and continue to burn as
long as there is fuel, the proper temperature, and a supply of oxygen.

For many years, the three-sided figure of the fire triangle has adequately been used to explain
and describe the combustion and extinguishing theory. If anyone of the three elements is
removed, a fire cannot exist. A new theory has developed to explain combustion and
extinguishments further. This is the transition from the plain geometric triangular figure, which
we recognize as the fire triangle, to a four-sided geometric figure, a tetrahedron, which
resembles a pyramid.

Basic Chemistry of fire

1. Fuel or Combustible material – a material, which contains chemical elements that
will react with oxygen, and under proper conditions, produce fire.
2. Oxygen – we need 16% oxygen to sustain fire.
3. Sufficient heat to raise the temperature of the fuel surface to a point where
chemical union of the fuel and oxygen occurs.
4. Chemical Chain Reaction – vapors of gases, which are distilled during burning
process of a material, are carried into the flame.

Methods of Heat Transfer

• Conduction – direct conduct of heat from one body to another.
• Convention – the circulating medium of heat transfer, occurs upward.
• Radiation – when energy travels through space or material in waves.

30 | P a g e


Products of Combustion – When a fuel burns, it undergoes chemical changes and there are
four products of combustion:
• Fire Gases – refers to the vaporized products of combustion.
• Flame – is the visible luminous body of a burning gas, which becomes hotter
and less luminous when it is mixed with increased amounts of oxygen.
• Heat – is a form of energy, which is measured in degrees of temperature to
signify its intensity. It is responsible for the spread of fire.
• Smoke – is a visible product of incomplete combustion.

Phases of burning
• Incipient Phase or Beginning Phase
• Flame Producing Phase or Free-Burning Phase
• Smoldering Phase

Fire extinguishing method

Under the theory of the fire triangle, there are three methods of fire suppression. With the
introduction of the tetrahedron concept, a fourth suppression method, stop the chain reaction,
has to be considered. The method of stopping rapid chemical chain reaction (burning) depends
upon the size and the type of fuel involved.
1. Isolation – by eliminating the combustible material
2. Smothering – by cutting of the oxygen supply
3. Quenching – by cooling to a point below the ignition temperature
4. Inhibition – by inhibiting the rapid oxidation of the fuel

Classification of fires and extinguishing methods

• Class A Fires – Fires involving ordinary combustible materials, such as wood, cloth,
paper, rubber and many plastics. Class A Extinguishment – water is used in cooling or
quenching effect to reduce the temperature of the burning material below its ignition
temperature.

• Class B Fires – Fires involving flammable liquids, greases and gases. Class B
Extinguishment – The smothering or blanketing effect of oxygen exclusion is most
effective. Other extinguishing methods include removal of fuel and temperature
reduction.

• Class C Fires – Fires involving energized electrical equipment. Class C Extinguishment

– This fire can sometimes be controlled by non- conducting extinguishing agent. The
safest procedure is always to attempt to de-energized high voltage circuits and treat as
Class A or B fire depending upon the fuel involved.

• Class D Fires – Fires involving combustible metals, such as magnesium, titanium,

zirconium, sodium and potassium. Class D Extinguishment – The extremely high
temperature of some burning metals makes water and other common extinguishing
agents ineffective. There is no agent available that will effectively control fires in all
combustible metals. Special extinguishing agents are available for control of fire in each
of the metals and are marked specifically for that metal.

**How to extinguish fire will be discussed in module : Emergency Preparedness

31 | P a g e


Welding Safety
People have been welding in one form or another for over 2000 years. But like many industrial
processes, welding can be very dangerous.

Whether an employee is working with the hazardous gases of an “oxy-acetylene” unit, the high
voltage of “stick welding”, or the combination of gas and electricity that powers “MIG and
“TIG” operations, flying sparks, toxic fumes, electric shock and high temperatures are just the
some of the things that can make welding a dangerous proposition.

Inspect welding equipment

1. Arc units need to be inspected.

a. Inspect the frame of the generator for proper grounding
b. Make sure that the work leads and electrode leads are properly connected
c. Examine cables for damaged insulation or bare conductors (these can cause
severe shock if left unrepaired)
2. It is important to be prepared for hazards throughout the entire welding process. You
need to protect yourself and others from these dangers:
a. Intense light
b. Flying sparks
c. Toxic fumes
d. Electric sparks

Eye protection

1. The powerful ultraviolet and infrared light produced during the welding can be extremely
hazardous. If left unprotected…:
a. Your eyes can suffer the short-term discomfort of “Welders Flash”
b. Your retina may be burned resulting in permanent damage
c. You could even be blinded

2. Goggles fitted with specially tinted lenses must be worn during oxy-fuel cutting, welding
and brazing.
a. These special lenses block hazardous light
b. They also help shield your eyes from molten spatter

3. Arc welding produces an intense light that requires even stronger protection:
a. A helmet or hand shield should be used
b. These are fitted with specially designed filters to screen out harmful rays
c. The helmets or shields design and size can also prevent the light from burning your
face and ears.

4. Don’t forget that safety glasses must still be worn underneath your helmet or hand shield
for complete protection.

5. Make sure that all of your protective equipment is in good condition before you begin
welding.
a. If you spot any imperfections, get a replacement.

32 | P a g e


6. Hazardous light can affect those around you as well.

a. Set up protective screens to shield other workers from the light you generate
b. Warn workers in the area before you strike an arc.

Hazardous fumes
1) Hazardous fumes are a by-product of many welding operations
• Without proper ventilation these fumes will collect and contaminate the air
• Protect yourself by using exhaust fans or other mechanical ventilating devices

2) Substances that require mechanical ventilation are:

• Stainless steel,
• Lead
• Mercury
• Fluoride compounds
• Zinc
• Cadmium
• Beryllium
• Chemical cleaning compounds

3) It is especially important to use mechanical ventilation:

• In rooms with less than 10,000 cu. Ft. of space per welder
• Where ceilings are lower than 16 feet
• In confined spaces where regular ventilation is blocked

4) Some periods of exposure to hazardous fumes can lead to irritation of the:

§ Eye
§ Nose
§ Throat
§ May even cause Metal Fume Fever

5) To avoid these problems, you must maintain a healthy breathing zone:

§ This means getting a lot of air flowing around your work
§ When using screens or other barriers, leave enough space for good air movement

33 | P a g e


The use of respirators

6) Sometimes even mechanical ventilation is not enough protection. In these
situations, you will need a respirator.
• Before starting work, fit test the respirator
• This ensures that it is the right size for your face

7) Remember that respirators are fitted with filters that capture hazardous fumes
• Make sure to use the correct filter for the fumes and gases you will be exposed to
• Wearing the wrong filter can be disastrous

Hearing protection - Ask your supervisor about the type of hearing protection you
should use.
8) Hearing protection is also a necessity in many welding jobs. Things that can
be very noisy include:
• Moving pieces of metal around
• Banging away at slag

9) If you don’t take proper precautions, you can be exposed to noise hazards
that can become real problems
• Short periods of noise can lead to fatigue and irritability
• Extended exposure can lead to partial- or even permanent heading damage

10) To guard against these hazards, you need to protect yourself with:
• Earplugs
• Ear Canal caps
• Earmuffs

Other PPE
1) Welding can produce a lot of heat. To protect your hands, you need a strong
pair of leather gloves
• Many welding gloves offer additional protection with “welting”, an extra
piece of leather, sewn into the finger and the palm
• This protects the threads in the gloves from getting burned
2) But even with this extra protection, you need to be careful
• Never hold heated metal with your gloved hands
• Use insulated clamps or other tools if you need to manipulate hot objects

3) The type of clothing you wear also plays a role in welding safety
• Dress in natural fibers like cotton or wool
• These are less likely to ignite than synthetic fibers

4) Wear long sleeved shirts with closeable collar for protection against hazardous light
• Just like the sun, UV light from welding can burn your skin
• Wearing leather aprons and sleeves will also keep sparks from burning
through your clothes

5) Another good idea is to wear high top shoes

• These keep sparks and molten metal away from your ankles and feet

34 | P a g e


Sparking and the risk of fire

1) Once you are dressed for work, you need to reduce the risk of fire from
• Sparks
• High temperature
• Flammable gases

2) To combat the risk of fire, many facilities limit the area where welding can take place
• Never begin to weld unless your facility has authorized the work
• This confirms that the area is safe for welding operations

3) Sparks are a by-product of just about every welding operation

• Preventing them from starting fires requires a concentrated effort
• Before welding, remove anything that can burn from the area

It is especially important not to weld around combustible materials like:

• Wood
• Paper
• Fuel
• These ignite easily and can easily burst into flames
• Aerosol cans should also be removed from the welding areas
• They hold gases under pressure
• When exposed to intense heat, the gases expand and can
cause the can to explode

Use guards or barriers to protect ignitable materials that can’t be easily

removed from sparks or heat

• Sweep up any debris that may be on the floor

• It is best to sweep in a 35’ radius, beginning at the spot where you are
going to weld
• If it is possible for a fire to still ignite, a trained “fire watcher” is required
to stand by
• This person should be ready to extinguish a fire if it breaks out
• Because metal will stay hot for some time, the fire watch must be
maintained for at least half an hour after welding has ended

A review of important program points:

• Welding can be a powerful tool, but we need to respect the dangers it
presents
• Always check out your equipment before starting any welding jobs
• By following safe work practice, you will avoid accidents
• Always wear the appropriate PPE
• Keep your area well ventilated, making sure the air you breathe is safe
and clean
• Prevent fires by removing or shielding any flammable objects within
the area

General Requirements of Housekeeping

35 | P a g e


Rule 1060.01 (4) Good housekeeping shall be maintained at all times through
cleanliness of building, yards, machines, equipment, regular waste disposal, and
orderly arrangement of processes, operations, storage and filing of materials.

• All places of employment. Passageways, storerooms and service rooms

shall be kept clean and orderly and in sanitary condition.
• The floor of every workroom shall be maintained in a clean, and so far as
possible, drainage shall be maintained; mats or raised platforms shall be
provided.
• Every floor, working place and passageways shall be kept free from
protruding nails, splinters, holes and loose boards.

Checklist for Housekeeping

1. Do’s
• Gather and remove debris to keep the work site orderly
• Plan for the adequate disposal of scrap, waste and
surplus materials
• Keep the work area and all equipment tidy. Delegate areas
for waste materials and provide containers
• Keep stairways, passageways, and gangways free of
materials, supplies and obstructions
• Secure loose or light materials that is stored on roofs or
open floors
• Remove or bend over, nails that are protruding from lumber

2. Don’ts
• Do not permit rubbish to fall freely from any level of the
project. Use chutes or other approved devices for materials
• Do not throw tools or other materials
• Do not raise or lower any tools or equipment by its own cable or
supply hose

5-S in Good Housekeeping What is 5-S?

It is a systemized set to steps to good housekeeping to organized work
areas, keeps rules and standards, and maintain the discipline needed to
perform a good job.

5s Program
Seiri Sort Suriin
Seiton Set/Systemize Sinupin
Seiso Shine/Sweep Simutin
Seiketsu Standardize Siguradihin
Shitsuke Sustain/Self- discipline Sariling Kusa

5S Philosophy
• Eliminates waste and raises productivity
• Attach the root of the problem
• Everyone should participate
• It is necessary to standardize and conduct continuous training since
human is by nature forgetful
36 | P a g e


MODULE 3:
EXCAVATION SAFETY

Zero accident is the target of all construction activities. This includes working on and in
excavations.

Objectives: By the end of the session, the participant will be able to:
• List the different hazards related to excavations
• Illustrate the corrective actions to address the hazards

Safety Requirement Prior to Excavation

1. Prior to opening an excavation, check excavation permit if any.
2. All underground installations (i.e. sewer, water, fuel, electrical and communication
lines, etc., shall be located and protected from damaged or displacement.
3. Trees, boulders, stumps, or other surface encumbrances located so as to create
hazards at any time during operations shall be removed before excavation is started.

DEFINITION OF TERMS
Excavation – Any man-made cut, cavity or depression in an earth surface that is formed by
earth removal. The width measured at the bottom is not greater than 15 ft.
Trench Excavation – A narrow excavation where the depth of a trench is greater than its
width, and the width measured at the bottom is not greater than 15 ft.

37 | P a g e


Sheathing - shall mean the vertical member of shoring and timbering which directly
resists pressure from side of an excavation

General requirements prior to excavation

Planning

Before any excavation work begins, site evaluation and planning must be completed.
During the planning stage, the following must be done:
• Soil conditions must be evaluated.
• Protective systems must be designed and put in place.
• Approved safety equipment must be on site and readily accessible.
• Potentially dangerous contact points with utilities such as gas or electric services must
• be identified.
• Oxygen levels must be tested.
• Potentially hazardous fumes or gases must be tested for.
• Safe entry and exit points must be determined.

Spoils
• Never place spoils within two feet of an excavation's edge.
• Adequate retaining devices must be installed to protect exposed excavation
workers from materials or equipment that could fall or roll unto them.
• Spoils must be placed in such a way that water (rain, ruptured pipes, etc.) is
diverted away from the excavation.

Access and Egress

• It is essential that a stairway, ladder, or ramp be provided in trench excavations 4
feet or more in depth, so as to require no more than 25 feet of lateral travel for
employees.
• Ramps and runways constructed of two or more structural members shall have the
structural members connected together to prevent displacement.
• Structural members used for ramps and runways shall be of uniform thickness.

Surface Crossing
• Surface crossings over trenches are not allowed unless conditions dictate such
crossings are necessary.
• If surface crossings are necessary, such crossings must be constructed under the
supervision of a registered professional engineer.
• Other crossing requirements include the following:
• Crossings must have a minimum width of 20 inches.
• Crossings must be equipped with standard rails.
• Crossings must extend a minimum of 24 inches past the surface edge of the trench.

Working Surface
• Excavation shall be kept free of water at all times
• And in muddy area, workers should be provided with boots to reduce the hazard
of slipping.

38 | P a g e


Underground Utilities
• Determine location of underground facilities and take necessary steps to prevent
damage to these facilities.
• In an open excavation, support, protect or remove underground installation.

Protective System
Primary purpose is to protect employees from hazards present in the workplace.
Employers must protect employees from accidents related to cave-ins by designing,
implementing, and enforcing use of excavation protective systems.
Exceptions to the requirement for excavation protective systems include circumstances
where:
• Excavations are made entirely in stable rock.
• Excavations are less than 5 feet (1.52 m) in depth, and examination of the ground
by a competent person provides no indication of a potential cave-in.

Protective systems shall have the capacity to resist without failure all loads that are
intended or could reasonably be expected to be applied or transmitted to the system.

A. Sloping - Protective systems include sloping and benching systems, shield

systems, and support systems. A well-designed protective system is one that works for the
type of soil, depth of cut, and the type of construction being performed in the trench.

B. Benching - Benching refers to the formation of one or a series of horizontal

levels or steps along the side walls of an excavation, usually with vertical or near-vertical
surfaces between levels.

C. Shoring or Shielding - Shoring provides support to excavation walls. It is used

where the location or depth of the cut makes sloping back to the maximum allowable slope
impractical.

D. Trench Boxes or Shields - Both trench boxes and shoring serve to protect
workers from cave-ins. Trench boxes differ from shoring, however, in that trench boxes
are shields used in trenches to support the trench face.

E. Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring - Hydraulic trench support systems can be

directly dropped into an excavation. By increasing hydraulic pressure, the qualified
operator can prevent the forms from moving or shifting while workers are in the trench. In
addition, trench pins are installed in case of hydraulic system failure.

Choosing a Protective System

The following factors should be considered when designing an effective excavation
protective system:
§ Soil classification
§ Depth of cut
§ Water content of soil
§ Changes due to weather and climate
§ Other operations in the vicinity.

39 | P a g e


Installation and Removal of Protective System

When installing support systems, the following requirements are vital for proper employee
protection:
§ Securely connect members of support systems
§ Safely install support systems
§ Never overload members of support systems
§ Install other structural members to carry loads imposed on the support system
when temporary removal of individual members is necessary
§ Backfilling shall progress together with the removal of support systems from
excavations

Rule 1413.04 states the requirement for the provision for barricades. The top of the walls of an
excavation more than 2.0 m. (6 ft.) deep shall be barricaded to a height of at least 1 m. (3 ft.) to
prevent the fall of workers.

The means of access and escape are stipulated in Rule 1413.05:

(1) Every excavation over 1 m. (3 ft.) deep shall be provided with means of access and escape in
case of flooding or collapse of the excavation work.
(2) Every excavation shall have at least one (1) ladder in every 16.6 m. (50 ft.) of length or fraction
thereof, of a length, which shall extend at least 0.83 m. (2’6”) above the top of the excavation to
provide a firm handhold when stepping on or off the ladder.

Working in Excavation
Prior to Operation:
§ Check excavation permit
§ Identify all underground installations
§ Remove trees, boulders, stumps, other surface encumbrances and hazards before
starting excavation

During Operation
§ Wear appropriate PPE
§ Give special attention to side slopes that are adversely affected by weather,
moisture content or vibration
§ Safe working distance between workers
§ Maintain guardrails, fences, or other barricades and warning lights

During Break Time

§ Workmen should never stand or take rest on high banks of soft material
§ Do not leave tools, materials, or debris in walkways, ramps, or near the edge of
excavations
§ Do not use guardrails as resting place
§ Become Aware of the following
§ Utilities
§ Adjacent Structure

40 | P a g e


Inspection
A competent person must make daily inspections of excavations, adjacent areas, and
protective systems for evidence of a situation that could result in possible cave-ins,
indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous
conditions to ensure safe operations.
§ Before work starts and as needed throughout shifts.
§ After rainstorms, high winds, or other occurrences that may increase hazards.
§ When employees are exposed to potential hazards.

These inspections are only required when employee exposure can be reasonably anticipated.
Employees must be immediately evacuated from any excavation under the following
circumstances:
§ A possible cave-in is identified.
§ Hazardous atmospheres are detected.
§ Protective systems fail.
§ When any other potentially dangerous situation arises.
Note: Employees must not be allowed to return to the excavation until the necessary
precautions have been taken to ensure their safety.

Every part of an excavation over 2 m. (6 ft.) deep where workers work shall be inspected
by the person in charge at least once every day. This is found in Rule 1413.06 of the OSHS.
Rule 1413.07 states the supervision and execution of timbering and other work.
(1) Timbering or support for any excavation shall be erected, added, altered or dismantled
only under the direction of the project supervisor.
(2) Timbering and other support for any excavation shall be of good construction, sound
materials, and of adequate strength for the purpose for which it is used and properly
maintained,
(3) All struts and bracings shall be properly secured to prevent displacement.
(4) Timber giving off toxic saps or substance soluble in water shall not be used for
timbering.

Hazards of excavation works

Excavating is considered the most hazardous operation in the field of construction. An
excavation is any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in the earth's surface formed
by earth removal.

The dangers of excavations come from the possibility of cave-ins, in addition to the
possibility of the following:
§ Lack of oxygen-asphyxiation
§ Accidental break of underground utility (such as gas, electricity) lines
§ Collapse due to moving machinery near the edge of the excavations
§ Inhalation of toxic materials
§ Water accumulation
§ Falling objects

Note: all excavation having a depth of 4ft or deeper shall be automatically classified into
confined spaced

Rule 1413.08 states the requirement on managing the harmful dust, gases and fumes.

41 | P a g e


Specifically, it states the following requirements:

(1) When harmful dusts, gases and fumes are present in an excavation to such a
degree hazardous to the safety and health of the workers, all measures shall be taken
either by exhaust ventilation or by other means to free the area of such contaminants.

(2) Internal combustion engine shall only be operated in an excavation when provision
is made to ensure that the exhaust gases and fumes are rendered harmless or discharged
to a point away from the excavation.

Types of soils and the maximum allowable slopes

Actual slope means the slope to which an excavation face is excavated.
Distress means that the soil is in a condition where a cave-in is imminent or is likely to occur. Distress
is evidenced by such phenomena as the development of fissures in the face of or adjacent to an open
excavation; the subsidence of the edge of an excavation; the slumping of material from the face or
the bulging or heaving of material from the bottom of an excavation; the spalling of material from the
face of an excavation; and ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material such as pebbles or little clumps
of material suddenly separating from the face of an excavation and trickling or rolling down into the
excavation.
Maximum allowable slope means the steepest incline of an excavation face that is acceptable for the
most favorable site conditions as protection against cave-ins, and is expressed as the ratio of
horizontal distance to vertical rise (H:V).
Short term exposure means a period of time less than or equal to 24 hours that an excavation is open.

Slope Configurations
(All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)
Excavations made in Type A soil.
1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of ¾:1.

SIMPLE SLOPE -- GENERAL

Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12
feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of ½:1.

42 | P a g e


SIMPLE SLOPE -- SHORT TERM

2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4 to 1
and maximum bench dimensions as follows:

SIMPLE BENCH

(osha)
Principal causes of soil collapse

Inadequate Protection Systems in Place
A vertical wall of soil is generally unstable. Although it may initially hold up when the soil conditions
are right, disturbances such as vibration or changes in the soil’s moisture can cause the wall to
collapse. To ensure worker safety, appropriate protection systems are required. Depending on the soil
type, soil moisture, trench depth, and other factors, one of four types of protection systems are used:

Benching. Unstable vertical walls of trenches are cut back into a stair-like pattern of steps.
Sloping. The trench wall is cut back at an angle to form a constant slope.
Supports and shoring. A trench wall can be stabilized using timber supports or held in place with
hydraulic cylinders that push against shoring made of aluminum or steel.

43 | P a g e


Trench boxes. Trench boxes protect workers from cave-ins and do not support the trench wall. The
space between the cave wall and trench box is minimized and backfilled.
Vibration from nearby traffic, equipment, and construction operations can move and destabilize the
soil in the trench wall. The choice of protection systems should take vibration into account.

Stress Loading the Soil

Heavy loads and construction equipment located too close to the trench can stress the trench wall soil
to the point of failure and cause a collapse. Avoid stressing the soil by keeping heavy loads and
equipment a safe distance away.
Excavated Materials Located Too Close to the Trench
Pushing these materials back from the trench will prevent their collapse back into it.

Failure to Inspect the Trench before Each Shift and after Weather Events
The properties of soil change with moisture content and other environmental factors. An overnight
rain can make the trench walls unstable for example. If heavy construction equipment accidentally
gets too close to the trench, its walls should be inspected.

Shoring and Timbering (Rule 1413:01)

(1) The walls of every excavation over 1 m. (3 ft.) deep shall be supported by adequate shoring and
timbering to prevent collapse, provided that this shall not apply to an excavation: a. in which a worker
is not required to enter for any purposes. b. cut in solid rock. c. the walls are sloped to forty-five
degree (45) angle from the vertical or cut to the angle of repose. d. in which a worker is engaged in
timbering or other work for the purpose of compliance with this Rule if precautions are taken to
ensure his safety.
(2) Shoring or timbering in excavation over 6.6 m. (29 ft.) deep and those installed to prevent the
movement, collapse of an adjacent structure shall be designed by a structural engineer and approved
by the proper authority.
(3) No excavation in an adjacent building or structure shall be undertaken unless steps are taken to
prevent danger to workers.
(4) Before shoring or timbering, the walls of an excavation shall be stripped of loose rocks or other
materials that might slide, roll or fall on workers.
5) Every excavation over 1 m. (3 ft.) shall be kept free of water at all times.

Minimum Berm (Rule 1413.02)

(1) Excavated material shall be kept from the edge of the excavation to provide a clear berm of a
distance not less than one third of the depth of the excavation.
(2) Where the disposal area is limited, a berm of reduced width of not less than 1 m. (3 ft.) may be
allowed, provided the materials being excavated are stable, the shoring is designed to carry the
additional load, and barriers are provided to prevent roll back of the excavated materials.

SOURCE:
https://www.oshatrain.org/courses/mods/814m1.html
Occupational Safety and Health Standard Rule 1415
DO 13 Series of 1998

44 | P a g e


MODULE 5:
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY

Like most construction workers, the use of tools is necessary for our job. Daily tasks are
handled with better results, accuracy and speed through the use of hand and portable powered
tools. In the process of removing or avoiding the hazards, workers must learn to recognize the
hazards associated with the different types of tools and the safety precautions necessary to
prevent those hazards.

Objectives: As the session closes, the user will be expected to list the different safe
guidelines in tool handling; likewise, will also be able to list the injuries that arise from
hazards related to misuse, abuse and lack of knowledge.

Most important hazards in the use of hand tools:

• Blows and cuts to the hands or other parts of the body.
• Eye injuries due to the projection of fragments or particles.
• Sprains due to very abrupt movements or strains.
• Electrical Contacts.

Principal causes:
• Inappropriate use of the tools.
• Use of faulty or inappropriate tools.
• Use of poor-quality tools.
• Not using personal protection equipment.
• Forced postures.

Preventive measures:
• Use quality tools in accordance with the type of work to carry out.
• Properly instruct personnel in the use of each type of tool.

45 | P a g e


• Use tools with an insulating covering in work in the vicinity of live parts.
• Use protective goggles in all cases and above all when there is a risk of
projected particles.
• Use gloves to handle sharp tools.
• Periodically check tools (repair, sharpening, cleaning, etc.).
• Periodically check the state of handles, insulating coverings, etc.
• Store and/or transport tools in boxes, tool bags or on suitable panels, where
each tool has its place.

Portable Hand Tools Safety

1. Hack Saw
§ Adjust and tighten saw blades.
§ Install blades with teeth pointing forward.
§ Use proper appropriate blade (teeth per inch)
§ Apply pressure on the forward stroke only.

2. Metal Files
§ Only use files with secure handles.
§ Do not use a file as hammer or pry.
§ Clamp work to be filed in a vise. Waist level.
§ To file, push forward while bearing down on it. Release the pressure
and bring file back to original position.

3. Wrenches
§ Workers brace themselves to avoid losing balance.
§ Pull the wrench towards you.
§ Inspect wrenches for flaws.
§ Do not grind wrenches to reduce their sizes.

4. Screwdriver
§ Most screwdrivers are not designed to be used on electrical
equipment. Use an insulated screwdriver.
§ Do not hold an object in the palm of one hand and press a
screwdriver into it, place it on a bench or a table.
§ Never hammer with a screwdriver.
§ Check for broken handles, bent blade, etc.

5. Pliers
§ Do not use pliers as a substitute for hammers or wrenches.
§ Use insulated pliers when doing electrical work.
§ Inspect installation frequently to make certain that it is free of breaks or cracks.

6. Hammer
§ Use the correct hammer for the type of work to be done.
§ Have an unobstructed swing when using a hammer and watch for
overhead interference.

46 | P a g e


§ Check for defects before using.

Hazards in hand tools

Hand tools are tools that are powered manually. Hand tools include anything from axes to
wrenches. The greatest hazards posed by hand tools result from misuse and improper
maintenance.

Some examples include the following:

• If a chisel is used as a screwdriver, the tip of the chisel may break and fly off,
hitting the user or other employees.
• If a wooden handle on a tool, such as a hammer or an axe, is loose, splintered,
or cracked, the head of the tool may fly off and strike the user or other
employees.
• If the jaws of a wrench are sprung, the wrench might slip.
• If impact tools such as chisels, wedges, or drift pins have mushroomed heads,
the heads might shatter on impact, sending sharp fragments flying toward the
user or other employees.

Main types of portable power tools

Portable power tools are a general category of tools used in manufacturing and
construction industries, designed to be moved from place to place. They are different
from standard tools which are permanently mounted in a workspace.
Portable power tools refer to small hand tools, which can be carried inside a tool belt
or easily shipped in a toolbox. They will be either electric tools powered by a cord or
cordless versions powered by powerful lithium-ion batteries.

Drills can serve many functions, simply by switching the bit. It can be used as a
power screwdriver, auger, and of course, as a drill. Depending on the bit, a drill may
be able to create a hole in wood, plastic, drywall, and metal. An auger bit is used to
drill larger holes, and there are even circular bits for cutting holes several inches in
diameter.

Circular saws are used primarily for cutting planks of wood. When cutting large
sheets of plywood, jigsaws are most often used. Both types of saws are available as
portable power tools, and can make a carpenter’s job much easier. The reciprocating
saw is one of the most versatile tools, able to cut through a variety of materials like
wood, plastic, drywall, and even metal.

Sanders have long been some of the most useful power tools. Their small size and
portability allow woodworkers to handle a variety of projects. Instead of lifting the
wood to the sander, as with a table sander, the sander is brought to the wood. Modern
sanders often feature bags to capture sander dust as well.

Angle grinders are also labeled as side grinders or disc grinders, and they’re a
handheld power tool that grind, cut (through basically anything — even steel, tile and
mortar), and polish various objects and materials. They can be powered by
compressed air, an electric motor or petrol engine. The key word here however is
“angle”, and the geared head is at a right-angle mounted on a disc (replaceable) with
a side handle an adjustable guard to get into those little spaces you can’t usually fit
into as well as counter side forces that are sometimes created while cutting (as
47 | P a g e


opposed to axial forces typically created by other tools like power drills). They come
as corded or cordless.

The chop saw is definitely rare among tool enthusiasts, but still holds some use
today. Also known as a cut off saw, these are often compared to miter saws since
they’re pretty similar but hold a few differences at the same time. Chop saws have a
blade that is always perpendicular to your bench top table and sticks to strictly 90
degree cuts. Miter saws on the other hand provide a swivel to cut in different angles
as opposed to just 90 degrees.

Danger of Portable Power Tools

§ Electric shock
§ Particles in the eyes
§ Fires
§ Falls
§ Explosion of gases

Safety precautions in the use of portable electric tools

Work Area Safety

§ Keep work area clean and well lit. Cluttered or dark areas invite accidents.
§ Do not operate power tools in explosive atmospheres, such as in the
presence of flammable liquids, gases or dust. Power tools create sparks
which may ignite the dust or fumes.
§ Keep children and bystanders away while operating a power tool.
Distractions can cause you to lose control.

Personal Safety
§ Use personal protective equipment such as eye or face, hearing, hand
and foot protection.
§ Prevent unintentional starting. Ensure the switch is in the off-position
before connecting to power source and/or battery pack, picking up or
carrying the tool.
§ Carrying power tools with your finger on the switch or energizing power
tools that have the switch on invites accidents.
§ Remove any adjusting key or wrench before turning the power tool on.
§ Do not overreach. Keep proper footing and balance at all times. This
enables better control of the power tool in unexpected situations.
§ Turn off the power when not in use.
§ Do not use the tool where flammable or explosive vapors, dust or similar
substances are present.
§ Operate electric tools within their design limit.
§ Do not use electric tools in damp or wet locations unless they are
approved for that purpose.
§ Ensure that cords from electric tools do not present tripping hazard

Electrical Safety
§ Power tool plugs must match the outlet. Never modify the plug in any way.
Do not use any adapter plugs with earthed (grounded) power tools. Unmodified
plugs and matching outlets will reduce risk of electric shock.
48 | P a g e


§ Use the power tool, accessories and tool bits etc. in accordance with these
instructions, taking into account the working conditions and the work to be
performed. Use of the power tool for operations different from those intended
could result in a hazardous situation

Other Precautions
§ Never carry a tool by the cord or hose.
§ Never yank the cord or hose to disconnect it from receptacle.
§ Keep cords and hoses away from heat, oil, and sharp edges.
§ Maintain tools with care: keep them sharp and clean for best
performance.

Power Tools Care and Servicing

§ Have your power tool serviced by a qualified repair person.
§ Keep handles dry, clean and free from oil and grease.
§ Always be sure that the tool is switched off and unplugged before
attempting to perform inspection or maintenance.
§ Remove all damaged portable power tools from use and tag them: ”Do Not Use”
§ Clean and maintain tools according to the manufacturers' instructions.
§ Check tools before use to ensure that they are in good working order.
§ Store tools and cartridges in a locked dry container when they are
not in use. Ensure that the tool is unloaded before storing it
§ Check the chamber to see that the barrel is clean and free from any
obstruction, before using the tool.

Powered Hand Tools - Pneumatic Tools

Pneumatic tools are powered by compressed air. Common types of these air-powered
hand tools that are used in industry include buffers, nailing and stapling guns,
grinders, drills, jack hammers, chipping hammers, riveting guns, sanders and
wrenches.

Pneumatic Tools
Pneumatic tools are powered by compressed air and include chippers, drills, hammers,
and sanders.
There are several dangers associated with the use of pneumatic tools. First and
foremost is the danger of getting hit by one of the tool's attachments or by some kind
of fastener the worker is using with the tool.

Pneumatic tools must be checked to see that the tools are fastened securely to the air
hose to prevent them from becoming disconnected. A short wire or positive locking
device attaching the air hose to the tool must also be used and will serve as an added
safeguard.
§ Use the proper hose and fittings of the correct diameter.
§ Use hoses specifically designed to resist abrasion, cutting, crushing and failure from
continuous flexing.
§ Choose air-supply hoses that have a minimum working pressure rating of 1035 kPa
(150 psig) or 150% of the maximum pressure produced in the system, whichever is
higher.
§ Check hoses regularly for cuts, bulges and abrasions. Tag and replace, if defective.
§ Blow out the air line before connecting a tool. Hold hose firmly and blow away from

49 | P a g e


yourself and others.

§ Make sure that hose connections fit properly and are equipped with a mechanical
means of securing the connection (e.g., chain, wire, or positive locking device).
§ Install quick disconnects of a pressure-release type rather than a disengagement
type. Attach the male end of the connector to the tool, NOT the hose.
§ Do not operate the tool at a pressure above the manufacturer's rating.
§ Turn off the air pressure to hose when not in use or when changing power tools.
§ Do not carry a pneumatic tool by its hose.
§ Avoid creating trip hazards caused by hoses laid across walkways or curled
underfoot.
§ Do not use compressed air to blow debris or to clean dirt from clothes.
§ Do not clean with compressed air

Use of lock-out / tag-out system

Lockout is defined "Control of Hazardous Energy - Lockout and Other Methods" as the "placement
of a lockout device on an energy-isolating device in accordance with an established procedure." A
lockout device is "a mechanical means of locking that uses an individually keyed lock to secure an
energy-isolating device in a position that prevents energization of a machine, equipment, or a
process."

Lockout is one way to control hazardous energy. See the OSH Answers Hazardous Energy Control
Programs for a description of the types of hazardous energy, and steps required in a control program.

In practice, lockout is the isolation of energy from the system (a machine, equipment, or process)
which physically locks the system in a safe mode. The energy-isolating device can be a manually
operated disconnect switch, a circuit breaker, a line valve, or a block (Note: push buttons, selection
switches and other circuit control switches are not considered energy-isolating devices). In most
cases, these devices will have loops or tabs which can be locked to a stationary item in a safe position
(de-energized position). The locking device (or lockout device) can be any device that has the ability
to secure the energy-isolating device in a safe position. See the example of the lock and hasp
combination in Figure 1 below.

Tag out is a labelling process that is always used when lockout is required. The process of tagging
out a system involves attaching or using an information tag or indicator (usually a standardized label)
that includes the following information:
• Why the lockout/tag out is required (repair, maintenance, etc.).
• Time of application of the lock/tag.
• The name of the authorized person who attached the tag and lock to the system.
Note: ONLY the authorized individual who placed the lock and tag onto the system is the one who is
permitted to remove them. This procedure helps make sure the system cannot be started up without
the authorized individual's knowledge.

Why is lockout/tag out important?

Safety devices such as barrier guards or guarding devices are installed on systems to maintain worker
safety while these systems are being operated. When non-routine activities such as maintenance,
repair, or set-up; or the removal of jams, clogs or misaligned feeds are performed, these safety devices
may be removed provided there are alternative methods in place to protect workers from the increased
risk of injury of exposure to the unintended or inadvertent release of energy.

50 | P a g e


The main method used and recommended to protect workers from risk of harm in these cases is the
use of a lockout/tag out program.

A lockout/tag out program will help prevent:

• Contact with a hazard while performing tasks that require the removal, by-passing, or
deactivation of safe guarding devices.
• The unintended release of hazardous energy (stored energy).
• The unintended start-up or motion of machinery, equipment, or processes.

What are the basic steps of locking and tagging out a system?
Lockout and tag out processes involve more than putting a lock on a switch. They are comprehensive
step-by-step processes that involve communication, coordination, and training.
Please note the following definitions from CSA Z460-13:
Affected person - persons who are not directly involved in the work requiring the hazardous energy
control, but who are (or may be) located in the work area.
Authorized person - a person who is qualified to engage in hazardous energy control because of
knowledge, training, and experience and has been assigned to engage in such control.

Steps of a lockout/tag out program include:

1. Prepare for shutdown
The authorized person will identify which sources of energy are present and must be controlled; and
more importantly, identify what method of control will be used. This step involves completing sets
of specific work instructions that outline what controls and practices are needed to lock and tag out a
system before performing any activity.
2. Notify all affected employees
The authorized person will communicate the following information to notify affected persons:

• What is going to be locked/tagged out.

• Why it is going to be locked/tagged out.
• For approximately how long will the system be unavailable.
• Who is responsible for the lockout/tag out.
• Who to contact for more information.

3. Equipment Shutdown
If the system is operating it should be shut down in its normal manner. Use manufacturer instructions
or in-house work instructions. Equipment shutdown involves ensuring controls are in the off position,
and verifying that all moving parts such as flywheels, gears, and spindles have come to a complete
stop.
4. Isolation of system from hazardous energy
The exact written instructions will be specific to that system in the workplace. In general, the
following procedures are used:

• Electrical energy - Switch electrical disconnects to the off position. Visually verify that the
breaker connections are in the off position. Lock the disconnects into the off position.

• Hydraulic and Pneumatic potential energy - Set the valves in the closed position and lock

51 | P a g e


them into place. Bleed off the energy by opening the pressure relief valves, then closing
the airlines.

• Mechanical potential energy - carefully release energy from springs that may still be
compressed. If this is not feasible, block the parts that may move if there is a possibility
that the spring can transfer energy to it.

• Gravitational potential energy - Use a safety block or pin to prevent the part of the system
that may fall or move.

• Chemical energy - locate chemical supply lines to the system and close and lockout the
valves. Where possible, bleed lines and/or cap ends to remove chemicals from the system.

5. Dissipation (removal) of residual or stored energy

In general, examples include:

• Electrical energy - To find a specific method to discharge a capacitor for the system in
question, contact the manufacturer for guidance. Many systems with electrical components,
motors, or switch gears contain capacitors. Capacitors store electrical energy. In some
cases, capacitors hold a charge and may release energy very rapidly (e.g., similar to the
flash of a camera). In other cases, capacitors are used to remove spikes and surges in order
to protect other electrical components. Capacitors must be discharged in the lockout
process in order to protect workers from electrical shock.
• Hydraulic and Pneumatic potential energy - Setting the valves in the closed position and
locking them into place only isolates the lines from more energy entering the system. In
most cases, there will still be residual energy left in the lines as pressurized fluid. This
residual energy can be removed by bleeding the lines through pressure relief valves. Verify
depressurization or use flange-breaking techniques. Contact the manufacturer for more
specific details, or if no pressure relief valves are available, what other methods are
available.
• Mechanical potential energy - Carefully release energy from springs that may still be
compressed. If this is not possible, use blocks to hold the parts that may move if the energy
is released.
• Gravitational potential energy - If feasible, lower the part to a height where falling is
impossible. If this is not possible, contact the manufacturer for guidance.
• Chemical energy - If available, bleed lines and/or cap ends to remove chemicals from the
system.

6. Lockout/Tag out
When the system's energy sources are locked out, there are specific guidelines that must be followed
to make sure that the lock cannot be removed, and the system cannot be inadvertently operated. These
guidelines include:

• Each lock should only have one key (no master keys are allowed).
• There should be as many locks on the system as there are people working on it. For
example, if a maintenance job requires 3 workers, then 3 locks should be present - each of
the individuals should place their OWN lock on the system. Locks can only be removed by
those who installed them and should only be removed using a specific process - see step 9
below.

52 | P a g e


7. Verify Isolation
Verify that the system is properly locked out before beginning any work. Verification can take place
in several ways:

• The machine, equipment, or process controls (push buttons, switches, etc.) are engaged
or activated and the result is observed. No response means isolation is verified. Return
controls to the safe position (off).
• Visual inspection of:
o Electrical connections to make sure they are open.
o Suspended parts are lowered to a resting position or blocked to prevent
movement.
o Other devices that restrain machine or process movement.
o Valve positioning for double block and bleed (for pipes or ducts) - closing
two valves of a section of a line, and then bleeding (or venting) the section of
the line between the two closed valves.
o Presence of solid plate used to absolutely close a line - called line blanking
(for pipes or ducts).
o Any other acceptable method of energy isolation.
• Testing of the equipment:
o Test circuitry (should be done by a certified electrician) - note: equipment
with capacitors needs to be cycled until all energy is drained.
o Check pressure gauges to make sure hydraulic and pneumatic potential
energy has been removed.
o Check temperature gauges to make sure thermal energy has been discharged.

Choose the method that will best make sure that the energy to the system has been isolated without
creating other hazards during the verification.
8. Perform Maintenance or Service Activity
Complete the activity that required the lockout process to be started.
9. Remove Lockout/Tag out devices
To remove locks and tags from a system that is now ready to be put back into service, the following
general procedure can be used:

• Inspect the work area to make sure all tools and items have been removed.
• Confirm that all employees and persons are safely located away from hazardous areas.
• Verify that controls are in a neutral position.
• Remove devices and re-energize machine.
• Notify affected employees that servicing is completed.

*Note - it is good practice to make sure any individual who placed a lock on the system should also
be present when the system is re-started. This practice helps make sure those employees working on
the system are not in a hazardous area when the machine is restarted.
Power Transmission Apparatus
All components of the mechanical system which transmit energy to the part of the machine
performing the work (Flywheels, pulleys, belts, couplings, gears.)

53 | P a g e


Other Moving Parts

All parts of the machine which moves while the machine is working (Reciprocating, rotating, and
transverse moving parts)
Protection is from Guarding and Safeguarding
1. Machine Guarding (or machine guards)
Static protective device that prevents access to the moving parts
• Grills, screens, covers, hoods
• Location and distance
• Gates, perimeter fences
• Windows, shutters

2. Machine Safeguarding (or safeguards)

Dynamic protective devices that react to a workers’ presence. It may start or stop the operation
of a machine when you attempt to access it.
• Guards
• Devices
• Location/Distance
• Feeding & Ejecting Method
• Miscellaneous Aids

SOURCE:
https://www.oshatrain.org/courses/mods/814m1.html
Occupational Safety and Health Standard Rule 1415
DO 13 Series of 1998

54 | P a g e


MODULE 6:
CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY - MOBILE EQUIPMENT
SAFETY

OBJECTIVES
Participants shall be able:
• To identify the hazards associated with heavy equipment.
• To establish a checklist for management and staff for safe operation of equipment

DEFINITION
As per DO No. 13 Series of 1998…
• “Heavy equipment” refers to any machine with engine or electric motor as prime mover used
either for lifting, excavating, leveling, drilling, compacting, transporting and breaking works in
the construction site, such as but not limited to crane, bulldozer, backhoe, grader, road compactor,
prime mover and trailer, with minimum operating weight and horsepower rating of 1,000 KG
and 10 HP, respectively.

TYPES OF MOBILE EQUIPMENT and THEIR USES

The use of heavy equipment is an important part of residential, commercial, and roadway construction
and maintenance operations. A variety of heavy equipment are used in construction and maintenance.
Heavy equipment can be classified into the following categories based on the type of operation:
• excavating equipment
• lifting equipment
• loading and hauling equipment
• compaction equipment
• grading and finishing equipment
• paving and surface treatment equipment
Depending upon their versatility, heavy equipment may be used for multiple purposes. For example,
backhoes are normally used for excavating but they can also load the excavated materials into trucks.

EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT
An excavator is a power-driven machine mostly used in earthmoving operations. Heavy equipment
typically used for excavating include the following:
• Backhoes: Backhoes are used for surface or subsurface excavation of solids and sludge.
Backhoes are used to dig below the surface, such as trenches, building footings and foundations.
The backhoe is attached to the loader frame with a ridged coupling.
• Excavators: Excavators are large backhoes. They can be truck mounted, truck carrier mounted,
or self-propelled wheel mounted. They are hydraulic powered and consist of three structures: the
revolving unit, the travel base, and the attachment.
55 | P a g e


• Front-End Loaders: The front -end loader is a self-contained unit mounted on rubber tires or
tracks and is one of the most versatile and capable pieces of equipment used in excavation work,
as well as loading. The front- end loader can be equipped to operate as a loader, dozer, scraper,
clamshell, forklift, backhoe, crane, auger, or sweeper.

LIFTING EQUIPMENT
• Cranes are used for raising, shifting, and lowering loads by means of a projecting swinging arm
or with the hoisting apparatus supported on an overhead truck. An appropriate capacity of crane
shall be chosen to work for a specified size of load. The use of a crane for loads beyond its
capacity poses several hazards to workers, as well as operators.

LOADING AND HAULING EQUIPMENT

• Loaders: Loaders are used to excavate and move soft materials and load/unload trucks.
• Dozer (Bulldozer): Dozers are used for pushing and pulling loads typically in earthwork
operations and demolition work.
• Scrapers: Scrapers are used for loading, hauling, dumping, and spreading loose materials.
• Dump Trucks: Dump Trucks are the most common type of hauling equipment due to their
versatility.
• Wagons: Wagons are earth moving trailers pulled by tractors.

COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
• Rollers: Rollers are used for compacting roadbed materials like earth, aggregates, and
bituminous mixtures. There are various types of rollers. The selection of rollers for a particular
job depends upon the types of material to be compacted.
The following are the types of rollers commonly used in highway and street
construction/maintenance
§ static steel-wheeled rollers
§ vibratory steel-wheeled rollers
§ pneumatic (rubber-tired) rollers

GRADING AND FINISHING EQUIPMENT

• Graders are commonly referred to as road graders, or motor graders. They have a long blade
used to create a flat surface during the grading process. Graders are multi-purpose equipment
used for:
§ finishing
§ shaping
§ bank sloping
§ ditching
§ mixing
§ spreading

56 | P a g e


§ side casting
§ leveling and crowning
§ site striping operations
§ earth road maintenance

PAVING AND SURFACE TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

Paving equipment (paving machine, paver finisher, asphalt finisher) is used to lay asphalt on the
surfaces of roads, parking lots, bridges, etc. Here is an expanded list of paving equipment operations:
• aggregate spreaders
• asphalt distributors
• asphalt kettles
• asphalt pavers
• rotary power brooms
• blowers or water sprays
• pavement profilers

PERSON PUT AT RISKS

• Personnel at site on regular basis
§ Signal Persons, Observers, Flaggers, Grade Checkers, Dump Persons.
§ Equipment Operators, Teamsters.
§ Laborers, Iron Workers and Carpenters.
§ Foremen, Supervisors, and other related contractor staff.
§ Surveyors, Rodmen, Layout Crews.
§ Mechanics and oilers.
§ Any Other Crafts and/or Trades working on the Project or Passing through the work areas.
• Personnel at Site on a Periodic Basis
§ Delivery Trucks, Service Providers, Trucking (of any kind) - Unescorted on the site; Concrete
Mixers, Pump Trucks.
§ Contracted Services: Crane Rental, Port-to-let Service Persons, etc.
§ Union/Labor Officials or Government Officials/ Inspectors
§ Trash Removal Vehicles.
§ Engineers, Inspectors, Client’s Staff/Owner’s Reps./Guests/VIPs.
§ Engineering Service Providers
§ Vendor Sales Personnel or Product Installation Specialist(s).
§ Other Utility Service Providers & Locators
• Non-Personnel: No Direct Need to be on Site
§ Pedestrians, Spectators, On-lookers, Sidewalk Superintendents and the Just Plain Curious!
57 | P a g e


§ Job Seekers, (all types).

§ Joggers, Bicycle Riders, Skate Boarders, All Terrain Vehicles, Power Walkers; Children (of
all ages)
§ Environmentalists independently reviewing compliance with Laws/Restrictions.
§ Scavengers, Wood collectors, Junk Collectors, Dumpster Divers.
§ Lawyers, Investigators, Thieves, Burglars and Law Breakers.
§ The Media: (Depending on circumstances).

HAZARDS IN HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS

• Poor Repair or Service
Poor repair or service of equipment is a common hazard. Poor repair may include repairing by
an unauthorized person. Such repairs or servicing of equipment may jeopardize the safety of
operators and others due to mechanical failure of heavy equipment.
• Obstructed View While Backing
Due to the size of heavy equipment, equipment operators have obstructed view and blind spots
while backing. Dirty or broken windows may also block an operator’s view of people or objects
posing potential hazards.
• Striking People and Collision with Other Equipment
Heavy equipment usually operates near other heavy equipment and on-foot workers. The path of
the equipment within the workspace constantly changes. The interactions between the heavy
equipment and on-foot workers are not always coordinated.
• Caught Between Equipment and Objects
Many incidents have occurred in work areas where on-foot workers are caught between heavy
equipment and other fixed objects or crushed between the equipment. This happens more often
when the turning radius for the equipment or trucks is not wide enough at the entry and exit points
of the workspace within the work zone.
• Riders Falling Off Equipment or Buckets
Although not permitted, casual riding of the equipment by workers (other than the operators) has
been the cause of many construction workplace accidents.
• Driving at Excessive Speeds
Heavy equipment is not designed for excessive speeds. However, if they are not loaded, the
operators may tend to drive at higher than normal speeds causing hazards to on-foot workers and
others on site.
• Injuries to Operators Due to Ingress/Egress Difficulties
Poor ergonomic design and improper ingress and egress practices (e.g. jumping out of the cab
instead of coming down slowly) can cause injuries to equipment operators.
• Runaway Machines
Runaway occurs when the wheels are not blocked upon parking or when operators are not able
to control the equipment. Parking along a steep surface without proper blocks on the downgrade
side of wheels will most likely cause such a hazard.

58 | P a g e


• Overhead Obstructions
Being struck by limbs of trees or other overhead obstructions and moving equipment can occur
when the operators are unaware of the limbs of trees or other fixed overhead objects. Another
cause of such hazard can be due to the poor judgment of operators on the horizontal and vertical
clearances.
RESPONSIBILITIES WHEN NEAR HEAVY EQUIPMENT
• Employees
§ Ensure the Operator can see you when near the equipment.
§ Do not use a cell phone when walking near mobile equipment.
§ Wear a hard hat and high visibility clothing when walking/working around mobile equipment.
§ Stay Away from operator’s blind spots.
§ Keep your distance away from swing radius of the boom and counterweight.
§ Do not walk under suspended loads.
§ Stay alert and listen for backup alarms and watch for shifting or unstable loads and working
surfaces.
§ Do not ride on any part of any mobile equipment, including attachments.
§ Look out for others—coworkers and customers—and alert them if danger arises.
§ Always use a spotter when backing up a piece of Equipment
• Operators
§ The Most Dangerous Movement is Backing!
§ Know Where your Blind Spots Are.
§ Look for People on Foot Around You.
§ STOP! When Signaled; When Waived at Violently; Or If You Are in Doubt….
§ Maintain a Safe Operating Speed.
§ Keep Machine Under Control at all Times.
§ Take Machine “Out of Service” if it is Unsafe to Operate.
§ Make Sure You Are Familiar with the Operating Characteristics of your Machine.
§ Allow NO ONE to Ride Outside the Cab for Any Reason!
§ Be Aware of Other Machines Operating in the Area.
§ Keep Lights and Backup Alarm in Operating Condition.
§ Clean Windows and Adjust Mirrors.
§ Always inform Appropriate Personnel of any Abnormal Conditions, Defects, or Changes
made in Machine
§ Report Unsafe Workers to Supervision.
§ Make Sure You Are Familiar with the Operating Characteristics of your Machine.
§ Allow NO ONE to Ride Outside the Cab for Any Reason!
§ Be Aware of Other Machines Operating in the Area.
§ Keep Lights and Backup Alarm in Operating Condition.
59 | P a g e


§ Clean Windows and Adjust Mirrors.

§ Always inform Appropriate Personnel of any Abnormal Conditions, Defects, or Changes
made in Machine
§ Report Unsafe Workers to Supervision.
§ Talk-up Safety with Those Who Work with You. Maintain “Constant Awareness”.
§ Be on The Look-Out for Other Trades Working in the Same Area.
§ Do Not Attempt Repairs or Maintenance that You Do Not Understand.
§ Always Check the Mirror on the Blind Side, making Sure of Your Clearance.
§ Learn and Follow Safe Work Practices!
• Signal Person/ Spotter
§ The use of signal persons or spotters is a proven method of protecting employees on foot
behind heavy equipment and vehicles with an obstructed view, but spotters themselves can
be at risk for injury or even death. Employers can implement the following actions to help
keep spotters safe:
§ Spotters and drivers should agree on hand signals before backing up.
§ Spotters should always maintain visual contact with the driver while the vehicle is backing.
§ Spotters should not have additional duties while they are acting as spotters.
§ Spotters should not use personal mobile phones, personal headphones, or other items which
could pose a distraction during spotting activities.
§ Spotters should be provided with high-visibility clothing, especially during night operations.

KEY ELEMENTS IN HEAVY EQUIPMENT PROGRAM

• Management Commitment
§ Restrict entry onto site of non-essential personnel.
§ Establish Controlled Entry Points to site.
§ Coordinate Operations to site personnel
§ Site Rules and Training to all Persons at Risk.
§ Adequate Lay-Down Areas Established.
• Employee Involvement
§ Site Safety Orientation
§ Employees must learn, follow, and obey established rules.
§ Toolbox Safety Meetings – to raised issues and concerns
§ Look and be visible
• Pre-construction Work-Site Analysis
§ Identify Potential Known Hazards
§ Job Conditions: Haul Roads, Access Points
§ Unwanted side effects of the Job Schedule
§ Lay down/ Storage Areas, Office, Tool, Storage and Change Trailers.
60 | P a g e


§ Methods of Construction, (increases Risk?)

• Hazard Identification
§ Overturning of Equipment
§ Driving at Excessive Speeds
§ Unexpected Electrical Shock
§ Failure of Lifting Mechanisms/Operational Failures
§ Runaway Machines
§ Poor Repair or Service
§ Obstructed View While Backing
§ Striking People and Collision with Other Equipment
§ Caught Between Equipment and Objects
§ Riders Falling Off Equipment or Buckets
• Hazard prevention and Control
§ Perimeter Fencing, Enclosures, signs.
§ Poor Planning Forces Workers to Commit Unsafe Acts!
§ Be Alert; Stay Clear; Hear Warnings.
§ Temporary Barricades around Hazards.
§ Spotters Provided for in-the-blind

• Equipment Maintenance
§ Machine in Proper Working Order.
§ Back-up Alarm, Horn, Lights, Mirrors.
§ Cab Glass not Cracked or Broken.
§ Machine Windows, Mirrors, kept Clean.
§ Pre-Operational Inspection conducted by Operator.
§ Prompt Repair of Any Noted Deficiencies!
§ D.O. NO. 13 – 1998 Section 10.2.3. Routine Inspection
a. In the interest of accident prevention, duly certified mechanics and operators shall conduct
daily routine inspection of all heavy equipment deployed at the site in accordance with
standards set by TESDA in coordination with the Association of Construction Equipment
Lessors (ACEL, Inc.).
b. Routine inspection of all heavy equipment must be performed by DOLE accredited
professionals.
c. All equipment which do not comply with the minimum safety standards for equipment
certification shall be immediately removed from the work site for restoration or repair until
they meet said standards or requirements.
d. The General Constructor and the equipment owner shall maintain a separate logbook for
data on maintenance, repairs, tests, and inspections for each heavy equipment

61 | P a g e


• Employee Awareness Training

§ Does Your Job Require You to Approach Moving or Backing Machines?
§ How does the Operator Know Where You Are?
§ Do You Understand all Signs, Markers and Flags? KNOW WHAT THEY MEAN!
§ You Must Always Be Alert to Changing Job Conditions and Your Particular Situation.
• Periodically Review Procedures

OPERATOR AUTHORIZATION
AS per 10.2.4. of DO. 13 Series of 1998 - Certified Operators:
• Only duly certified operators shall be allowed to operate their designated heavy equipment.
• All operators and riggers must wear personal protective equipment as prescribed in the above
pertinent sections.

LEGISLATION REQUIREMENTS – D.0. 13 SERIES OF 1998

Section 7.2: The General Constructor must provide for one (1) Construction Safety and Health
Officer for every ten (10) units of heavy equipment assigned to the project site, to oversee the
effective compliance with the Construction Safety and Health Program at the construction project
site, in terms of heavy equipment utilization and maintenance.
Section 10. Safety on Construction Heavy Equipment: In relation to heavy equipment operation
in all construction sites, the following are required in the different phases of the project.
10.1 Pre-Construction
The General Constructor must ensure that appropriate certification is obtained from DOLE duly
accredited organizations for the following:
a) All heavy equipment operators assigned at the project site must be tested and certified in
accordance with a standard trade test prescribed by Technical Education and Skills
Development Authority (TESDA) in coordination with its accredited organization/s.
b) All heavy equipment must be tested and certified in accordance with the standards prepared
by DOLE or its recognized organization/s prior to commissioning of said equipment.

5 BASIC GUIDELINES ON HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS

• Safety Features on Equipment, Know How They Operate, and Use Them Properly.
• Systematic Maintenance and Repair.
• Trained Operators and Trained Repair Personnel.
• Pre-Operational Inspection of Equipment.
• Review Manufacturer’s Operating Manual.

SOURCE:
https://www.bigrentz.com/blog/construction-safety-statistics
https://www.oshatrain.org/courses/mods/814m1.html
Occupational Safety and Health Standard Rule 1415
DO 13 Series of 1998

62 | P a g e


MODULE 7:
CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY - CRANE SAFETY

OBJECTIVES
This training module will provide Participants:
• The basic information about the crane – its definition and main parts
• Clear understanding about basic crane safety under Rule 1415 of OSHS.

DEFINITION – AS PER RULE 1420 OF OSHS

• Material Handling is an activity that involves movement of material or products within an
organization from one place to another place or the flow of material or products to vehicles or
from vehicles.
• Mobile crane means a lifting device incorporating a cable suspended latticed boom or hydraulic
telescopic boom designed to be moved between operating locations by transport over the road.
• “Hoist” shall mean a lifting machine with a carriage, platform or cage which moves on guides.
• ” Lifting Appliance” shall mean a crab, winch, pulley block or gin wheel used for raising or
lowering a hoist crane, sheer legs excavators, draglines, pile driver, or pile excavators.
• ” Lifting Gear” shall mean a chain sling, rope sling, ring, link, hook, shackle, swivel or eyebolt.
• Boom (equipment other than tower crane) means an inclined spar, strut, or other long
structural member which supports the upper hoisting tackle on a crane or derrick
• Competent person means one who can identify existing and predictable hazards in the
surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees,
and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
• Rated capacity means the maximum working load permitted by the manufacturer under
specified working conditions.

TYPES OF CRANE
• Mobile
§ Lattice Boom Crawler
§ Truck Mounted Telescopic
§ Rough Terrain Crane
§ Telescopic Crawler
• Stationary
§ Tower Crane
§ Overhead Crane
§ Gantry Crane
§ Offshore Crane

63 | P a g e


MAIN PARTS OF THE CRANE

• Hoist Mechanism
§ Jib
§ Boom
§ Load Blocks
§ Hook
§ Rope
§ Counterweight
§ Winch
§ Cab
• Swing Mechanism
• Travel Mechanism

HAZARDS IN CRANE OPERATION

Some Main Crane Related Hazards include but not limited to:
• Crane Overload and Structural Failure
• Falling of Load or Struck by/ Caught in Between load
• Electrical Hazards
• Unstable footings
• High Wind and other Environmental Factor (i.e., Visibility)
• Others (i.e., poor communication)

BASIC CRANE SAFETY

• Certified Operator
• Pre – Crane Inspection
• Stable, Uniform and Level Ground
• Know your Swing Radius
• Use Crane Properly – SWL
• Stay in Touch
• Pay Attention to the lifting operation
• Avoid Man-basket
• Proper assembly and disassembly of crane
• Dissipate All Hazardous Sources
• Have a Lifting Plan.

64 | P a g e


CRANE LOAD CAPACITY

• Factors Affecting Rated Capacities
The first step in creating a lift plan is to understand the factors affecting the strength and stability
of mobile cranes. Some of these factors are described below.
§ Machine configuration. Load chart ratings may only be applied if the machine is rigged
according to the manufacturer's specifications. Some questions to consider include: Is the jib
erected or stowed? What type of jib is used? Are the outriggers extended properly? Are the
tires properly inflated? What type of boom is used? What is the boom length? Where do the
boom insert locations? What counterweights are used? Are they configured according to the
manufacturer's specifications? What is the wire rope size and grade? What is the configuration
of the hoist reeving? Most important, operators must know the configuration of the crane,
ensure the configuration is correct, and use the appropriate load chart.
§ Unbalanced rope reeving. Unbalanced rope reeving occurs whenever the main hoist line is
reeved to one side of the boom tip. This condition causes the boom to twist, which
subsequently reduces the rated capacity of the crane. Full chart ratings may only be applied
when the boom tip is symmetrically rigged. On single-line reeving, when the hoist line runs
along the center sheave or on the sheave beside the centerline of the boom, the boom twist is
minimized. On multi-part reeved systems, if the parts of the line are evenly distributed on
either side of the boom centerline, the boom twist will also be minimized. Be sure to check
the manufacturer's reeving diagrams to ensure proper reeving.
§ Improper use of outriggers. If lifting on outriggers, the load chart rating applies only when
all the outrigger beams are fully extended, and all tires are clear of the ground. If these two
conditions are not met, then the "on rubber" capacity charts should be used. If lifting on rubber,
the load chart ratings apply only when tires are in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and in good condition, and the specified tire pressure is maintained. Some
mobile cranes have load charts for mid-extended outrigger beams. For such cranes, the
outriggers should still be extended to the proper point and all of the tires must be clear of the
ground.
§ Soft footing. The ground condition must have enough stability and bearing capacity to
support all loads placed on it by the crane. Extreme caution should be used when performing
lift operations beside buildings, especially if newly constructed with uncompacted backfill,
along trenches, or in areas where water mains, sewer pipes or steam lines are buried. When a
crane sets on its load bearing surfaces, it exerts varying pressures depending on the operating
conditions and the quadrant(s) of operation. The lowest bearing pressure is the total weight of
the machine distributed over the entire area of the drive tracks or all outrigger supports. Lifting
a load over the corner produces the maximum ground bearing pressure, which makes it the
most dangerous position. The ground pressure of a truck crane may be higher than that of a
crawler crane due to the smaller load bearing surface area of the pads. Pads used for outriggers
should be stable and rigid, a minimum of three times larger in area than the outrigger float,
and be fully supported (Garby, 331; Campbell and Dickie, 206).
§ Unlevel crane. The load chart ratings are based on the crane being perfectly level in all
directions. A crane that is not level causes side loading of the boom, and thereby, reducing the
rated capacity. A crane that is three degrees out of level may reduce the rated capacity by as
much as 50 percent (Campbell and Dickie, 162; Garby, 336). This applies to "on crawlers,"
"on riggers," as well as "on rubber" lifting operations. The target level in the crane cab should
be used for initial leveling; however, for critical lifts, a carpenter's level should be used. After
initial leveling, place the carpenter's level on the leveling plates provided on the crane,
typically located on or under the boom foot pins, then rotate the boom 90 degrees and recheck
the levelness. The levelness can be double-checked by raising the boom and lowering the load
65 | P a g e


line. The line should lie in the center of the boom in all positions (i.e., end, side, and corner). If
making a series of lifts, the levelness should be periodically checked.
§ Side loading. The load chart ratings apply only to freely suspended loads and when the load
is picked up directly under the boom tip. If the load is to either side of the boom tip, side
loading occurs, which affects the crane's capacity. Side loading is one of the most common
causes of boom failure and usually occurs without warning. Side loading can occur when a
load is dragged or pulled sideways, when the load starts swinging rapidly, when the crane is
not level, and when exposed to high wind speeds. Tilt-up construction methods can also cause
side loading of the boom.
§ Increasing load radius. The load radius may increase during a lift if the hoist line is not
vertical at all times. An increasing load radius may be caused by lifting a load that is outside
or inside of the boom tip radius. For such lifts, the load will start to swing in and out after the
load clears the ground, which increases the load radius, thus, reducing the rated capacity of
the crane. The load radius can also be increased due to deflections in the boom, carrier, and
tires (when lifting "on rubber").
§ Shock loading. Load charts do not allow for impact loads. Shock loads can be caused by
rapid acceleration, sudden stopping, sudden load release, and sudden load snatching. For
instance, the shock loading increases by approximately 35 percent if the hoist line is traveling
at a speed of 400 feet per minute and stops with a stopping distance of only two feet, whereas,
the shock loading increases by approximately 0.5 percent if the hoist line is traveling at a
speed of 100 feet per minute with a stopping distance of 10 feet (Campbell and Dickie, 171). In
addition to sudden deceleration and the other conditions mentioned above, pick-and-carry
operations also produce impact loads to the machine.
§ High duty cycle. Load chart ratings may not apply when cranes are used in high-speed
production operations. The manufacturer will either specify in the load chart that the rated
capacities must be reduced by a percentage for high duty cycle operations or will supply a
separate load chart for such operations. The capacity reductions are recommended since the
speed of these operations produces side loading as well as higher temperatures in critical
components such as brakes, clutches, pumps, and motors.
§ High wind speeds. High wind speeds affect the capacity of a mobile crane by increasing the
side loading on the boom and the load radius and by decreasing the tipping (both forward and
backward) capacity. In addition, performing lifts in windy conditions makes it more difficult
to handle the load. Hoisting activities should be restricted or stopped completely (and the
boom properly secured) in windy conditions.
• OSHS 1415.08: Safe Working Loads:
§ Safe working loads shall be plainly marked on every lifting appliance and in case of a crane
with variable operating radius, safe load at various radii of the jib shall be marked on the jib
displayed in the driver’s cabin or fitted with an automatic safe load indicator.
§ In every derricking jib, the maximum radius at which the jib may be worked shall be plainly
marked on it.
§ No lifting appliance shall be loaded beyond its safe working load.

66 | P a g e


HOOK REQUIREMENTS
The ASME B30.10 standards cover the inspection of hooks for all hoists, cranes and rigging devices.
B30.10 requires that hooks be visually inspected during the normal course of use by the operator as
well as periodically by a designated or qualified individual. The frequency and documentation
requirement of the periodic inspection shall be dependent on the type of equipment in which the hook
is used, but at least annually. During the inspection, some of the conditions that should be looked for
include
Hook Conditions that warrant removal from service:
• Deformation:
Deformation of the hook can be an indication of overload, side loading or utilizing improper
rigging techniques. In some cases, it may be apparent that the hook is deformed. Look for any
bends, twists, cracks or sharp edges that could cut into your synthetic slings.
To check for less-apparent deformities, measure the hook’s throat opening. (Note: Typically, this
is not done during pre-operational inspections.) You should remove the hook from service if any
distortion is noticeable. Check the throat opening. It should not be more than 5% or 1/4″ from
the manufacturer’s original dimension. Check your manufacturer’s recommendations.
Also, some hooks have manufactured marks or bumps between the throat opening and the saddle
of the hook. These are reference points for measurement. Each hoist manufacturer’s manual will
tell you how to measure the hook.
• Wear and Corrosion
Look for excessive wear or corrosion on the hook. Any wear exceeding 10% of the original
section dimension of the hook or its load pin means the hook should be removed from service.
• Nicks and Gouges
There is an easy rule of thumb you can follow when checking for nicks and gouges – any nick or
gouge that you can fit your fingernail into is caused to remove the hook from service. This
includes non-OEM gouges placed on hooks to measure throat opening.
• Latches
ASME states that hooks shall be equipped with latches and they have to be operable. Latches
hold the rigging in the hook when in a slack position. They are not meant to be a load bearing
piece, which can easily happen when using improper rigging techniques. To check the latches,
ensure that the latch bridges the throat of the hook when in the closed position and that it operates
properly.
Hook latches are required unless it can create a hazardous condition. For example, if you have to
climb on a load to release latch (fall hazard) instead of using a push stick to back the hook out of
the attachment point.
• Bolts and Pins
Check to make sure that all bolts and pins in the hook are secure. Check the pin to make sure the
chain is properly connected to the hook block. Also, check to make sure that the hook swivels
and rotates freely when not under load.
• Markings
Look for proper manufacturer’s hook markings including the manufacturer’s logo.
• Field Modifications

67 | P a g e


Check for any modification such as unauthorized welding or grinding or other modification of
the hook. If any of these conditions are present or if you see anything on the hook that causes
you concern, take the hook and/or hoist out of service until it can be replaced or repaired.

WIRE ROPE REQUIREMENTS

Below are the specifications required
• Dimension: length and diameter of wire rope
• Construction: Number of wires in one strand
• Numbers of strand in wire rope
• Type of Core: Fiber CF or steel wire CWR
• Type of lay: Lang lay and regular lay
• Direction of lay: Right hand or Left hand
• Tensile designation 1570, 1960
• Area of applications
• Finishing: Galvanized or un galvanized

BASIC RULES FOR SAFE OPERATION OF CRANE

• Prior to Crane Operation
§ Demarcate the Lifting Area
§ Check Ground Condition
§ Conduct Crane Inspection
• During Crane Operation
§ Use the Load Chart and Lift within limit
§ Do not work near the lifting area.
§ Never Work Under Suspended Load
§ Never allowed anyone ride on the Crane
§ Identify the Center of Gravity
§ Use a Tagline in controlling the load
§ Avoid hooks interference
§ Secured Blocks when not in use
§ Have a designated Banksman
§ Give Correct hand Signal
§ Never Work Under Suspended Load
§ Do not work near the lifting area.
§ Report any Defects found at crane
§ Practice Good Communication
§ Practice Good teamwork
68 | P a g e


OPERATING ON SLOPE FOR MOBILE CRANE

Negotiation of slopes by mobile crane travelling with suspended load should be avoided
When operating on out of level side slopes over 0.57° shall be taken – REMEMBER! Surface
depressions and potholes will create the same effect as a side slope.
• Tires correctly inflated as per load chart
• Ground is FIRM enough to support axle loads
• REDUCE the rated capacity of the crane as per load chart requirement
• Use crane side slope inclinometer as a guide only. It is most accurate when the crane articulation
is straight ahead without suspending the load.
• Use the MINIMUM boom length and boom angle practical to keep the boom tip as close to the
ground as possible
• Keep the load as close to the ground as possible
• Load swing reduces stability – use tagline to prevent any pendulum effect.

RIGGING EQUIPMENT
Rigging is the equipment such as wire rope, hooks turnbuckles, clevis, jacks used with cranes and
other lifting equipment in material handling and structure relocation. Rigging systems commonly
include hooks, shackles, master links and slings, and lifting bags in underwater lifting.
• Make sure there is no cutting action on the running line.
• Do not use shackle pin as it will become loose over time.
• Make sure there is no cutting action of the wire rope sling eye on the running line.
• Insert sufficient washers to centralize the position of the shackle.
• Make sure the shackle is not pulled down at an angle.
• Make sure the safety latch is in good condition.
• Make sure the shackle is hooked up correctly.
• Make sure the shackle is equally spaced apart.
• Wrong hooking up method.
• Secure the hooks facing out.
• Do not secure the hooks facing in.
• Do not wrap a rope around the hook.
• Make sure the load is rigged correctly before lifting.
• The load will tilt to one side during lifting if it is not rigged correctly.
• Do not tie the sling from one eye bolt to another as it will tilt to one side.
• Make sure any unused slings are hooked up properly.
• Do not leave unused slings unhooked.
• Correct loading method.
• The eye bolt will bend if loading is not done correctly
69 | P a g e


• Correct ways of using paddings to prevent damage to the sling.

• The sling will be damaged if paddings are not used on the load. No Padding
• Use a shackle to join the sling eyes.
• Wrong method of joining the sling eyes.
• Use the original screw pin for the shackle.
• Do not use a bolt as a screw pin as it will bend. Bolt
• Use a tag line to control the movement of the load during a lifting operation.

SLING INSPECTION
• Check hook for any defects and make sure it is in good working condition
• Check shackle for any defects and make sure it is in good working condition
§ Check opening width
§ Pin always seated
§ Check wear and straightness
§ Check cracks, bending and twisting
§ Check wear
• Check wire ropes for any defects and make sure they are in good working condition
§ Crushed severely.
§ Flatten severely.
§ Bird cage.
§ Dog-leg kink.
§ Kink.
§ Open kink.
§ Closed kink.
§ Bulged severely.
§ Core protrusion.
§ Excessive clearance between strands
• Check wire ropes rated load capacity provided by the manufacturer to determine the level of
strength and the breaking strength.

70 | P a g e


WIRE ROPE SIZING

PRECAUTION IN THE USE OF WIRE ROPE

Under 1415.16: Chains, Ropes and Lifting Gears:
No chain, rope or lifting gear shall be used unless:
• it is of good construction, sound material, of adequate strength, suitable quality and free from
potent defects.
• it has been tested and examined by a competent person specifying the safe working load.
• No wire rope shall be used for lifting and lowering of any load if in any 10 meters length the total
number of visible broken wires exceed five percent of the total number of wires in the rope.
• No chain, rope of lifting gear shall be loaded beyond its safe working load except for the purpose
of testing
• No chain, ring hook, link, clamp, shackle, swivel or eyebolt altered or repaired by welding shall
be used unless it is tested and examine, and its working load specified in the test.
• Hooks for missing or lowering of load shall have devices to prevent displacement of sling or
load.
• No double or multiple slings shall be used if the upper ends are not connected by means of
shackle, ring or link of adequate strength or the safe working load is exceeded.
• Chains with knots or chains shortened by means of bolts and knots inserted through the links or
by welding shall not be used.
• No chain, rope or lifting gear shall be used unless it is thoroughly examined by a competent
person at intervals of six (6) months and the result of examination recorded in a logbook
maintained for the purpose open for inspection by the enforcing authority.
• A chain or lifting gear shall not be used unless it is annealed, or heat treated as required by the
manufacturer.

SOURCE:
https://www.bigrentz.com/blog/construction-safety-statistics
https://www.oshatrain.org/courses/mods/814m1.html
Occupational Safety and Health Standard Rule 1415
DO 13 Series of 1998

71 | P a g e


MODULE 8:
FALL PROTECTION

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
Participants shall be able:
• To identify the hazards associated with heavy equipment.
• To establish a checklist for management and staff for safe operation of equipment

THE STATISTICS OF FALLS

FALLS CAN BE FATAL
• In the blink of an eye we can hit the ground hard.
• Consequences of ignoring fall protection is obvious
• Falls on the job kill 11,000 people and cause more than 200,000 disabling injuries per year

DEFINITION
• A fall hazard is anything at your worksite that could cause you to lose your balance or lose
bodily support and result in a fall. Any walking or working surface can be a potential fall hazard.
• Work at height means work in any place where, if precautions were not taken, a person could
fall a distance liable to cause personal injury. i.e., work above ground/floor level. could fall from
an edge, through an opening or fragile surface.
• Fall protection is the backup system planned for a worker who could lose his or her balance at
a height, in order to control or eliminate injury potential.
• Fall protection must be provided when workers are at:
§ 4 feet or 1.5m – general industry
§ 6 feet or 1.8m – construction

72 | P a g e


ELEVATED LOCATIONS WHICH REQUIRE INCREASED FALL HAZARD

AWARENESS
Falls can be from:
• Ladders
• Roof
• Scaffolds
• Buckets
• Bridges
• Formworks
• Towers
• Work Platforms
• From any other off ground situation
Falls from any of these locations may occur while accessing, climbing, traversing or working at
elevated area.

WHY IS FALL PROTECTION IMPORTANT?

• Falls from heights can cause serious injury or death to workers.
• Most accident statistics lists fall as one of the leading causes of traumatic occupational deaths.

APPROPRIATE METHOD OF PROTECTION

Hierarchy of Fall Protection
The Hierarchy of Fall Protection is the preferred order of control to eliminate or reduce fall hazards.
This methodology mirrors common safety practices for hazard abatement beginning with elimination
and ending with administrative controls. Using the data collected from the fall hazard assessments,
each solution in the hierarchy can be applied to each hazard.
A ranked or graded series of fall protection solutions ranging from the best solution to the worst. In
order of best to worst, these solutions are: Hazard Elimination, Passive Fall Protection, Fall Restraint,
Fall Arrest, and Administrative Controls.

1. Hazard Elimination
The preferred solution to all fall hazards is elimination. The reason for exposure to the fall hazard
is challenged and evaluated to determine if a change in the procedure, practice, location or
equipment will eliminate exposure to the fall hazard. Specifying HVAC (Heating, Venting and Air
Conditioning) equipment be located on the ground, or in an equipment room rather than by the
edge of the roof, is an example of hazard elimination.
Best Practice
The hierarchy should be applied to any hazard before buying inappropriate equipment or systems.
By evaluating a fall hazard using the hierarchy, the best solution is often very evident.

73 | P a g e


2. Passive Fall Protection

Physical barriers like guardrails around unprotected edges and covers over holes are examples of
passive fall protection.
Passive protection is generally considered to provide a higher level of safety since the opportunity
for error is less than using personal protective equipment (PPE). The initial costs of passive
protection, while possibly high, are often more efficient than the long-term costs of PPE. However,
passive protection may not be warranted if the frequency and duration of exposure to the fall hazard
is limited.
An exhaustive hazard assessment provides the information needed to make these kinds of decisions
to maximize cost-effectiveness.

3. Fall Restraint Systems

Fall restraint systems are erected in such a manner that a fall cannot occur. Fall restraint systems
use PPE to restrict the worker’s range of movement so they cannot physically travel to the fall
hazard.
Fall restraint systems are often underutilized because they are not specifically mentioned in many
regulations, but they are preferred over fall arrest systems. Free fall distance is not an issue for fall
restraint systems, therefore arresting forces, clearance requirements, secondary injuries, and rescue
issues are virtually eliminated.
Best Practice
Fall restraint is always better than fall arrest. Fall restraint systems prevent most secondary injuries
due to the fall and make rescue easy since the worker is still accessible.

4. Fall Arrest Systems

Fall arrest systems are erected in such a manner that a fall can occur, but the fall is arrested within
acceptable force and clearance margins.
Fall arrest systems have a higher risk associated with them, since we have to stop the falling worker
within an acceptable level of force and prevent him/her from contacting the surrounding structure
or the ground.
Training for both fall restraint and fall arrest systems is key.
ANSI Z359.2-2007 includes a significant amount of information about fall protection training for
authorized persons, competent persons, qualified persons, rescuers and trainers.

5. Administrative Controls
Administrative controls are work practices or procedures that increase a worker’s awareness of a
fall hazard. It must be noted that administrative controls are the least preferred method of
protection because they do not provide a physical or positive means of protection.
Administrative controls are preventive measures taken to reduce the likelihood of a fall. These
methods include safety monitors, warning lines, warning horns, designated areas, or control lines.
It must also be noted that OSHA regulates the use of many administrative controls and it is
incumbent on the fall protection program administrator to understand the jurisdictions and
regulations that apply.

74 | P a g e


Fall Hazard Survey

The first step for effectively implementing the Hierarchy of Fall Protection is to perform a Fall
Hazard Survey to identify and prioritize fall hazards and recommend options for abatement based
on regulatory requirements and fall protection standards.

DUTY TO HAVE A FALL PROTECTION

As PER Rule 1414
• Fall protection equipment shall be provided on any scaffold 2m (6 feet) or more above ground.
• Personnel performing work from a supported scaffold shall be protected by guardrail from
falling from all open sides and ends of the scaffold.
• Open sides and ends shall be allowed when the scaffold distance is 25 cm (10 in) or less from
the structure being worked on.
• Personal fall-arrest systems used on scaffolds are to be attached by lanyard to a vertical
lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or any rigid structural member.
• When vertical lifelines are used, they shall be fastened to a fixed safe point of anchorage,
independent of the scaffold, and be protected from sharp edges and abrasion. Safe points of
anchorage include structural members of buildings, but not standpipes, vents, electrical
conduit, etc., which may give way under the force of a fall. Two or more vertical lifelines
shall not be attached to each other, or to the same point of anchorage.
• When horizontal lifelines are used, they shall be secured to two or more structural members.
Lifelines shall be made of good quality manila rope of at least 1.9 cm (3/4 in.) diameter or
equivalent material such as nylon rope of at least 1.27 cm (1/2 in) diameter and shall be of
sufficient strength to support a weight of 1140 kgs (2500 lbs.) without breaking.

Collective Fall Protection

Physical barriers between worker and fall hazards
Primary and Secondary Examples are:
75 | P a g e


• Guardrails
• Catwalks
• Gates and Chain
• Grates and covers
• manlift

Safety Mindset when Working at Height

• Inspect equipment before use
• Get faulty equipment repaired before using it
• Follow safe work practices in all off-the-ground situations - (4 feet or more off-the-ground and
6 feet or more off-the-ground in construction industry)

FALL RESTRAINT
It consists of the equipment used to keep an employee from reaching a fall point, such as the edge of
a roof or the edge of an elevated working surface.
Samples of Fall Restraint

PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEM

PFAS - “Used only when other types of fall protection cannot be used”
Designed to tether a worker to an anchor point
Used to protect workers climbing vertical distances
Used to protect workers on horizontal surfaces high above the ground.

76 | P a g e


COMPONENTS OF FALL PROTECTION - ABCD’s of FALL PROTECTION

• ACHORAGE POINT
Also known as the tie-off point, this is the point of attachment for the lanyard or lifeline.
Anchor must support 5,000 lbs. of pressure or twice the expected load.
Anchor points can be permanent, others are removed once the work is completed.
Samples of Anchor Points
I-Beam Adjustable Strap
Roof Tie-Off
Permanent Roof-top
Glider

• BODY HARNESS
Body harness is the combination of straps that distribute the force of the fall over the chest, thighs,
waist, pelvis and shoulders.
Harnesses have buckles and adjustable straps for proper fitting. Some are sized while others are
universal.
Connecting D-ring should be located right between the shoulder blades
Samples of Body harness

• CONNECTING DEVICE
Connecting devices link the body harness to the anchor point.
Lanyards, retractable lifelines and shock-absorbing lifelines are different types of connecting
devices.
Samples of Connecting Devices
§ Restraint Lanyard
§ Retractable Lanyard
§ Emergency Winch
§ Lanyard with Absorber
77 | P a g e


• DESCENT/ RESCUE
§ It enables the retrieval of an injured or incapacitated worker.
§ In the event of a rescue this equipment facilitates rapid recovery of the workers without
endangering other worker in the process.
Fall Protection Rescue
The hierarchy of fall protection rescue is simple:
a. self-rescue by the worker who has fallen,
b. assisted rescue by co-workers, and, if all else fails,
c. calling in professional rescuers

PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEM AND ITS COMPONENTS

• Webbing
Webbing are the ropes and straps used in lifelines, lanyards, and strength components of body
harnesses. The webbing must be made of synthetic fibers.
• Snap Hooks
Snap hooks must have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds and be proof tested to a
minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds without cracking, breaking, or becoming permanently
deformed.
It’s a System
Individually these components will not provide protection from a fall.
However, when used properly and in conjunction with each other they form a personal fall protection
system that becomes a vital part of your safety.
Equipment Do’s and Don’ts
• Do inspect for wear and damage before use.
• Do remove from service after a fall for inspection.
• Do not use to lift materials.
• Do not attach to guardrails or hoists.
PFAS Inspection and Maintenance
• Inspect the label
• Inspect the hardware
• Inspect the Impact Indicator
• Inspect the webbing
• Check manufacturer inspection recommendation
• Frayed or broken harness straps
• D-ring securely attached and not bent
• Tears, missing stitches or damaged hardware.
• Check the function

78 | P a g e


• Check for health and Burns

• Check for impact indicator

Roll Out
Rollout occurs when the snap hook disengages from the anchor point.

WHEN STOPPING A FALL

Fall arrest system must-
• Limit max force on an employee to 1,800 pounds when used with a body harness.
• Be rigged so that an employee cannot free fall more than 6 feet.
• Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit the employee’s max deceleration distance to 3.5
feet.

FALL DISTANCE

79 | P a g e


PROPER WEAR OF PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEM

SUSPENSION TRAUMA

SOURCE:
Occupational Safety and Health Standard Rule 1086
https://www.osha.gov/dts/osta/otm/otm_v/otm_v_4.html

80 | P a g e


MODULE 9 –
TEMPORARY STRUCTURE

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
At the end of the presentation, the participants will be able to:
• Familiarized with the content of DO No. 128-13 – Amending Rule 1414 on Scaffolding of the
1989 OSH Standard, as amended.
• Identify the hazards in Temporary Structure during activity exercises.

DEFINITIONS
• Temporary works (TW) are the parts of a construction project that are needed to enable the
permanent work s to be built. Usually the TW are removed after use. Examples: Scaffolding,
Shoring, Underpinning
• Temporary Structure is any structure that is not designed for long-term use, but merely to
serve some function in the short-term is deemed to be ‘temporary’.
• Competent Person is a person capable of identifying existing and potential hazards in the
surrounding or working condition, and who is authority to take prompt corrective action to
eliminate them, person must be a holder of Scaffold Erector NC II and COSH Training.
• Qualified Person is one who is in possession of a recognized degree, certificate or professional
standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training and experience has successfully demonstrated
his/her ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work or the project.
• Scaffolding is also called scaffold or staging, is a temporary structure used to support a work crew and
materials to aid in the construction, maintenance and repair of buildings, bridges and all other man-made
structures.

Classification of Scaffold
• Supported scaffolds consist of one or more platforms supported by outrigger beams, brackets,
poles, legs, uprights, posts, frames, or similar rigid support.
• A suspended scaffolding system involves a working platform that hangs from an overhead
structure. These suspended scaffolds are normally supported on all four sides with ropes.

HAZARD IN THE USE OF SCAFFOLD

• Falls
• Scaffold Collapse
• Struck By
• Electrocution
• Overloading of Scaffold

81 | P a g e


PARTS OF SCAFFOLDING

Parts of Frame Scaffold

Parts of Mobile Scaffold

82 | P a g e


Parts of Tube and Fittings Scaffold

AMENDED RULE 1414: SCAFFOLDING - GENERAL PROVISIONS

1412.09: Protection of the Public:
A safe covered walkway shall be constructed over the sidewalk for use by pedestrians in a building
construction work less than 2.3 m. (7 ft.) from a sidewalk or public road.

83 | P a g e


1412.10: Protection from Falling Materials:

(1) Steps shall be taken to protect workers from falling materials, such as the provision of safety
helmets and safety shoes.
(2) Tools, objects and materials (including waste materials) shall not be thrown or tipped from a
height, but shall be properly lowered by crane, hoist or chutes. If such is not practicable, the area
where the material is thrown or lowered shall be fenced and no person allowed in the fenced area.

1412.11: Protruding Nails and Loose Materials:

(1) Material or lumber with protruding nails shall not be used in any work or be allowed to remain in
any place where they are a source of danger to the workers.
(2) Loose materials shall not be placed or left on working platforms, gangways, floors or other
workplaces but shall be removed, stacked or stored not to obstruct passage. Materials shall not be
stacked in a manner causing danger to the workers or overload and render unsafe any platform,
gangway, floor, roof or other part of a building or structure.

1412.12: Protection against Collapse of Structure:

(1) All temporary structure shall be properly supported by the use of guys, stays, and other fixings
necessary for stability during construction.
(2) Where construction work will likely reduce the stability of an existing or adjacent building shoring
shall be undertaken to prevent the collapse or fall of any part of the structure.

1412.13: Safe Means of Access:

Safe means of access and egress shall be provided and maintained to and from every place where
work is undertaken.
1412.09: Protection of the Public:
A safe covered walkway shall be constructed over the sidewalk for use by pedestrians in a building
construction work less than 2.3 m. (7 ft.) from a sidewalk or public road.

1412.10: Protection from Falling Materials:

(1) Steps shall be taken to protect workers from falling materials, such as the provision of safety
helmets and safety shoes.
(2) Tools, objects and materials (including waste materials) shall not be thrown or tipped from a
height, but shall be properly lowered by crane, hoist or chutes. If such is not practicable, the area
where the material is thrown or lowered shall be fenced and no person allowed in the fenced area.

1412.11: Protruding Nails and Loose Materials:

(1) Material or lumber with protruding nails shall not be used in any work or be allowed to remain in
any place where they are a source of danger to the workers.
(2) Loose materials shall not be placed or left on working platforms, gangways, floors or other
workplaces but shall be removed, stacked or stored not to obstruct passage. Materials shall not be
stacked in a manner causing danger to the workers or overload and render unsafe any platform,
gangway, floor, roof or other part of a building or structure.
84 | P a g e


1412.12: Protection against Collapse of Structure:

(1) All temporary structure shall be properly supported by the use of guys, stays, and other fixings
necessary for stability during construction.
(2) Where construction work will likely reduce the stability of an existing or adjacent building shoring
shall be undertaken to prevent the collapse or fall of any part of the structure.

1412.13: Safe Means of Access:

Safe means of access and egress shall be provided and maintained to and from every place where
work is undertaken.

DO NO. 128-13 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

• Every scaffold shall be of good construction of sound materials and strength for the purpose for
which it is intended.
• Timber used for scaffolds shall be in good condition, the bark completely stripped off, and not
painted or treated in any manner that defects cannot be easily seen.
• All materials and parts of scaffold not in use or intended for re-use shall be kept under good
condition and separate from other materials unsuitable for scaffolds.

DO NO. 128-13 - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

• Timber/bamboo scaffoldings shall be limited to a height of 6 meters from the ground or base
• Over 6 meters height, steel scaffold shall be used.
• Structural steel when used as load bearing members of scaffolding shall be destressed at welded
or bent joints and design construction approved by the proper authority.
• All manufactured scaffolds and its accessories shall follow the manufacturers’ design and
specifications.
• Technical properties and data of such manufactured scaffold shall be certified true by the
qualified testing laboratory.
• Scaffold more than 6 meters in height shall be designed by structural engineer and approved by
appropriate authority.
• All site fabricated/ conventional supported scaffold exceeding 6m in height or a working load of
150kg/m2 shall be designed by structural engineer and approved by appropriate authority.
• All suspended scaffolds shall be designed and inspected by a structural engineer if site fabricated
• No scaffold shall be erected, moved, dismantled or altered except under the supervision of a
competent person
• Use of Fall protection 2m and above
• For work height of 10m workers are required to use fall arrest system.
• All personnel involved in scaffold must have appropriate training and certification
• Manufacturer training are limited to the erection of manufacturers equipment only
• Each platform shall be fully boarded and guarded
• The space between adjacent units and space between the platform and upright is no more than 1”
(2.5cm) wide.
• Each end of platform 10’ in length shall not extend more than 12” (30cm) unless is designed to
support material and employee without tipping or has guardrail to block access to cantilever end
• Where scaffold planks are abutted to create to create long platform each abutted end shall rest on
a separate support surface.
• Where scaffold is overlapped to create long platform, the overlap shall occur only over support
and shall not be less than 12” unless nailed together or restrained from movement.
85 | P a g e


• Where the platform changed direction, such as turning a corner, any platform that rest on a bearer
at an angle other than a right angle shall be laid first, and a platform which rest at right angle
over the same bearer shall be laid second on top of the first platform.

DO NO. 128-13 – SECTION 3 - DESIGN

• End user to prepare the design instruction including all the date relevant to the design of the
scaffold
• Design shall be in accordance with recognized engineering principles taking into consideration
the:
§ Variability of materials and workmanships
§ Method of construction
§ site condition
§ Construction tolerances
§ Space for scaffolds
• Design with a regard to ease and safety of erection and dismantling
• Supported scaffold capable of supporting at least 4 times the maximum intended load and
suspended shall have 6 times factor of safety
• All scaffold designed by structural engineer shall be approved by appropriate authority.

STRENGTH AND STABILITY OF SCAFFOLDS

• All scaffold shall have vertical members diagonally and horizontally braced to prevent lateral
movement
• No splices between the points of support of load carrying horizontal members and secure to
prevent lateral movement
• The footing, sills or anchorage for scaffolds shall be stable and capable of carrying twice the
maximum intended load without settling
• Unstable object shall not be used to support scaffold
• Scaffold post shall bear foundation of sufficient size and strength to spread the load from the post
over sufficient area.
• All post shall be plumb.
• Any damage or weakened scaffold member from any caused shall be immediately repaired or
replaced
• No overloading of scaffold
• Anchor or secure scaffold to permanent/ rigid structure
• No intermixing of scaffold component unless structural integrity is preserved
• Front end loader or similar shall not support scaffold unless they have specifically designed for
that purpose

86 | P a g e


INSPECTION OF SCAFFOLD
• All scaffold materials must be inspected prior to site delivery
• All defective shall be discarded, replaced, or repaired
• Lumber with 2 nail holes aligned crosswise or 4 nails holes along its length shall not be use as
horizontal load bearing member

SITE INSPECTION
• Site must be inspected prior to scaffold erection to check ground condition, overhead wires,
obstruction, changes in surface elevation and structural support.
• Site preparation shall be performed to ensure soil are level, uniform and firm.
• Mud and soft soil must be compacted with gravel or crushed stone
• Area where mudsills rest shall be leveled by excavating rather than backfilled

SCAFFOLD ERECTION
• No scaffold work without supervision of a competent person.
• All post shall be maintained plumb
• All posts spacing and materials conforms to designer specification
• All runners shall be perpendicular to the post in all situations.
• Diagonal braces extend from one connection to the other 150mm from point of connection.
• Diagonal braces shall not exceed an angle of 60deg from horizontal
• Diagonal braces installed immediately as scaffold rises to maintain plumbness
• All post shall be connected by means of joint pins, or spigots. No lap connection is allowed.
• Always maintain the base width to height ration of 1:4 during erection for stability
• No scaffold activity if wind velocity exceeds 48khp.
• No work is allowed below scaffold during erection
• Working platform shall be provided per level.
• Scaffold more than 6m shall be designed by structural engineer and erected and dismantled by
TESDA certified erectors
• Scaffold erection and dismantling done under competent person supervision.
Tools, Equipment, Materials
• Tools, equipment and materials for erection, installation and dismantling shall be appropriate for
its usage on the type of scaffold, properly inspected and safe for use.
Material and Personnel Access
• Scaffold with one section height shall be provided with safe access
• Supporting members use in the construction of ramps, stairs and ladder shall be secured, fastened
and braced
87 | P a g e


• When hook on ladder is use a rest platform with minimum width of 60cm (2’) shall be provided
every 4m height.
• Ladder access shall protrude at least 1m above the lading place
• When major component is removed for access purposes it must be designed.

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – MOBILE SCAFFOLD

• Must be stable and weighted at the base to prevent overturning
• Only be use in firm and even surface
• Securely braced
• Not moved when workers and tools is on scaffold
• When moving, move as close to the base as possible but not more than 1.2m (4’) above the
supporting surface.
• Height of scaffold must not exceed 4 times the base width dimension
• When outrigger frames use to increase the base width dimension it must be installed on both
sides.
• Scaffold casters and wheels shall be locked to prevent movement
• Platform must not extend beyond the base support unless properly outrigged.

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – LADDER JACK

• Use only when work and materials is light and can be hung on the ladder
• The distance between the ladder is less than 3m (10’)

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – TUBE AND COUPLER

• Coupler must be made of structural metal such as dropped forged, gray cast iron is prohibited
• Traverse bracing forms an “X” across the width of scaffold must be installed at the end scaffold
• Bracing must extend upward diagonally to opposite side of the scaffold such as from inner post
or runners to the next outer post
• Ties shall be installed at bearer level between the transverse bracing.
• Coupler must be made of structural metal such as dropped forged, gray cast iron is prohibited
• Traverse bracing forms an “X” across the width of scaffold must be installed at the end scaffold
• Bracing must extend upward diagonally to opposite side of the scaffold such as from inner post
or runners to the next outer post
• Ties shall be installed at bearer level between the transverse bracing

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – FRAMES

• Frame scaffolds - generally called a Unit Frame Scaffold consist of fabricated walk-through
frame units which incorporate a pair of standards & a transom that are usually connected
longitudinally with diagonal braces.
• When moving more frames, existing frame shall be left undisturbed
88 | P a g e


• Frames shall be braced by a diagonal, cross or horizontal

• Frames shall be joined by coupling or stacking pin
• Bracket use to support cantilevered loads shall be used only to support personnel unless designed
by qualified engineer and built to withstand the tipping over forces.

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – TIMBER

• Post is 1.2 to 2.4m apart at distance of 1m from the wall
• Putlog shall be placed in the holes left in the wall
• Size of post shall not be less than 50 x 100mm
• When extend the post the overlaps shall not be less than 60cm
• In double scaffold the bearer rest entirely on the runner
• Size of post for double scaffold shall not be less than 50 x 100mm
• The spacing for 3.2cm thick plank not exceeding to 1m
• The spacing for 3.8cm thick planks not exceeding to 1.5m
• The displacement of the foot shall be prevented by fixing it to base plate.

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – BAMBOO

• May be use for painting or light construction work only
• The material and construction to carry at least 4x of imposed load
• The maximum span between poles shall be 2.4m
• When height is over 2m fall protection is required
• Maximum height allowed is 6m.

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – TRESTLE

• Scaffold platform must be placed no higher than the second highest rung or step of the ladder
supporting the platform.
• Step ladder must conform to manufacturer requirements
• Must not be bridged one to another
• Not more than 5m
• Platform must be sufficiently wide to transport materials.

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – FORM SCAFFOLD AND CARPENTERS BRACKET

SCAFFOLDS
• A supported scaffold consisting of a platform supported by brackets attached to formwork,
building or structural walls.
• Each bracket, except those for wooden bracket form scaffolds, shall be attached to supporting
formwork or structure by the following:
§ Nails
89 | P a g e


§ Metal stud attachment device

§ Welding
§ Hooking over secured structural supporting member and/or bolts

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – ROOF BRACKET

• Scaffold must be constructed
§ to fit the pitch of the roof
§ Provide level of support for the platform
• Bracket must be anchored in place by nails unless it is impractical to use nails
• When nails do not use, bracket must be secured by high grade manila rope or at least ¾” diameter
• Must be designed by a structural engineer

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – WINDOW JACK

• Scaffold must be securely attached to the opening
• Scaffold must be used only for working at the window opening through which the jack is placed
• Must not be used to support planks or other elements of scaffolding placed between one window
jack and another
• Not more than one employee at a time

SUPPORTED SCAFFOLD – CRAWLING BOARD

• Crawling boards must extend from the roof peak to the eaves when used in roof construction,
repair, or maintenance
• Crawling boards must be secured to the roof by ridge hooks or by means that provide equivalent
strength and durability.
• Crawling boards must be not less than 10 inches wide and 1 inch thick.
• Cleats on crawling boards must be equal in length to the width of the board, be spaced at equal
intervals not to exceed 24 inches and have a minimum cross-sectional area of 1 x 1½ inches.

SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDS
Suspended scaffolds are platforms suspended by ropes, or other non-rigid means, from an overhead
structure. Because two-point scaffolds are the most common type of suspended scaffold, this tool
uses the Two-Point module to describe requirements that apply to all suspended scaffolds.
Requirements specific to the other types are described only in their respective modules.
• Catenary
Platform supported by two essentially horizontal and parallel ropes attached to structural
members of a building. Additional vertical pickups may also provide support.
• Float (ship)
Braced platform resting on two parallel bearers and hung from overhead supports by ropes of
fixed length.

90 | P a g e


• Interior Hung
Platform suspended from the ceiling or roof structure by fixed length supports.
• Multi-level
Two-point or multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold with a series of platforms at various
levels resting on common stirrups.
• Multi-point Adjustable
Platform(s) suspended by more than two ropes from overhead supports and equipped with a
means to permit the platform to be raised and lowered. Includes chimney hoists.
• Needle Beam
A platform suspended from needle beams.
• Single-point Adjustable
Platform suspended by one rope from an overhead support and equipped with a means to
permit the platform to be moved to desired working levels.
• Two-point (swing stage)
Platform supported by hangers (stirrups) suspended by two ropes from overhead supports and
equipped with a means to permit the platform to be raised and lowered.

AERIAL LIFT
• An aerial lift is any vehicle-mounted device used to elevate personnel. Types include:
§ Extendable boom platforms,
§ Aerial ladders,
§ Articulating (jointed) boom platforms,
§ Vertical towers, and
§ Any combination of the above.
• General Safety Requirements
§ Aerial ladder must be secured prior to travel
§ Lift control shall be tested each day prior to use
§ Only authorized personnel can operate the aerial lift
§ Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure or equipment is not allowed
§ Personnel to stand firmly on the floor of the basket and no climbing or sitting on the edge of
the basket
§ Wear of safety belt and attached to boom when working with the lift
§ Do not exceed load limit specified by manufacturer
§ Use brakes when lift is in position
§ Do not move the lift when boom is elevated

MODIFICATION
§ All modification should not impair the stability of scaffold

91 | P a g e


§ Adding sheeting or netting should be carried with approval

SCAFFOLD INSPECTION AND TAGGING

• All scaffold shall be inspected prior to use.
• Inspection shall be performed by qualified person
• All inspection shall be carried out daily and every shift
• All scaffold identification tags shall be of a solid green, yellow or red with black lettering.
• Shall be hanged at each scaffold access that has been inspected safe for use
• Shall be placed whenever special requirements for safe use are required
• DANGER – UNSAFE FOR USE shall be used during erection and dismantling when scaffold is
left unattended

MAINTENANCE DURING USE

• All scaffold shall be properly maintained
• Every part shall be kept, fixed, and secure
• No partly dismantled scaffold shall be use unless it is stable, strong and safe
• Long standing scaffold for 4 months shall not be use until damaged parts has been replaced and
return to original strength.

SCAFFOLD DISMANTLING
• No component which endangered stability be removed
• When removing critical member, the stability should be assured
• Braces shall be inspected prior to dismantling
• Materials should be lowered to the ground and not stored on the scaffold
• Maintain the stabilizing ties specially with sheeted scaffolds
• Guardrail and toe-board at the end of the portion in use.
• If access is possible, warning notices should be fixed

SAFETY CONSIDERATION COMMON TO SCAFFOLD

• All scaffold fittings and accessories must be installed
• Erection and Dismantling of scaffold must be done only by competent person
• Working Platform must be fully plank and guarded and no more than 1” gap

92 | P a g e


TYPES OF LADDER

Ladder Safety
• Use the appropriate Ladder for the Task
• Inspect the Ladder
• Follow the 4:1 Rule
• Use the required Personal Protective Equipment
• Secure the Ladder

Five Rules of Ladder Safety

• Are the rungs in good condition?
• Use a three-point climb (2 feet and 1 hand or 2 hands and 1 foot)
• Always face the front of the ladder
• Keep hands on side rails at all times
• Keep weight centered

93 | P a g e


Belt Buckle Rule

GUARD RAILS
Guardrail System a) Guardrail systems shall be installed along all open sides and ends of platforms
and must be in place before the scaffold is released for use by personnel other than
erection/dismantling crews. b) Walkways located within a scaffold shall have guardrail systems
installed within 24cm (9½ in.) of and along at least one side of the walkway. c) Each top rail or
equivalent member of a guardrail system shall be able to withstand a force of at least 100 kg (220
pounds) applied in any downward or horizontal direction, at any point along its top edge. The height
of top rails on supported scaffolds shall be 91 cm (36 in.).
FALL PROTECTION
Fall Protection equipment shall be provided on any scaffold 2m (6 feet) or more above ground.
Personnel performing work from a supported scaffold shall be protected by a guardrail from falling
from all open sides and end of the scaffold.
CLEARANCE FROM POWERLINES
The clearance between scaffolds and power lines shall be as follows:
• Scaffolds shall not be erected, used, dismantled, altered, or moved such that they or any
conductive material handled on them might get closer to exposed and energized lines than as
follows:
Insulated Lines
Less than 300 volts Minimum Distance 0.9 meters (3 feet)
330 volts to 50 kV Minimum Distance 3.1 meters (10 feet)
More than 50 kV Minimum Distance 3.1 meters (10feet) plus
10 centimeters (4 inches) for each one kV
over 50 kV or Two times the length of the
line insulator, but never less than 3.1 meters
(10 feet).
94 | P a g e


Non-insulated Lines
Less than 50 kV Minimum Distance 3.1 meters (10 feet)

More than 50 kV Minimum Distance 3.1 meters (10feet) plus

10 centimeters (4 inches) for each one kV
over 50 kV or Two times the length of the
line insulator, but never less than 3.1 meters
(10 feet).

TRAINING AND COMPETENCY REQUIREMENTS

• AS per Rule 14.1.1 of OSHS
All Scaffolds competent person MUST undergo the standard scaffold training and assessment
prescribed by DOLE-OSHC Accredited Training Organization and TESDA.
• 14.2 Scaffold Erector
§ All Scaffolds Erectors must undergo the standard scaffold training and assessment
prescribed by DOLE and TESDA.
§ Scaffold Erectors shall have the following certification:
a. One Day Workers Safety Orientation from DOLE or its accredited safety training
organizations.
b. Must be a holder of TESDA prescribed Scaffold Erection NC II.
• Under DO 128-13 Rule 1414.14
The Competent Person shall have the following certification:
a. COSH Training Certificate from DOLE or its accredited safety training organizations.
b. Must be a holder of TESDA prescribed Scaffold Erection Certificate.

SOURCE:
https://www.dole.gov.ph/news/department-order-no-128-13-amending-rule-1414-on-scaffoldings-of-the-1989-occupational-health-and-safety-
standards-as-amended/
https://laborlawphilippines.wordpress.com/2010/03/25/rule-1410-construction-safety/
https://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/scaffolding/gen_req.html

95 | P a g e


MODULE 10:
TEMPORARY STRUCTURE (ERECTION AND DISMANTLING)

Scaffold Components – Tubes and Fittings

96 | P a g e


Scaffold Components for Framed Scaffold

Fig. 1 Framed Scaffold

97 | P a g e


98 | P a g e


99 | P a g e


Fig. 4 – Things to consider when erecting mobile scaffold

Control Measures for Working Platforms

There should be a system in place to limit the number of platforms permitted as working platforms,
and to limit the respective platform ratings, to prevent the scaffold being overloaded.
Possible systems include:
• closing off platforms at the access points by physical means placing signs at the access points
to each platform, advising if closed or indicating the duty rating of a working platform
• assigning an on-site scaffold coordinator to the relevant contractors, to control the use of
various platforms, or sections of platforms
• designating who is to use the scaffold at any given time

100 | P a g e


Principal contractors must clearly identify in their written WHS management plan those responsible
for implementing the control measures.
The system should also:
• include in the site induction the control measures and the names of those persons responsible
for implementing the controls
• have means to identify working platforms that are closed – this can be discussed at regular
toolbox meetings
• have means to monitor and review the control measures regularly – if the control measures
are not effective, they should be modified, and records of the monitoring and modifications
should be kept

Erecting, Altering, and Dismantling

Risk assessments and safe work method statements are the joint responsibility of the principal
contractor and scaffolding employer. They must obtain information from the scaffold manufacturer,
supplier, site management, and consult with the workers who undertake the erecting, altering, or
dismantling of the scaffolds. This information must be considered when preparing site-specific safe
work method statements.
For safe completion of the work, consider the following:
• pass scaffold items – do not throw them
• the scaffolder must work from a safe position when installing edge protection for the platform
above, e.g. by:
o standing on an erection platform with edge protection (see figures 1, 2, 3 and 4 for
various examples of erection platforms)
o erecting temporary edge protection from the work platform below (see figure 5 for an
example of proprietary temporary edge protection) and working behind it to install or
remove the permanent edge protection. (The sections below provide design criteria for
temporary edge protection and erection platforms).
• the scaffolder should be supported on a fully planked platform when installing the platform
immediately above, except for platform spacings above 2 m where another purpose-made
erection platform may be required for platform installation
• the fully planked platforms should be nominally 2 m apart, vertically, and remain in place
until the scaffold is dismantled

• the first platform can be up to 3 m above the ground or supporting surface, except for the
access bay
• safe access must be provided up to the first platform and between platforms on the scaffold
• risks from overhead power lines must be assessed and controlled

Design Criteria for Erection Platforms

Erection platforms should comply with the criteria given below.

101 | P a g e


Type of erection platform Criteria

Load rating: minimum 120 kg.

Stiles: minimum spacing 350 mm.
Non-slip feet: should comply with clause 2.5.3 of
AS/NZS:1892 part 1 or 3.
Platform area: minimum 350 mm wide x 300 mm deep,
including the ladder rung if it is at the same level as the
Ladder-based erection
platform.
platforms (for scaffolding
platform spacing of up to 3 m, Unless the erection platform complies with the stability
i.e. erection platform max 2 m requirements of section 5 of AS/NZS: 1892 part 1 or 3
in height) (clauses 5.2 to 5.4), means should be provided to secure the
platform to the scaffold, e.g. hooking onto the guardrail.
For erection platforms up to 1.2 m in height, incorporate a
built-in mid-rail on the three non-access sides. For single
ladder types the continuing stiles are considered as mid-rails.
For erection platforms between 1.2 m and 2 m in height,
incorporate guardrails on the three non-access sides.

Erection platforms supported Load rating: minimum 120 kg

on ledgers/guardrails (suitable
Erection platform area: minimum 500 mm x 600 mm.
for scaffolding
platform spacing of up to 2 m) On scaffolding edge sides, incorporate a built-in mid-rail.

Scaffold planks supported on

temporary transoms (suitable
Platform area: minimum 2 x 225 mm wide scaffold planks.
for scaffolding platform
spacing of up to 2 m)

Generic work sequence - scaffold erecting and dismantling for 2 m vertical platform
intervals
Where work methods differ from the generic work sequence below alternative methods should
provide an equivalent level of safety to those specified in this guide.
Task
(break the job down into Activity
steps)

• prevent unauthorized access to scaffold area

• one scaffolder holds standards, while another places
Base out scaffold and erect transoms and ledgers
base lift and first lift • adjust screw jacks to level the scaffold
• erect transoms and ledgers for the first lift
• erect planks from below for the first lift

102 | P a g e


Task
(break the job down into Activity
steps)

• install access stairway or ladder to platform for the first lift

• if access is by stairway, ensure the stair access bay is erected
Complete first lift with the run of the scaffold
• install edge protection comprising guardrail, mid-rail and toe
board or mesh panels to first lift

Working from a fully planked platform on the first lift, install

standards (where the standard joint is 1 to 1.5 m above the
platform level), transoms, ledgers, and hop-ups for the next
lift above.
Where using erection platforms
• place an erection platform on the scaffold – see figures 1, 2,
3 and 4 for erection platform options
• working from the erection platform, erect standards (where
Erect next lift from a platform the standard joint is 1 to 1.5 m above the erection platform
level), mid-rails and guardrails for the lift above
• standing on the working platform (or an erection platform for
lifts of 2.5 to 3 m), place planks within the transoms to form
the above working platform
• install ladder or stairway access to working platform above
• access the above working platform
• install toe boards (or other systems to prevent objects falling)

Where using temporary edge protection

• install temporary edge protection for platform above – see
figure 5
• install transoms and ledgers for platform above
• standing on the working platform (or an erection platform for
lifts of 2.5 to 3 m), place planks within the transoms to form
the above working platform.
• install ladder or stairway access to working platform above
• access the above working platform
• install next standards, guardrails, and mid-rails
• install toe boards (or other systems to prevent objects falling)
Scaffold should be erected as close as practicable to the working
face. Where the scaffold is greater than 225 mm from the
working face, install guardrails and mid-rails to the inner
face standards.

103 | P a g e


Task
(break the job down into Activity
steps)

• unless a specific engineering design is provided, fix the first

row of ties no more than 4 m above the ground. Do not allow
a scaffold to free stand more than 4 m above the ground or a
Erect next lifts row of ties.
• secure objects or remove unsecured objects from the scaffold
• repeat erection sequence as per previous task

General precautions
• access the scaffold platform from a ladder or stair access – do
not climb the standards, ledgers, and transoms
• maintain a tidy work area
• do not overload the scaffold bays – progressively remove
scaffolding equipment from platforms and stack it neatly on
the ground
• do not leave loose materials on platforms
• do not throw down any materials or scaffolding equipment
Dismantle scaffold • remove chain wire mesh and shade cloth while working from
a fully planked platform
• work with a guardrail in place when removing and passing
mesh panels down
• work from a fully planked platform below when dismantling
hop-up brackets, tie bars and planks
• do not allow an unsheathed scaffold to free stand more than 4
m or a sheeted scaffold more than 2 m above the highest tie
remaining in place
• before lifting a toe board, ensure the adjacent plank is held in
place

Dismantling sequence
Note: Follow the below dismantling sequence if you are using
erection platforms. If you are using a temporary edge
protection system, modify the dismantling sequence to suit.
• access the top platform by stairway or ladder
• start dismantling from an end bay
• remove chain wire mesh and shade cloth, or mesh panels,
from the level to be dismantled or from the whole scaffold if
not required during the dismantling process
• move down to the platform below
• dismantle top platform planks

104 | P a g e


Task
(break the job down into Activity
steps)
• working from an erection platform on the fully planked
platform, dismantle guardrails, mid-rails, ledgers, transoms,
and standards from the level above
• step off the erection platform
• dismantle the hop-up platform above, if in place
• remove not more than three planks (ensure at least two
planks remain) to enable the dismantled materials to be
passed down to the next level (where they are to be
temporarily stacked or removed from the scaffold)
• if removing dismantled materials progressively down
through the scaffold, ensure that the gaps created are not
directly below each other and that planks are replaced when a
gap is not being used to lower materials
• remove ties progressively as the scaffold is dismantled
• progressively repeat this procedure until dismantling can be
completed from the ground

Generic Work Sequence - Specific Tasks

Task
(Break the job down into Activity
steps)

• standing within the scaffold bay and behind the temporary

edge protection, install the mid-rail and guardrail for the
platform above
• if mesh guard is being used, raise the mesh guard to its new
location for the 1 m work platform
• the scaffolder on the work platform removes the internal
plank from the work platform (the board closest to the
Raise the platform 1 m from a building) and places it on the transoms for the lift above.
fully planked platform (this • repeat sequentially until the last two planks remain
applies to platforms five
planks wide) • the scaffolder accesses the raised deck
• another scaffolder, working from the fully planked platform
below passes the remaining two planks to the scaffolder
above
• the scaffolder places the planks on the transoms,
completing the raised platform
• install toe boards (or other systems to prevent objects
falling)

105 | P a g e


Task
(Break the job down into Activity
steps)
Note: If a three-plank platform is used, an alternative method must
be devised.

Lower the 1 m platform (this

applies to platforms five • reverse the raising sequence
planks wide)

• install ties from a fully planked platform

• check with site management that the supporting structure
Install ties has sufficient strength to withstand the forces imposed by
the scaffold when the tie is connected – i.e. minimum 615
kg push in or pull out per tie

• check the structure and material to which the drilled-in

anchors are to be applied, to confirm its suitability for the
Install anchors for ties (where application
used)
• install anchors in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions

Erect and move hop-up • erect or move hop-up brackets, tie bars and planks from the
brackets and tie bars fully planked platform below

• erect stairways and ladders progressively from the base of

the scaffold
• ensure that the top of any ladder extends not less than 900
mm above the highest platform served by the ladder -
Install access otherwise provide a suitable handhold to this height
• ensure that suitable edge protection is fitted at the opening
in each platform served by the ladder within the scaffold
bay
• secure ladders to prevent movement

• fix containment sheeting when working from a fully

planked platform with edge protection.
• fix containment sheeting securely to the scaffold at every
platform level and at the top and bottom of the scaffold. For
Fix containment sheeting, e.g. shade cloth fix at 1200 mm centers (maximum), vertically
chain wire mesh and shade and horizontally
cloth (where used) • fill all gaps with similar material
• ensure containment sheeting extends at least 1 m above the
top-most platform
• do not allow any sheeted scaffold to free stand more than 2
m above the highest tie remaining in place.

106 | P a g e


Task
(Break the job down into Activity
steps)

• erect mesh panels when working from a fully planked

platform with edge protection
• gaps between adjoining mesh panels and standards must
Erect mesh panels (where not be greater than 25 mm, measured horizontally
used) • fill any larger gaps between panels with similar material
• do not allow any scaffold fitted with mesh panels to free
stand more than 2 m above the highest tie remaining in
place

107 | P a g e


Erection platform options

Figure 1: Diagrammatic illustration of erection and dismantling using various erection platform
options – one-man operation. Note: scaffold is shown against a building, so guardrails only needed
on external face. Toe boards omitted for clarity.

108 | P a g e


Figure 2: Diagrammatic illustration of erection and dismantling using various erection platform
options – two-man operation. Note: Scaffold is shown against a building, so guardrails only needed
on external face. Toe boards omitted for clarity.

109 | P a g e


Figure 3: Diagrammatic illustration of an erection platform option for a five-plank-wide scaffold.

Note: Scaffold is shown against an existing building, so guardrails only needed on external face.
Access ladder and toe boards omitted for clarity.

110 | P a g e


Figure 4: Diagrammatic illustration of an erection platform option for a three-plank-wide scaffold.

Note: Scaffold is shown against a building, so guardrails only needed on external face. Toe boards
omitted for clarity.

111 | P a g e


N
ote: Toe boards and lower mid-rails omitted for clarity.
Note: Proprietary temporary edge protection systems such as that illustrated above require a safe
work method statement and the scaffolders to undertake training to use the system safely.

112 | P a g e


Figure 6: Diagrammatic illustration of a typical tie pattern

Bay no 1 2 3 4 5 6 etc.

etc.

5 HD HD C C C C

4 C C C C HD MD

3 C C HD HD C C

2 C C C C C LD

1 C C C C C C

Level

Table 6a: Example of staggered work platforms, based on direct access from the building to each
platform.

113 | P a g e


Acronym Definition

C Closed duty

HD Heavy duty

MD Medium duty

LD Light duty

Legend for table 6a

How to Inspect a Harness
Harnesses must be examined at least 12 monthly and should also be subject to Pre-Use Checks,
Detailed Periodic Inspections and Interim Inspections.
Pre-use checks are essential and must be carried out each time a harness is going to be used. These
checks are both visual and tactile and should include:
• Webbing: Look for any signs of damage such as bobbling/strained or badly pulled
webbing, cracks, cuts, fraying or loose stitching/fading which could be signs that the fibre
structure has been affected.
• Buckles: Check that all rivets are tight and buckles are not bent, chipped or have sharp
edges protruding and that all stitching is intact.
• D-Rings: Check for any signs of distortion, fatigue or rust (if rust covers more than 15%
of the surface and you can rub the rust off between your thumb and forefinger, then this is
unacceptable). Finally, make sure the ring pivots freely.
• Plastic Loops: Look for signs of breaking, cracking or damaged loops.
• Straps and rope: Check all straps for signs of fraying or broken fibres. Inspect clips on
straps and check for any loose stitching.
• Label: Make sure the label has an individual serial number, inspection date, that there have
been no reported problems and the manufacturing date is present and that the harness has
not exceeded the 5 years working life*

Note: Normally Safety Harness can have a maximum lifespan of harness is 10 years from the date
of manufactured and maximum of 5 years from the first date of use at site. Check your
manufacturer instruction notes regarding the harness lifespan

114 | P a g e


Steps in Wearing a Harness

To follow is a brief guide showing how to wear a typical harness.

115 | P a g e


Guide in Scaffold Inspection

1. Scaffold vicinity
¨ Has public protection been provided?
¨ Have safeguards against overhead electric lines been provided?
¨ Is there control over vehicle movement?
¨ Is there control over crane operation?
¨ Are there controls for storage, handling and using hazardous substances?
¨ Are scaffolds erected a safe distance away from trenches or excavations?
2. Supporting structure
¨ Is the supporting structure in a safe condition?
¨ Does the supporting structure have satisfactory strength?

116 | P a g e


¨ Are there controls to prevent deterioration of the supporting structure?

¨ Are all measures to strengthen the supporting structure satisfactory?
¨ Is the risk of the supporting structure being overloaded from other sources satisfactorily
controlled?
¨ Is the scaffold built on solid ground? If built on soft ground are soleboards used
to properly distribute the load?
3. Sole boards and baseplates
¨ Are there enough sole boards?
¨ Are the sole boards of suitable material and in a serviceable condition?
¨ Are the sole boards secure?
¨ Are there enough baseplates?
¨ Are the baseplates of the correct type?
¨ Are the baseplates serviceable and of suitable dimensions?
¨ Are the baseplates secure?
4. Scaffold structure
¨ Are the standards bearing firmly?
¨ Are the standards plumb or as designed?
¨ Are the longitudinal standard spacings correct?
¨ Are the transverse standard spacings correct?
¨ Are the joints in standards correctly positioned?
¨ Are the joints in standards correctly secured—special duty or hung scaffold?
¨ Are the ledgers level or as designed?
¨ Are the ledgers continuous or as designed?
¨ Are the lift heights correct?
¨ Are the horizontal ledger spacings correct?
¨ Are the ledgers correctly secured?
¨ Are ledger joints correctly positioned tube and coupler scaffold?
¨ Are the joints in ledgers correctly secured tube and coupler scaffold?
¨ Are there enough transoms or putlogs?
¨ Are the transoms or putlogs correctly positioned and secured?
¨ Is the bracing satisfactory?
¨ Is the scaffold stable?
¨ Are the ties correctly positioned and correctly fixed?
¨ Has mixing of components been approved in writing by a competent person?
5. Platforms
¨ Does the scaffold have the required number of working platforms?
¨ Are the working platforms at the required locations?
117 | P a g e


¨ Are catch platforms correctly positioned?

¨ Are the platforms and supporting scaffold constructed for the relevant duty live loads?
¨ Are the platform dimensions suitable for the intended work?
¨ Is there satisfactory edge protection?
¨ Are the platforms correctly constructed?
¨ Are planks secured against wind?
6. Entry and exit
¨ Is there safe entry and exit to every scaffold platform?
¨ Are temporary stairways correctly installed?
¨ Are portable ladders of an industrial grade, serviceable and correctly installed?
¨ Are entries, exits and access platforms correctly installed?
7. Containment sheeting
¨ Has the scaffold been designed for wind loading on containment sheeting?
¨ Has the retention of rainwater and its effect on increasing weight been considered?
¨ Are the fixing ties secure?
¨ Are there rips or tears?
¨ Are the overlap joints satisfactory?
8. Mobile scaffolds
¨ Is the supporting surface hard and flat?
¨ Is the area of operation free of overhead electric lines and other hazards?
¨ Are floor penetrations covered?
¨ Are the castor wheel locks in working order? They should always be locked, except during
movement of the scaffold.
9. General fitness for purpose
¨ Is there provision for material handling?
¨ Are the clearances between the scaffold and adjacent structures correct?
¨ Is there protection from falling debris?
¨ Has the scaffold been safely designed to support attachments?
¨ Are approaches and platforms effectively lit?
Guidelines in Tagging Scaffolds
Scaffold tags are used to protect the lives of your workers. It identifies if a scaffold is safe or unsafe
for use. Follow the guidelines below when tagging scaffolds.
1. Inspection and tagging of the scaffold are to be performed by a competent person experienced
in the erection of scaffold.
2. A unique scaffold identification tag number must be clearly identified on all tags for tracking
purposes.
3. All scaffolds shall be inspected after the erection per regulatory requirements.

118 | P a g e


4. All scaffold identification tags will be of a solid green, yellow, or red color with black
lettering.
5. Front information displayed and completed for each tag.
6. It is common practice to use the following color schemes: Green, Yellow, Red
• Green – tags will be hung on scaffolds that have been inspected and are safe for use.
A green “SAFE FOR USE” tag(s)and should be attached to the scaffold at each access
point after the initial inspection is complete.

• Yellow – “CAUTION” tag(s), will replace all green “Safe Scaffold” tag(s) whenever
the scaffold has been modified to meet work requirements, and as a result, could
present a hazard to the user. This tag indicates special requirements for safe use.

NOTE: Use of the “yellow tag” status is not intended to override the green tag system.
All efforts should be made to return the scaffold to a “Green Tag” status as soon as
possible.

119 | P a g e


• Red – “DANGER – UNSAFE FOR USE” tag(s), will be used during erection or
dismantling when the scaffold is left unattended and replace all green “Safe for Use ”
tag(s) or yellow “Caution / Hazard “ tag(s) in the event a scaffold has been deemed
unfit for use.

SOURCE:
https://www.safework.nsw.gov.au/resource-library/scaffolding/erecting,-altering-and-dismantling-scaffolding-part-1-prefabricated-steel-modular-
scaffolding
https://www.safeworkaustralia.gov.au/doc/guide-scaffold-inspection-and-maintenance
https://safetyculture.com/topics/scaffolding-safety/

120 | P a g e


MODULE 11:
ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY

Learning Objective
• Learn about Environmental Safety
• Identify types of hazardous materials and how exposures can occur.
• Identify hazards associated with hazardous materials, including injuries that may occur.
• Describe methods for eliminating physical hazards of hazardous materials.
• Describe methods for eliminating health hazards of hazardous materials.
• Familiarized with SDS Content

WHAT IS ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY?

• It is one of the most vital areas of health and safety practices. However, the term “environmental”
can imply that somehow it only takes place outdoors, which is far from the case.
• The most common definition of environmental safety is practices, policies, and procedures that
ensure the safety and well-being of anyone in the immediate area.
• This can include safety in terms of proper waste disposal, containment and storage of potentially
toxic chemicals and much more.

THREE PRIMARY AREA OF ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY?

Though “environmental safety” is a rather nebulous term, there are three primary areas
where environmental safety is of concern. They are:
1. Occupational safety and health
2. Environmental control
3. Chemical safety
Each of these areas is governed by laws at the municipal, state and federal level, and compliance
with those regulations is of vital importance to many businesses.

121 | P a g e


• Occupational safety and health practices are focused on

environmental safety in the workplace, thereby reducing risks
to employees in any given workplace.
Examples are dangerous chemicals, gases/fumes, waste and
other potential threats to the health and safety of workers.

• Environmental control, naturally, is concerned with preventing pollution and other threats to
the environment and anyone that may be affected by it. For instance, preventing dumping of
chemicals into the local ecosystem or ensuring proper management of waste materials.

• Chemical safety concerns the safe storage, use, disposal and so on of various chemicals.

IMPORTANCE OF ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY

• It is business legal obligation – to avoid legal liabilities and fines
• To minimized if not prevented manmade disasters caused by inadequate environmental safety
measures.
• It is our moral obligation to preserve life of our employees.

122 | P a g e


TYPES OF ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS

• Physical Hazard
• Biological Hazard
• Chemical Hazard
• Ergonomics Hazard

Physical Hazards
• Noise
• Vibration
• Inadequate Illumination
• Extreme temperature
• Extreme Pressure
• Radiation

NOISE
• is harmful sound, which has 3 characteristics (of Sound):
• Frequency - measured in (Hertz) cycles per second
• Loudness - intensity of the sound, measured in Decibel (dB)
• Duration – continuous, intermittent, burst, waxing / waning

Permissible Noise Exposure (OSHS Table 8b) – without the need for earplug

Duration/day Sound Level (dBA, slow

(hours) response)
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1-1/2 102
1 105
1/2 110
1/4 115

123 | P a g e


The Four Types of noise

Here’s a breakdown of the different types of noise that affect us all
1. Continuous noise
Continuous noise is exactly what it says on the tin: it’s
noise that is produced continuously, for example, by
machinery that keeps running without interruption. This
could come from factory equipment, engine noise, or
heating and ventilation systems.
You can measure continuous noise for just a few minutes
with a sound level meter to get a sufficient representation
of the noise level. If you want to analyze the noise further,
you need to look for a sound level meter with octave band
analysis. Octave bands allow you to break the noise down
into its separate frequencies. This information will tell
you exactly what frequency is causing the noise. You may
even want to investigate the noise with 1:3 octave
bands, which can provide even more detail about the
frequency content of the noise you’re measuring.

2. Intermittent noise
Intermittent noise is a noise level that increases and decreases rapidly. This might be
caused by a train passing by factory equipment that operates in cycles, or aircraft flying
above your house.
We measure intermittent noise in a similar way to continuous noise, with a sound level
meter. However, you also need to know the duration of each occurrence and the time
between each one. To gain a more reliable estimate of the noise level, you should measure
over multiple occurrences to calculate an average. If you’re using an integrating-
averaging sound level meter, this will make the calculation for you and present this in
terms of an LAeq.

3. Impulsive noise
Impulsive noise is most commonly associated with the construction and demolition
industry. These sudden bursts of noise can startle you by their fast and surprising nature.
Impulsive noises are commonly created by explosions or construction equipment, such as
pile drivers, or your next-door neighbor doing some DIY on a Sunday morning. To measure
impulsive noise, you will need a sound level meter or a personal noise dosimeter that can
calculate Peak values.
Don’t forget that even in an environment that is usually quiet, a single very loud noise can
cause hearing damage, which is why it’s important to measure Peak levels alongside the
average or Leq value. In most applications, Peak will be measured using the C-weighting,
so you should make sure that your sound level meter provides this.

4. Low-frequency noise
Low-frequency noise makes up part of the fabric of our daily soundscape. Whether it’s the
low background hum of a nearby power station or the roaring of large diesel engines, we’re

124 | P a g e


exposed to low-frequency noise constantly. It also happens to be the hardest type of noise
to reduce at source, so it can easily spread for miles around.
For low-frequency noise, you should be using a sound level meter with third octave band
analysis, so you can analyze the low frequencies that make up the noise. You may also
need to look at the C-weighted measurements and compare this to the A-weighted
measurements, as this can show how much low-frequency noise is present. If you are not
sure what the different frequency weightings are, you can read more about them here.
Adverse Health Effects:
• Acoustic Trauma (Explosion, gunshot) - Deafness
• Temporary Threshold shift (Disco)
• Poor communication
• Increase in blood pressure & stress

Control of Noise Problems in the Workplace

• Engineering methods
a) Purchase new equipment
b) Preventive maintenance
c) Isolation/damping
• Administrative Control
a) Job rotation/breaks
• PPE
a) Ear plugs/ earmuffs

Sources:
http://www.oshc.dole.gov.ph/images/Files/Info%20Materials/OSHC%20Info%20Materials/Recognition_of_Environme
ntal_Hazards.pdf
https://www.cirrusresearch.co.uk/blog/2020/04/4-different-types-noise/

VIBRATION
Refers to rapid or oscillating movements which, in the workplace, are often transferred to
workers via work equipment and processes, such as drills, jack-hammers and other
machinery

2 Types of Vibrations
1. Whole Body Vibration – is transmitted through the seat or feet of
employees who drive mobile machines, or other work vehicles, over
rough and uneven surfaces as a main part of their job. Large shocks and
jolts may cause health risks including back-pain.

125 | P a g e


2. High frequency or segmental (Hand-Arm Vibration) – hand driven power tools

such as chain saw, portable grinder and polishers

ILLUMINATION
The amount of light we need varies and depends on:
1. Type of task being done (such as demands for speed and accuracy).
2. Type of surfaces (does it reflect or absorb light).
3. General work area.
4. Individual's vision.

The amount of light falling on a surface is measured in units called lux.

Depending on the factors noted above, adequate general lighting is usually between 500 and
1000 lux when measured 76 cm (30 inches) above the floor.
Source: https://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/ergonomics/lighting_survey.html

Sources of Light
1. Natural light - Skylights and windows should be located and spaced so that daylight
conditions are uniform over the working area.
2. Artificial light - Artificial lighting shall be provided when daylight fails or for area where
the daylight illumination is insufficient.

126 | P a g e


Types of Lighting
Lighting is classified by intended use as general, accent, or task lighting, depending largely on
the distribution of the light produced by the fixture.
1. Task lighting is mainly functional and is usually the most concentrated, for purposes such
as reading or inspection of materials. For example, inspection tasks and materials quality
control checking may require higher lux.

2. Accent lighting is mainly decorative, intended to highlight pictures, plants, or other

elements of interior design or landscaping.

3. General lighting (sometimes referred to as ambient light) fills in between the two and is
intended for general illumination of an area. Indoors, this would be a basic lamp on a table
or floor, or a fixture on the ceiling. Outdoors, general lighting for a parking lot may be as
low as 10-20 lux (1-2 foot-candles) since pedestrians and motorists already used to the dark
will need little light for crossing the area.

What should you know about glare?

Glare is a common lighting problem. Glare is what happens when a bright light source or
reflection interferes with how you are 'seeing' an object. In most cases, your eyes will adapt to
the brightest level of light. When this adaptation happens, it becomes harder to see the details
in the duller or darker areas of the workspace (even though they are sufficiently lit!). Glare can
cause annoyance and discomfort and can actually decrease a person's ability to see.
Source: https://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/ergonomics/lighting

127 | P a g e


Reflected glare is caused by:

• Light reflected from polished, shiny or glossy surfaces.
• Glass on picture frames, or windows at night.
• Monitors / screens.

Direct glare is caused by:

• Very bright light from poorly positioned light fixtures.
• Sunlight.

How do you correct glare problems?

To correct glare, try:
• Using several small low-intensity light fixtures rather than one large high-intensity light
fixture.
• Using light fixtures that diffuse or concentrate light
well. Indirect light fixtures or direct light fixtures with
parabolic louvres are two possibilities.
• Covering bare bulbs with louvers, lenses or other
devices to control light.
• Increasing the brightness of the area around the glare
source.
• Using adjustable local lighting with brightness
controls.
• Positioning light fixtures to reduce reflected light that is directed toward the eyes.

EXTREME TEMPERATURE
Exposure:
• Prolonged work under direct sunlight
• Work area w/ strong heat source, poor ventilation & high humidity
• Heavy workload

Extreme temperature. Excessive heat workplace, whether working in the field

or in the building where high temperatures not only cause discomfort but may
increase the risk of accidents due to muscle cramps, heat exhaustion, and the
worst is death – Labor Advisory 03-2016

TYPES OF HEAT RELATED ILLNESS

1. Prickly heat: can occur where due to the sweat glands are blocked and consequently
accumulated sweat.
2. Heat Cramps: usually occurs in the arms, legs and abdomen. Usually, it happens after
intense sweating and not drinking enough water.
3. Heat Syncope: Sudden unconscious. Occurred because of blood pressure is too low. Often
occur after heavy work continuously. The skin becomes cold and sticky while the pulse is
weak.

128 | P a g e


4. Heat Exhaustion: Symptoms include fatigue, dizziness, clammy skin, intense sweating,
loss of appetite, nausea, and abdominal pain. These signs arise when the body loses too
much water when doing a lot of physical activity in high temperature areas.
5. Heat Stroke: The body loses its ability to cool itself. As a result, increased body
temperature, quick pulse, lost orientation, confusion, decreased blood pressure,
unconsciousness, and coma. This issue requires urgent medical treatment because it can
cause death.

PREDISPOSING FACTORS FOR HEAT ILLNESSES

• Physical activity
• Extremes of age, poor physical condition, fatigue
• Excessive clothing
• Dehydration
• Cardiovascular disease
• Skin disorder
• Obesity
• Drugs – diuretics, amphetamine, cocaine

HEAT STRESS
• when the body’s temperature goes higher than 37.5°C

Exposure settings:
• High temperature
• High humidity
• Poor ventilation
• Multiple heat sources

Control of Heat Problems

§ Engineering control
a. Ventilation
b. Water sources (fountains/showers)
§ Administrative control
a. Job rotation/breaks
§ PPE
a. Cotton clothes, multiple changes

SOURCES OF HEAT
Heat may come from many sources. In the construction industry, heat sources are as follows:
• Hot and welding works
• Summer sunshine
• Heavy equipment exhaust
• Canteens and food preparation areas
• Hot surfaces such as roofing

129 | P a g e


PRESSURE
Refers to the atmospheric force that is constantly applied on the body, as a result
of a normal changes in altitude or artificially induced conditions. Pressure
changes causes body stress

Extreme Pressure
Occupational Exposure:
• Underwater tunneling
• Diving
• Sewage construction

The GHS has four groups for gases under pressure.

• Compressed gases (e.g., hydrogen)
• Liquified gases (e.g., propane, anhydrous ammonia)
• Refrigerated liquified gases (e.g., liquid nitrogen)
• Dissolved gases (e.g., acetylene)

RADIATION
In physics, radiation is the emission or transmission of energy in the form of waves or
particles through space or through a material medium.
There are two basic types of radiation.
1. Ionizing Radiation
Used for detecting weakness of metal structure
X-ray inspection of welds
2. Non-Ionizing Radiation
Lasers, Microwave, Infrared (IR), Visible light, Ultraviolet (UV) radiation, electric arc
welding

130 | P a g e


At the time of shooting, the radiation safety officer must be at the area. The radiation safety
officer is the person is holding the responsibility for radiation safety within a company.
This individual sets the regulations that must be observed as well as handles
recommendations and corrective actions that may need to be taken. Usually, the RSO will
instruct new employees and periodically review workers about the policies and procedures
surrounding radiation safety on the job.

The RSO is also the person who will deal with the Radiation Safety Committee and talk
about the safety protocols that need to be set in place. He or she must also complete a
review each year of the program relating specifically to how the standards are being
followed and any accidents and adjustments that may needed.

RADIATION EXPOSURE
The type of radiation emitted, the radiation dose received by a worker, and the parts of the
body that are exposed

131 | P a g e


RADIATION EXPOSURE in CONSTRUCTION

• Too much exposure to sun’s ionizing radiation
• Exposure to unknown radiation source (machines, abandoned area, pipe leaks
and wastes) in the construction area,
• Radiation exposure coming from testing tools
• Nuclear plant construction and repair

INADEQUATE OR POOR VENTILATION

-Occurs when the process of supplying or removing air by natural or mechanical means to and
from any space is not sufficiently and correctly done or provided.
-Is the result contributing with other physical or chemical hazards present in the atmosphere. -
Source: https://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/hsprograms

Ventilation is not an occupational hazard; ventilation is a control measure.

Ventilation is the process of supplying or removing air by natural or mechanical means to and from
any space.
The purposes are:
• Ensure condition of thermal comfort
• Renew the air in the workplace, diluting eventual air contaminants to acceptable levels.
132 | P a g e


• Prevent hazardous air contaminants from generating into the working environment and
reaching the workers breathing zone.

Types of Industrial Ventilation

General or Dilution Ventilation - aims at the supply and removal of air in the work environment so
that the possible contaminants are diluted to levels considered to be not harmful to health.

Means of General Ventilation

• Natural Ventilation
• Mechanical Ventilation

A worker/painter doing his task with natural ventilation.

Limiting Factors on the Use of General Ventilation

• Quantity of contaminant must not be high
• Workers must be far from contaminant source
• Toxicity of contaminant must be low
• Direction of clean airflow must remove contaminant from the worker’s breathing
zone

Local Exhaust Ventilation (LEV)

Aims at the removal of the air contaminants from the point of dispersion or generation before they
contaminate the work environment and reach the breathing zone of the workers in harmful
concentration.

EXAMPLES OF VENTILATION in the Construction Industry

-Temporary systems such as exhaust fans and ducts accessories to refresh indoor air of a worksite.

133 | P a g e


- Portable air conditioning system to provide a comfortable temperature during

extreme heat.

Basic Elements of Local Exhaust Ventilation System (LEVS)

• Hoods, Duct work
• Fan and motor
• Air cleaning device
• Exhaust stack

Evaluation of Hoods
• Measurement of face/capture velocity
• Smoke test
• Comparison to standards
• Regular monitoring

134 | P a g e


WHAT ARE CHEMICAL HAZARDS?

A chemical hazard generally refers to a type of occupational hazard caused by exposure
to chemicals in the workplace.

TYPES OF CHEMICAL HAZARDS

§ Vapor diffused matter suspended floating in the air and impairing its transparency.
Examples are the components of organic solvents such as benzene, toluene, acetone, and xylene -
Paints/ Thinner, Glue/ Rubber, Adhesive, Carpets
§ Mist is a tiny droplet of water hanging in the air (particle size of 5 to 100 um approximately.
Examples: nitric acid and sulfuric acid - Disinfectant, Bleaches, Oils
§ Gases is a state of mater that has no fixed shape and no fixed volume.
Examples are chlorine, hydrogen sulfide, ammonia, carbon monoxide, sulfur dioxide, phosgene, and
formaldehyde.
§ Fumes are heated solid particles suspended floating in the air (particles size of about 0.1 to 1
um). Examples are oxides generated from molten metal such as cadmium oxide, beryllium oxide,
etc. – welding, plasma and manual cutting.
§ Dust is made of fine particles of solid matter float in air (particle size of about 1 to 150 um).
Examples are silica, metal dusts and asbestos.

Types of work were workers may be exposed to chemical hazards

Painters are exposed to vapors from paints and thinners.
Welders are exposed to the welding fumes
Construction workers in road works are exposed to dusts

ASBESTOS
Brown asbestos or Amosite is the most commonly found Amphibole type of asbestos. More course
and stronger than Chrysotile fibers – Amosite was widely used in rigid boards such as asbestos
insulation boards (AIB). But is often used as part of mixture with Chrysotile. Brown Asbestos is also
found in cement sheets, pipe insulation, brake pads, and other roofing materials.
White Asbestos or the Chrysotile white asbestos is the most common type used throughout the world.
Having a hardness similar to a human fingernail. However, it is known to crumble very easily into
fibrous strands composed of smaller bundles of fibrils. Being exceptionally durable it was spun into
thread and woven into cloth. As well as, roofing products, insulation materials, cement, and brake
pads.
This mineral has a fibrous form (fiber like texture) and is also known as Blue Asbestos. Due to the
natural coloration of the fibers. Asbestos, being the name given to the collection of minerals grown
135 | P a g e


in a fibrous manner. Crocidolite has many useful properties. Which is why it is having such a wide
range of industrial applications. Because of these properties blue asbestos was commonly used as an
insulator. Such as pipe insulation, spray-on coatings, plastics, as well as cement products. Also found
in insulating boards, ceilings, tiles, and was even used to insulate steam engines.

Amosite or Brown Asbestos Chrysotile White Asbestos Crocidolite or Blue Asbestos

CONFINED SPACE GASES

• Oxygen Deficiency (O2)
• Hydrogen Sulfide (h2S)
• Carbon Monoxide (CO)
• Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

Carbon monoxide is a byproduct of burning gasoline, propane, wood, charcoal and other fuels.
Under the right circumstances, it can build up very quickly in rooms, basements and crawlspaces,
in semi-enclosed structures like garages and porches and in other types of enclosed and confined
spaces

Carbon Dioxide - Contaminated ground can cause toxic fumes inside sewers and manholes. Acidic
ground water acting on limestone creates carbon dioxide. Use of Co2 in starving the fire can
displace the O2 at the area

136 | P a g e


HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
-is a substance (solid, gas, vapor or liquid) with the potential to cause harm to life.
OSHS Rule 1090 specifically defined hazardous materials or substances as substances in solid,
liquid or gaseous forms known to constitute poison, fire, explosion or health hazard.
Hazardous materials include the following categories:
§ Flammable and Combustible material,
§ Toxic Materials,
§ Corrosive materials,
§ Oxidizer,
§ Aerosol,
§ Compressed gases and Physical hazards

“The correct recognition and careful evaluation of the hazards are extremely important and will
constitute the basis of appropriate control measures”

Multiple and varying definitions for the term “hazardous materials” can be found in different
federal and state regulations. OSHA does not define the term, “hazardous materials,” in its
Hazardous Materials standard, 29 CFR 1910 Subpart H, but rather refers to the following
products for which the storage, handling, and use are regulated under the standard:
- Compressed gases
- Acetylene
- Hydrogen
- Oxygen
- Nitrous oxide
- Flammable liquids
- Flammable materials used in spray finishing operations
- Explosive and blasting agents
- Liquefied petroleum gases
- Anhydrous ammonia
- Highly hazardous chemicals
- Hazardous waste and exposure to substances during hazardous waste
operations and emergency response
- Liquids used in dipping and coating operations

Source: https://www.hsa.ie/eng and OSHS Rule 1090

General Diagram of the Flow of Methods of Control

SOURCE AIR PATH RECEIVER

Objective in the control of hazardous substances

Prevent or minimize exposure of workers to harmful environmental hazards, which could
lead to serious occupational illnesses and diseases and even death.

Control of hazardous materials/ substances

Comprises various measures which aim to eliminate or reduce concentration levels of

137 | P a g e


airborne hazardous substances in the workplace.

Control At The Source

• Substitution with a less harmful material (water in place of organic solvent)
• Change of process (airless paint spraying)
• Enclosure of process (glove - box)
• Isolation of process (space or time)
• Wet methods (hydro blast)
• Local exhaust ventilation (capture at source)
• Adequate maintenance program

Control At The Path

• Housekeeping (Immediate Clean Up)
• General exhaust ventilation (roof fans)
• Dilution ventilation (supplied air)
• Increase distance between source & receiver (semi-automatic)
• Continuous monitoring (pre-set alarms)
• Local exhaust ventilation (capture at source)

Control At The Receiver

• Training and education
• Rotation of workers (split up dose)
• Enclosure of worker (air-conditioned crane cabs)
• Personal monitoring devices (dosimeters)
• Personal protective devices (respirators)
• Local exhaust ventilation (capture at source)

Principles of Operational Control

1. Adequate planning and design
2. Discontinuation of the process
3. Substitution of materials used
4. Modification of the process
5. Isolation or Shielding
6. Maintenance of equipment
7. Ventilation
8. PPE’s

Workplace procedures adopted to minimized injury, reduced adverse health effect and
control damage to plant and equipment. Controls are usually place from most effective as:
• Eliminating the Hazard
• Use of less hazardous Alternative
• Isolate and barricade and use of equipment with human less intervention
• Conduct of Training and create proper procedure or safe work standard

To least effective as Personal protective Equipment

138 | P a g e


In controlling the hazard, the source is given high priority of controls and putting additional
barrier along the path is also considered in order to proper the worker from exposure whom
in turn will be using the necessary PPE provided to them by employer.

The Steps in hazard control, program are:

1. Identify the hazards
2. Assess the Risk
3. Choose the best control for the hazards
4. Implement the chosen control
5. Evaluate the Effectiveness

In monitoring and Reviewing the hazard one must use:

• Physical Inspection of the area
• Conduct Testing
• Conduct exposure assessment through WEM
• Track and record all illnesses and injuries
• Conduct Medical or health surveillance
• Check accident/ incident records
• Ask the participant of the workers

OSHA’s seven steps for transitioning to safer chemicals.

1. Form a team to develop a plan.
2. Examine the current chemical use. This will help prioritize chemicals that need to be
phased out of the supply chain.
3. Identify safer alternatives to get a clear overview of your options.
4. Assess and compare alternatives by looking at hazards, cost and performance or
conduct an Alternatives Assessment.
5. Select a safer alternative based on the hazard, performance and cost evaluations, or the
result of the alternatives assessment.
6. Pilot the alternative to gain valuable information to help make informed decisions.
7. Implement the alternative and evaluate at full scale to monitor impacts and improve on
the process.

ENGINEERING CONTROL – Adequate Planning and Design Health and Safety aspects
should be included in the;
o Design stage of a process
o Selection of process equipment and materials
o Installation of equipment
o Construction of the plant

Discontinuation of the Process - The safest solution in the presence of highly

toxic carcinogenic chemicals. Substitution of Materials Used, Factors to be
considered:
o Technological and economic feasibility

139 | P a g e


o Availability of substitute materials

o Toxicological and safety aspects

Modification in the Process or Equipment

o Reduce contaminant generation
o Eliminate the formation of undesirable by-products
o Eliminate or minimize physical contact between workers and
hazardous substances
o Isolation or Shielding
a) Closed system – used for toxic chemicals
b) Enclosures – total or partial usually combined with local exhaust ventilation
c) Separating walls – if there are operations more hazardous than the others
d) Distance – hazardous operations performed at distant locations
e) Time – hazardous operations performed out of the regular working time

Maintenance of Equipment – A well maintained equipment and a well-

regulated process usually:
o Provide trouble-free operations
o Eliminate generation of hazardous contaminants

ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL
o Reduction of work periods
o Adjusting work schedules
o Employee information and training
o Job Rotation
o Education of supervisors
o Housekeeping and Maintenance

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

o Dust / Gas Respirators
o Aprons
o Safety Goggles/Spectacles
o Safety Shoes
o Face Shields
o Helmets
o Earplugs /Earmuffs
o Gloves

Respiratory Protective Equipment - should not be regarded as the first line of

defense or as a primary means to control hazards but rather as a supplement to
other types of measures

Types of Respirators
o Air-Purifying
o Air-Supplying
o Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)
o Re-breathers

140 | P a g e


Limitations of Respirators
Air Purifying
o Mechanical filter
o Does not provide O2
o Does not provide protection against vapor and gases
o Chemical cartridge
o Does not provide O2
o Cartridge has carbon, which absorb specific gases and vapors.
o Works until sorbent is used up

``Air Supplying- required in confined spaces where O2 is not enough

o Contaminant concentration is greater than cartridge capacity
o Where no cartridge is effective against contaminant

SCBA – requires separate training and renewal

o Cumbersome and heavy
o Restricts movement
o Use depends on limited supply of compressed air within

Re-breather – requires separate training and renewal

o Cumbersome and heavy
o Restricts movement
o Use depends on limited supply of sorbent material within
o Lasts shorter that SCBA

Criteria for Selection of Respirators

o Identification of contaminants
o Maximum possible concentration of contaminants in the work area
o Acceptability in terms of comfort
o Compatibility with the nature of job
o Proper fit to the face of user to prevent leakage

Use of Respirators
o Where temporary control measures are necessary before
engineering controls are installed
o Where engineering controls are not applicable
o Supplement engineering controls in reducing exposure during maintenance
and repair
o During emergencies

Routes of Entry into the body:

A. Skin Absorption (and Injection)
• Some substances (fuels and oils) can pass through the skin while others get into the
body via cuts and grazes

Health Effects of Chemicals

• skin acts as protective barrier
• local irritation
141 | P a g e


• absorption and vascular dissemination

• increase absorption with increased temperature and perspiration

B. Ingestion
§ This happens most often through swallowing contaminated food or drink
§ Some substances have a Workplace Exposure Limit (WEL). This defines an
exposure level that must not be exceeded. Information on the WEL for a
particular substance can be found on the safety datasheet that accompanies all
harmful substances. But not exceeding the WEL doesn’t guarantee health
protection – individual differences in human susceptibility make that
impossible.
§ See source link for more information:
https://www.hse.gov.uk/coshh/basics/exposurelimits.htm

C. Inhalation
§ Breathing in harmful gases and dusts (asbestos) means they can stay
in the lungs and cause a variety of diseases (asbestosis)

Most important route of industrial chemical exposure Determinants:

• concentration in the air
• duration of exposure
• amount of air inhaled

Remember:
• Some substances are more harmful than others
• Some will harm you quickly
• Some require large doses before they cause harm
• Some may take years of exposure before any effects are seen

General Health effects of Chemicals

• Disorientation
• Euphoria
• Light headedness
• Confusion
• Unconsciousness
• Headache
• Nausea, vomiting
• Paralysis, convulsion, death

142 | P a g e


Methods of Identifying Hazards:

1. Walk-through/ocular inspection – this is necessary in identifying the potential hazards and
determining the critical conditions in the workplace. It will be good to make a checklist for
inspection.
2. Review of the process involved – The identity of the chemical intermediates formed in the
course of an industrial process and the toxicological properties of these intermediates may
be difficult to establish. Undesirable chemical by-products such as carbon monoxide
resulting from the incomplete combustion of organic material may be formed.
3. Knowing the raw materials, by-products and finished products – Knowing about the
raw materials used and the nature of the products manufactured will help you determine the
specific contaminants to which workers are actually exposed. Possible impurities in raw
materials such as benzene in some solvents should be considered.
4. Gathering worker’s complaints – the actual chemicals or substances handled may be
determined by interviewing the workers. More so, their complaints can also be gathered and
assessed in the clinic record.
5. Safety Data Sheet (SDS) – is a summary of important health, safety and toxicological
information on the chemical or the mixture ingredients.

The SDS should conform to the Globally Harmonized System (GHS) of classification and labeling
of chemicals. The GHS is an international standard for classifying chemicals and communicating its
hazards. It is a basis for establishing a comprehensive national chemical safety program, and a
comprehensive approach to defining and classifying hazards and communicating information on
labels and safety data sheets.

The GHS was developed in Agenda 21 of the United Nations Conference in Environment and
Development (UNCED) held in Brazil in 1992.

In Brazil, (1992) an International mandate to harmonize New Chemical / Product Labeling was
adopted at the UN Conference and Development: “A globally-harmonized hazard classification and
compatible labeling system, including material safety data sheets and easily understandable symbols,
should be available, if feasible, by the year 2000.”

The International Hazard Communication Standard (HCS) mandates that chemical manufacturers
must communicate a chemical’s hazard information to chemical handlers by providing a Safety Data
Sheet. SDS's typically contain chemical properties, health and environmental hazards, protective
measures, as well as safety precautions for storing, handling, and transporting chemicals.

SDS Structure and Format

Safety data sheets have sixteen sections. The early sections, one through eight, focus on quick access
to essential information that might be required by chemical handlers for safe handling practices or by
emergency response personnel. Sections nine through eleven contain technical and scientific data,
e.g., stability, reactivity, physical & chemical properties. Sections twelve through fifteen are not
mandatory; however, they are required to be fully GHS compliant. The last section, section sixteen,
contains information about the SDS itself, e.g., the revision date and changes since the last version.

143 | P a g e



SDS Information for Employers

Employers must ensure that employees have access to safety data sheets for all the hazardous
chemicals they handle. Employers may fulfill this requirement in a variety of ways. For example,
SDS binders are quite common as are computer based SDS databases. What is important is that
employees have access to the safety data sheets for all the chemicals that they are using. If the
employer does not have an SDS for one of these chemicals, they should contact the manufacturer to
obtain the current version of the SDS for that chemical. In this sense, the online SDS databases have
a clear advantage over binder-based systems since the database vendor usually takes care of indexing
and updating the safety data sheets.

SOURCE:
https://www.spokaneenvironmental.com/
https://www.environmental-expert.com/
https://www.hse.gov.uk/vibration/wbv/index.htm
https://www.ccohs.ca/
IESNA Lighting Handbook. 9th ed. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, 2000. p. 10-13
https://oshc.dole.gov.ph/

Labels for materials with the chemical hazards are changing to a new Globally Harmonized System
(GHS) label format on or before June 1, 2015. GHS labels will have new standard pictograms, signal
words, hazard and precautionary statements, product identifier, and supplier information.

Types of physical hazards associated with hazardous materials:

• Oxidizer
• Flammable
• Explosion
• Corrosive to metal
• High-pressure systems

144 | P a g e



Types of health hazards associated with hazardous materials:

• Acute/chronic toxicity
• Skin corrosion or irritation
• Aspiration hazard
• Serious eye damage or eye
irritation
• Respiratory or skin sensitization
• Germ cell mutagenicity
• Carcinogenicity
• Reproductive toxicity
• Specific target organ toxicity

Safety Data Sheet (Global Harmonized System) – is the biodata of a chemical, it

contains:
1. Chemical Product / Company Details
2. Composition, Information on Ingredients
3. Hazards Identification
4. First Aid Measures
5. Fire Fighting Measures
6. Accidental Release Measures
7. Handling and Storage
8. Exposure Controls, Personal Protection
9. Physical and Chemical Properties
10. Stability and Reactivity
11. Toxicological Information
12. Ecological Information
13. Disposal Considerations
14. Transport Information
15. Regulatory Information
16. Other Information

BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS
- These can cause acute and chronic infections by entering the body either directly or through
breaks in the skin.
- Can originate from people, animals and plants

Characterized by 2 parameters:
1. Can reproduce
2. Are living creatures
They come in the form of:
• Bacteria
• Viruses
• Molds
• Fungi
• Parasites
• Plants

145 | P a g e



Occupations at risk:
• Industries that deals with plants or animals or their products
• Industries with food and processing
• Health care

They transfer communicable diseases like:

• Tuberculosis
• AIDS
• Hepatitis A, B, C, E
• Chicken pox
• URTI
• Sore eyes
• Sexually Transmitted diseases
• Skin Diseases
• Rabies
• Lice
• Snake Bite

Control of Biological Hazards:

• Engineering – Isolation rooms, Vaccination, medications
• Administrative – Reverse isolation, medical check-up, sick leave
• PPE – Mask, gloves, glasses

ERGONOMIC HAZARDS

Ergonomics is a technique that brings together several disciplines to solve problems arising from
work and the working environment.

• Cause pain and fatigue from various sources.

• Lead to low productivity and output (mental and physical performance)

The ILO defines ergonomics as “…The application of human biological science in conjunction with
the engineering sciences to achieve the optimum mutual adjustment of man, and his work, the benefits
being measured in terms of human efficiency and well-being.

146 | P a g e



The ergonomics approach goes beyond productivity, health, and safety. It includes consideration of
the total physiological and psychological demands of the job upon the worker. It deals with the
interaction between humans and traditional environmental elements as atmospheric contaminants,
heat, lights, sound, and all tools and equipment used in the workplace.

The human body can endure considerable discomfort and stress and can perform many awkward and
unnatural movements for a limited period of time. However, when awkward motions are continued
for prolonged periods, the physiological limitations of the worker can be exceeded. To ensure a
continued high level of performance, work systems must be tailored to human capacities and
limitations.

Ergonomic hazards can be seen in:

• Poor workplace design – cramped leg area, crowded worktable, distant work materials
• Awkward body postures – prolonged sitting, twisted body while bending
• Repetitive movements – sewing, cutting, stamping
• Static posture – prolonged standing without motion
• Forceful motion – extreme pulling and pushing
• Manual handling – improper carrying of materials, use of pliers

Examples of Ergonomic hazards in construction industry

In broad sense, the benefits that can be expected from designing work systems to minimize ergonomic
stress on workers are as follows:
• More efficient operation;
• Fewer Accidents;
• Lower cost of operations
• Reduced training time; and
• More effective use of personnel

147 | P a g e



Components of Ergonomics
1. Job
• the task needed to achieve a result
• governed by guidelines designed to prevent muscle overload
• requires learning, training and skill
2. Workstation
• Place of deployment
• Where duties are carried out
• Where equipment is located
• Machines are the tools
• 8 hours are spent
3. Tool
• Integral part of the man- machine system
• powerful, fast, tireless
• enables man to accomplish his job with reduced effort
• an extension of man’s body
• increases man’s strength and versatility
• enables him to handle other less-structured equipment
• reduces the risk of associated hazards

4. Man
• an integral part of the man-machine-system.
- intelligent, adaptive and versatile
• the basis of existence - survival

Source: https://www.osha.gov/ergonomics

Signs of ergonomic hazards:

• Wearing of wristbands
• Shoulder turning
• Arm stretching
• Absenteeism, increase clinic visit
• Intake of pain-relief medication

Risk Factors of the JOB/TASK:

1. Position
• Follow the ergos-nomos position (natural posture of the body)
• Less fatigue, less strain on tendons and ligaments
• Wrists straight (180°angle), Shoulders relaxed
• Back and neck as close to their natural alignment as possible
• Elbows near the side, bent at a 90°angle to reach the work.

2. Force
• Decrease the use of force, it strains muscle tendons;
• Use equipment that will reduce the force,
• Use tools that will do the work for you.

148 | P a g e



3. Frequency
§ Repetitive action of the same muscles – it tires the body and produces pain
§ It is more difficult to control frequency than position & force …
§ Therefore, it is more important to make it possible for employees to
work in the best position they can to reduce the force applied.

Control methods
• Engineering and Administrative Control
• PPE cannot be used to address ergonomic hazards.

Contamination of Work Environment

Effect to Human Health

149 | P a g e



Hazard Identification
§ Recognition of the different hazards can be accomplished by…
§ Walk-through survey/ocular inspection (supervisors, contractors)
§ Knowing your task
§ Reviewing process involved
§ Knowing the equipment and materials used
§ Gathering of worker’s complaints
§ Labels, SDS

Ways to Inform Workers of Chemical Hazards

§ Labelling of chemicals
§ SDS
§ Training

WORKPLACE ENVIRONMENTAL MEASUREMENT

Work Environment Measurement (WEM), is a branch of Industrial Hygiene aimed at evaluating
levels of workers’ exposures from various physical and chemical hazards emanating
from workplace operations and recommending appropriate control measures for the improvement of
the working environment.
Source: http://people360.com.ph/services/work-environment-measurement

GENERAL CONSIDERATION IN ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

WHERE to sample - Samples should be collected at or near the workers breathing zone or near the
vicinity of the source
WHEN to sample- Samples should be collected during each shift, pre- and post-shift. Frequency
can be single or repeated.
WHOM to sample - Sampling must be done to the most highly exposed employee with
consideration of the ventilation booths, the air supply index, open doors and windows, size and
shape of the work area
HOW MANY samples to take: it depends on the purpose of the sampling.
HOW LONG to sample - sampling usually takes a complete cycle of operation, however, for air
sampling, air-borne contaminants of toxic substances may vary from each shift due to:
• air currents within a room
• process variations
• change in work practice by an operator
• variation in emission rate of a contaminant

150 | P a g e



TYPE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

• Area/ environmental sampling - measurement of contaminant in the workroom, measuring
device is placed at a fixed location in the work area or adjacent to a worker workstation.
Example of instruments used to measure different hazards:
a. Sound level meter – noise
b. Anemometer – air movement
c. Lux meter – illumination
d. Smoke tester – air direction
e. Globe thermometer – The wet-bulb globe temperature (WBGT) is a type of apparent
temperature used to estimate the effect of temperature, humidity, wind speed (wind
chill), and visible and infrared radiation (usually sunlight) on humans. It is used by
industrial hygienists, athletes, sporting events and the military to determine
appropriate exposure levels to high temperatures.
f. Psychrometer – humidity

151 | P a g e



MODULE 12:
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Learning Objectives
At the end of the Presentation, participants will be able to:
• Explain the basic concept of occupational health
• Identify health effects of common hazards in construction work
• Identify ways to protect themselves from health hazards

THE STATISTICS – OCCUPATIONAL INJURIES AND DISEASES

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Occupational Health as defined (ILO / WHO) - “The promotion and maintenance of the highest
degree of physical, mental and social well-being of workers in all occupations by…
• PREVENTING workers from getting sick,
• PROTECTING workers from health risks,
• PLACING worker in tasks adapted to his ability.”

HEALTH HAZARDS
• Physical • Biological
§ Noise § Viruses
§ Vibrations § Bacteria
§ Radiations § Fungi
§ Defective or Inadequate Illumination § Parasites
§ Extreme temperatures § Insects

152 | P a g e



• Chemical • Ergonomics
§ Dust § Exhaustive physical exertions
§ Gases § Excessive standing
§ Vapors § Improper motions
§ Fumes § Lifting heavy loads
§ Mist § Job monotony
Example of Occupations Hazards
OCCUPATIONS HAZARDS

Carpenters Wood dust, heavy loads, repetitive motions

Electricians Heavy metals in solder fumes, asbestos dust, awkward positions

Painters Solvents, paints additives, toxic metals in pigments

Demolition Workers Asbestos, noise, lead, dust

Tile Setters Solvent from adhesives, awkward postures

Pipefitters, plumbers Lead fumes and particles, asbestos

Mason Cement, awkward postures, heavy loads

OCCUPATIONS HAZARDS
Drillers Noise, vibration, dust
Truck and Equipment Noise, Vibration, engine exhaust
Operators

Highway and Street Asphalt emissions, heat, engine exhaust

Construction Workers

Welders, solder Welding emissions, metal fumes, lead

PHYSICAL HAZARDS HEALTH EFFECTS AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

• Noise health effects and Preventive Measures
There are the physical and psychological health consequences of regular exposure to consistent
elevated sound levels. Noise from traffic, in particular, is considered by the World Health
Organization to be one of the worst environmental stressors for humans, second only to air
pollution.
Elevated workplace or environmental noise can cause hearing impairment,
tinnitus, hypertension, ischemic heart disease, annoyance, and sleep disturbance. Changes in
the immune system and birth defects have been also attributed to noise exposure.
153 | P a g e



Early Sign of Hearing Loss

§ Difficulty in understanding spoken words in a noisy environment
§ Need to be near or look at the person speaking to help understand words
§ Complaints that people do not speak clearly
§ Ringing noises in the ears (tinnitus)
Preventive Measure
Apart from wearing of hearing protection, an audiometry and otoscopic test can also be part of
the preventive program in hearing preservation.
Hearing Conservation Program must also be established
§ Conduct of Noise Assessment
§ Choose the appropriate hearing protection
§ Established Training on hearing and Noise
§ Measurement of Noise Exposure at the workplace
§ Audiometry Test and Calibration of equipment
§ Engineering Controls
• Heat Health Effect and preventive Measures
Worker exposed to Extreme can suffer heat related illnesses
Preventive Measures
§ Proper Hydration
§ Hydration test
§ Provide temporary facility at the area
§ Provide proper water refilling station at the work area
§ Wearing of light weight clothing and light-colored loose-fitting clothes
• Vibrations Health Effect and preventive Measures
The Control of Vibration at Work Regulations 2005 specify daily exposure levels at which
employers will be required to take action to control risks. These are known as Exposure Action
Values (EAVs). The regulations also set out Exposure Limit Values (ELVs). Where these are
reached, the employer must prevent further daily exposure.
For hand-arm vibration (HAV), the daily ELV is 5 m/s2 A (8) and the daily EAV is 2.5 m/s2 A
(8).
For whole-body vibration (WBV), the daily ELV is 1.15 m/s2 A (8) and the daily EAV is 0.5
m/s2 A (8).
The exposure action value (EAV) is a daily amount of vibration exposure above which employers
are required to take action to control exposure. The greater the exposure level, the greater the risk
and the more action employers will need to take to reduce the risk. For hand-arm vibration the
EAV is a daily exposure of 2.5 m/s2 A (8).

154 | P a g e



• Radiations Health Effect and preventive Measures

Type Source Health Effect

Ionizing X-rays Cancer, congenital defects, death

Non- Ultraviolet, Skin redness, Premature Skin Ageing, and skin cancer,
Ionizing Infrared, Laser, Corneal and conjunctival burns,
Microwaves
Retinal injury, and
Cataract

Preventive measures:
§ When using ionizing radiation:
1. Less time
2. Greater distance
3. Proper Shielding
4. Use of required Safety Devices
§ Use of Local Exhaust Ventilation
§ Wear of appropriate PPE when working with arc and rays

CHEMICAL HAZARDS, HEALTH EFFECTS AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Source/ Exposure Route of Entry Health Effects

Lead Exposure Inhalation Anaemia

Welders Ingestion Kidney Damage
Solderer Miscarriages/infertility
Demolition Workers Central nervous systems effects (irritability,
Painters memory loss, convulsions, psychiatric disturbance
Symptoms of fatigue, difficulty in concentration,
headache
Organic Solvent Inhalation of Narcosis (depresses the normal function of CNS)
Paints vapours Headache, dizziness, drunken feeling,
Varnishes Skin absorption disorientation, confusion, loss of consciousness,
Adhesives short term memory
Preservation agents Reproductive: Infertility
Liver: Cirrhosis, Cancer
Respiratory: Pulmonary Edema
Kidney: Glomerulonephritis
Skin Effects: Irritative effects

155 | P a g e



Dust: Cement Inhalation WET POWDER

Cement Mfg. Skin Absorption Skin - irritation
Construction Eyes – abrasion, irritation
DRY POWDER
Eyes – irritation
Respiratory Tract – irritation, small airway
disease, pneumoconiosis (accumulation of dust in
lungs)

Source/ Exposure Route of Entry Health Effects

Dust: Silica Inhalation Pneumoconiosis (silicosis)

Crushing granite Increased risk of lung cancer Pleural effusion
Sand blasting Tuberculosis
Bronchitis
Emphysema
Dust: Asbestos Inhalation of Asbestosis
Fire /Heat proofing and airborne fibres Lung Cancer
insulation Bronchitis
Emphysema
Mesothelioma (a malignant growth in the
pleural lining of the lung)

Preventive Measure
• Use of Less hazardous Chemicals
• Use of Local Exhaust Ventilation
• Wetting Method if necessary
• Use of SDS to identify the proper handling, and use of chemicals
• Training of Proper use of chemicals
• Provide of adequate Personal Protective Equipment

BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS, HEALTH EFFECTS AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Anything of biological nature – has potential to cause harm to human – viruses, bacteria, fungi,
parasites
• Tuberculosis
§ Chronic bacterial infection
§ Caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis (tubercle bacilli)
§ Damages the lungs and other body parts
§ Fatal if not treated properly

156 | P a g e



Tuberculosis: Spreading the Infection

When a person with contagious TB disease coughs, sings, sneezes, or laughs, TB germs can be forced
from the lungs into the air
Another person MAY breathe in the germs
If the germs make it into the lungs and are not killed by the body’s immune system, the person
becomes “infected”
May take many months from the time the infection initially gets into the lungs until symptoms
develop. The usual symptoms that occur with an active TB infection are:
§ a generalized tiredness or weakness,
§ weight loss,
§ fever, and
§ night sweats.
If the infection in the lung worsens, then further serious symptoms can include:
§ coughing,
§ chest pain,
§ coughing up of sputum (material from the lungs) and/or blood (hemoptysis), and
§ shortness of breath.
If the infection spreads beyond the lungs, the symptoms will depend upon the organs involved.

Top 10 Causes of Deaths in the Philippines 2017

157 | P a g e



Treatment:
• Government program in managing Tuberculosis at work - Directly Observed Therapy Short
Course (DOTS)
• Tetanus
§ An acute, often fatal disease characterized by spasmodic contraction of voluntary muscles,
especially those of the neck and jaw.
§ Caused by the toxin of the bacillus Clostridium tetani.
§ Typically infects the body through a contaminated wound.

Clinical Manifestations
§ Lockjaw
§ Sustained contraction of the facial and back muscles

Prevention
§ Active immunization with tetanus toxoid
§ Careful wound management
• Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV)
§ HIV is the virus which causes Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS).
§ AIDS is a serious and usually fatal condition in which the body’s immune system is severely
weakened and cannot fight off infection
§ Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) is a chronic, potentially life-threatening
condition caused by the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV).

Body Fluids with High Viral Load

§ Blood
§ Semen
§ Vaginal and cervical mucus
§ Breastmilk
§ Amniotic fluid
§ Cerebrospinal fluid

HIV Transmission
§ During unprotected sex
§ Through transfusions of contaminated blood or blood products
§ Puncturing of the skin by needle or sharps infected with HIV
§ From an HIV positive mother to her baby

158 | P a g e



How Can I prevent transmission of HIV?

§ Abstinence
§ Be Faithful to uninfected partner
§ Condom use or safer sex
§ Do not inject prohibited drugs
§ Education & ensure that blood is screened for HIV
• Ergonomics
“The science of fitting jobs to the people who work in them”
Goal:
Reduce musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs) in workers when major part of the jobs involves

Ergonomics Risk Factor

§ Force
§ Repetition
§ Awkward Posture
§ Contact Stresses
§ Vibration
Work in which improper posture is maintained
§ Prolonged reaching/ shoulder elevation work
§ Bending
§ Twisting
§ Kneeling/squatting
§ Work requiring abnormal amounts of hand strength
§ Lifting hollow block
§ Trimming tree branches
§ Weight-lifting Work
§ Lifting of Boxes
§ Removing manhole cover
§ Reaching/ handling tires

Health Effects: Musculoskeletal Disorders (MSDs)

“injuries and illnesses that affect muscles, nerves, tendons, ligaments, joints or spinal discs”

Common Symptoms of MSDs

§ Painful joints
§ Pain, tingling, numbness in hands, wrists, forearms, shoulders, knees and feet
159 | P a g e



§ Shooting or stubbing pains

§ Swelling or inflammation
§ Low back pain
§ Neck/shoulder pain
§ Stiffness
Musculoskeletal Disorder (MSD)
Loss of sensation, stiffness, pains and cramps. It could also occur when overexerting

Preventive Measures
§ Redesign workstation
§ Light Stretching
§ Take short breaks
§ Do not keep the same posture for over 30 minutes

• Smoking at Work
§ Fires and explosions
§ Accidents
§ Tensions between smokers and non-smokers

Risk of Smoking

What is your choice?

Either you Quit Smoking or minimized your smoking
To minimize your cravings
§ Taking sweets like candy in replace with the craving to cigarette
§ Counselling and when
160 | P a g e



§ Take a walk, and exercise

§ Meditate or try to calm yourself
§ Drink plenty of water

Impact of Alcohol to Health

Alcohol may cause or make worse:
§ Liver damage
§ Stomach ailments
§ Heart disease
§ Certain forms of cancer
§ Irreversible brain damage

Drug Abuse in the Philippines

Impact of Drugs at work

§ A negative impact on physical health
§ A negative impact on mental health
§ A negative impact on safety
§ A negative impact on productivity

On Physical health:
§ Elevated heart rate and blood pressure
§ Respiratory failure
§ Convulsions
§ Cardiovascular problems including strokes and heart attacks
§ Certain forms of cancer

161 | P a g e



§ Liver or kidney impairment

§ HIV/AIDS

On Mental Health
§ Altered perceptions and emotions
§ Changes in personality
§ Decreased social inhibitions
§ Paranoia
§ Anxiety
§ Irritability
§ Depression

The Impact of Drugs

On Safety:
§ Distorted vision, hearing, and coordination
§ Loss of concentration and coordination
§ Sleepiness
§ Decreased awareness of touch and pain.

On Productivity:
§ Increase health care costs
§ Increase the number of accidents
§ Increase absenteeism
§ Result in poor work relations
§ Impair performance
§ Increase replacement costs

Therefore, the Use of Drugs at Work Can Result in:

§ Increased costs
§ Decreased outputs

Which result in:

§ A lack of competitiveness
§ Lower enterprise viability

162 | P a g e



Lifestyle habits to prevent the occupational diseases:

§ Observe personal hygiene
§ Exercise
§ Proper Diet
§ Enough sleep
§ Smoking Cessation
§ Proper Hydration

SOURCE:
Occupational Safety and Health Centre
https://www.up.edu.ph/

MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE

Monitoring
• Systematic continuous, repetitive health-related activities that should lead to corrective action
• Types of Monitoring:
• Ambient/environmental – Work Environment Monitoring
• Biological – blood, urine
• Medical surveillance
• Pre-employment (Entrance)
• Periodic examinations
• Special examinations
• Transfer examinations
• Separation examinations

Purpose of Medical Surveillance

Primary
• prevention of illness (Aims of Occupational Health – WHO, ILO)
Secondary
• early detection of work-related health problems and determining its cause

163 | P a g e



Monitoring Strategies

Monitoring
• Surveillance in Surveillance in occupational health practice covers periodic, systematic and
continuous hazard assessment and medical examination.
• Surveillance data will provide trends or emerging patterns in workplace hazards and illnesses.
• Surveillance has to be followed by preventive action (appropriate control measures) and evaluation
of the effectiveness of intervention.
• Surveillance is conducted to meet regulatory requirements.

164 | P a g e



Why do we conduct Medical Surveillance?

Worker populations are not homogenous
Certain members will be particularly vulnerable or at greater risk than others. (individual
susceptibility)
Hazard level within safe or acceptable limits do not guarantee that workers will not be affected.

• Monitoring of certain high-risk groups:

• Workers new to a hazardous job
• Workers returning after injury or illness
• Workers with concurrent conditions or illness which can be adversely affected by
workplace hazards
• Workers exposed to very hazardous substances or work processes
• When diseases in question are associated with particular exposure or industry
• Mandated by DOLE

What determines workers health?

Steps in Surveillance of Occupational Diseases

Step 1 Hazard and exposure assessment
• Types of substances
• Process involved
• Exposure pathways
• Exposed population
• Estimate intensity, frequency, and duration of exposure to toxic agent

165 | P a g e



Step 2 Identification of adverse health outcomes for each hazard

Step 3 Selection of Medical Screening Tests

166 | P a g e



Biological Monitoring – Selected Substances

167 | P a g e



Step 4 Interpretation of Data and Recommendation

Step 5 Communication of Results

• Feedback of group results
• Ensure medical confidentiality
• use codes instead of actual names of the employees

Communication to the Health and Safety Committee

• Facilities continuous review of preventive programs
• Provides a mechanism for continously improving health and safety performance
• Occupational Health Policies and Programs based on the results (e.g. top illnesses of the company)

Step 6 Recordkeeping
• Medical recordkeeping
• Test results, interpretation, record of notifications, AMR
• Exposure evaluations
• WEM, Biological monitoring
• Resulting environmental modifications
• Control measures implemented
• Requirements, procedures, and interpretation of findings for health surveillance as specified by
national legislation (e.g. TLVs)

168 | P a g e



DOLE/BWC/HSD/OH-47-A (AMR)

• Medical History of workers

• personal illnesses
• family health problems
• reproductive history
• lifestyle (e.g. smoking, drug use, etc.)

• Occupational History
• descriptions of all jobs held
• work exposures
• symptoms or illnesses at previous jobs
• personal protective equipment used

• Physical Examination
• complete system review
• cardiovascular, pulmonary and musculoskeletal
• eyes, ears, nasopharynx and abdomen
• evaluation of susceptibility (obesity, smoking) to exposures and physical problems
(heat stress, noise)

169 | P a g e



Step 6 Evaluation of Control Measures

170 | P a g e



Clear Points:
• The purpose of medical surveillance in occupational health is prevention of illness.
• When illness arises from a particular exposure, medical surveillance is necessary.
• There are various health effects for every health hazards present in my workplace.
• We can refer to Safety Data Sheet on the health effects of chemicals used in my workplace.
• Medical surveillance and biological monitoring are strategies done to check for any
abnormalities in the body at physiological and cellular levels.
• Medical surveillance has to be followed by preventive action and evaluation of the effectiveness
of intervention.

SOURCE:
Occupational Safety and Health Centre
Department of Labor and Employment
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health

171 | P a g e



MODULE 13:
COVID 19 PREVENTIVE MEASURES
(DTI and DOLE Interim Guidelines on Workplace Prevention and Control of COVID-19 and
its Supplemental Guidelines)

WHAT IS COVID 19?

• Coronaviruses are a large family of viruses known to cause illness ranging from common cold to
more severe diseases such as Middle East Respiratory Syndrome (MERS) and Sever Acute
Respiratory Syndrome (SARS)

• A novel or new coronavirus is called nCoV

• Coronaviruses also cause disease in a wide variety of animal species.

• SARS-CoV was transmitted from civet cats to humans in China in 2002 and MERS-CoV from
dromedary camels to human in Saudi Arabia

• Several known coronaviruses are circulating in animals that have not yet infected humans

• A spillover event is when a virus that are circulating in an animal species is found to have been
transmitted to human(s)

• This novel Coronavirus or CoViD-19 was first discovered in China in late 2019 and was known
to spread all over the world. The origin on this virus is yet unknown.

THE PEOPLE AT RISK FOR INFECTION FROM NCOV

• People in close contact with animals (i.e., live animal market workers)

• Family members or healthcare workers who are caring for a person infected by a new coronavirus

THE SIGN AND SYMPTOMS

Infection with SARS-CoV-2, the virus that causes COVID-19, can cause illness ranging from mild
to severe and, in some cases, can be fatal. Symptoms typically include fever, cough, and shortness of
breath. Some people infected with the virus have reported experiencing other non-respiratory
symptoms. Other people, referred to as asymptomatic cases, have experienced no symptoms at all.

According to the CDC, symptoms of COVID-19 may appear in as few as 2 days or as long as 14 days
after exposure.

MODE OF TRANSMISSION
Although the first human cases of COVID-19 likely resulted from exposure to infected animals,
infected people can spread SARS-CoV-2 to other people. The virus is thought to spread mainly from
person to-person, including:
172 | P a g e



• Between people who are in close contact with one another (within about 6 feet) for prolonged
period of time such as when caring for, living with, visiting, or sharing a health care waiting area
or room with a person with the new corona virus

• Through respiratory droplets produced when an infected person coughs or sneezes. These
droplets can land in the mouths or noses of people who are nearby or possibly be inhaled into the
lungs.

• It may be possible that a person can get COVID-19 by touching a surface or object that has
SARS-CoV-2 on it and then touching their own mouth, nose, or possibly their eyes, but this is
not thought to be the primary way the virus spreads.

People are thought to be most contagious when they are most symptomatic (i.e., experiencing fever,
cough, and/or shortness of breath). Some spread might be possible before people show symptoms;
there have been reports of this type of asymptomatic transmission with this new coronavirus, but this
is also not thought to be the main way the virus spreads.

VULNERABLE GROUP
AS per CDC, COVID-19 is a new disease and there is limited information regarding risk factors for
severe disease. Based on currently available information and clinical expertise, older adults and
people of any age who have serious underlying medical conditions might be at higher risk for
severe illness from COVID-19.

Based on what we know now, those at high-risk for severe illness from COVID-19 are:

• People 65 years and older

• People who live in a nursing home or long-term care facility

• People of all ages with underlying medical conditions, particularly if not well controlled,
including:

• People with chronic lung disease or moderate to severe asthma

• People who have serious heart conditions

• People who are immunocompromised

Many conditions can cause a person to be immunocompromised, including cancer treatment,

smoking, bone marrow or organ transplantation, immune deficiencies, poorly controlled HIV or
AIDS, and prolonged use of corticosteroids and other immune weakening medications

• People with severe obesity (body mass index [BMI] of 40 or higher)

• People with diabetes

• People with chronic kidney disease undergoing dialysis

• People with liver disease

173 | P a g e



DTI AND DOLE INTERIM GUIDELINES ON WORKPLACE PREVENTION AND

CONTROL OF COVID-19

Objective
DOLE issued the guidelines to assist private institutions that are allowed to operate during the
Enhanced Community Quarantine (ECQ) and General Community Quarantine (GCQ), in developing
the minimum health protocols and standards in light of the COVID-19 pandemic.

DEFINITION
• Pursuant to DOH AO 2020-0013: 1. Shift from classifying individuals as Patients Under
Investigation (PUI) and Persons Under Monitoring (PUM) to using case definitions to classify
cases into Suspect, Probable, and Confirmed COVID-19 cases. 2. Establish a standard for and
system of case detection, investigation, laboratory confirmation, and notification.

On January 28, the Philippines started classifying coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19) cases as
either Patients under Investigation (PUIs) or Persons under Monitoring (PUMs). However, due to
apparent local or community transmission of the virus and the surge in cases, the Department of
Health (DOH) has decided to shift from classifying individuals as PUIs or PUMs to using case
definitions following guidelines from the World Health Organization (WHO).

PUM
Person who may have been exposed to the virus but shows no symptoms — is no longer included in
the new classification, as residents are assumed to have been exposed due to local transmission.

PUI (MILD, SEVERE OR CRITICAL)

Person who was not tested or awaiting test results is now classified as Suspect, while a PUI (mild,
severe or critical) with inconclusive test results is considered a Probable case. A COVID Positive
case is now referred to as Confirmed.

SUSPECT CASE
A. Individuals with influenza-like illness (ILI). Symptoms include fever of at least 38°C and cough
or sore throat, AND either of the following: (i) a history of travel to or residence in an area that
reported local transmission of COVID-19 during the 14 days prior to symptom onset, OR (ii) with
contact to a confirmed or probable case of COVID-19 during the 14 days prior to symptom onset.

B. Individuals with sudden respiratory infection and severe symptoms such as shortness of breath,
difficulty of breathing or severe pneumonia with unknown cause, and requires hospitalization

C. Individuals with fever or cough or shortness of breath or other respiratory signs or symptoms and
under any of the following conditions: (i) aged 60 years and above, (ii) with a comorbidity, (iii)
assessed as having high-risk pregnancy, or (iv) a health worker.

PROBABLE CASE
A. Suspect case whom testing for COVID-19 is inconclusive

B. Suspect case who tested positive for COVID-19 but whose test was not conducted in a national
or subnational reference laboratory, or an officially accredited laboratory

174 | P a g e



CONFIRMED CASE
Any individual who was laboratory-confirmed for COVID-19 through RT-PCR in a national or
subnational reference laboratory, or a DOH-certified laboratory testing facility

CONTACT TRACING
Criteria for Close Contact Tracing

• Without full PPE on any of the following:

• less than 1 meter interaction
• more than 15 minutes interaction
• living with the same household
• OF A DOCUMENTED RT-PCR COVID 19 POSITIVE PATIENT
Note: Rapid Antibody Test is never endorsed nor it is included by the WHO, DOH and Unified
Medical Societies as a critera for clinical decision and return to work

CONTACT TRACING
Rapid Antibody Test (RATs) i
• not endorsed on any medical or government guidelines
• not endorsed by any medical society and DOH expects it would no longer be used after MECQ
• there is a unified approach among medical groups recommending complete eradication of rapid
antibody test in the Philippines
RT-PCR testing – remains to be the gold standard in COVID 19
RT-PCR pool testing – newly developed screening tool for COVID 19

CLEARANCE
Pursuant to DOH AO 2020-0220
Clearance from COVID 19 does not require a repeat swab test. Final clearance can be provided, and
it is certified by a licensed medical doctor and it is not depended on COVID 19 test.
A license medical doctor’s clinical assessment and judgement supersedes any test.

DISINFECTION
• If the area where the suspect case is working is enclosed, only that are would be disinfected.
• If the area where the suspect case is open, extend the area of disinfection up to two meters from
his working position using 1:100 sodium hypochlorite solution, wall to wall surface disinfection,
workers assigned to disinfect that area would wear full prescribed PPE. After 24 hours from
disinfection, that area can be used again for work.
• Misting and foot disinfection was never endorsed
• Periodic disinfection of surfaces every 2 hours
• Artificial UV light still has pending studies
• Sunlight UV light kills SarsCov2 virus in seconds
175 | P a g e



EXPERIMENTAL TREATMENT
Medications and supplements with presumptive positive evidence/promising positive results against
Covid 19:
• Azithromycin
• Melatonin
• Virgin Coconut Oil
• Vitamin C
• Vitamin D
• Vitamin E
• Prednisone/Dexamethasone
•
VACCINE
Major countries are on the race to develop a Covid 19 vaccine, there are companies now on Stage 3.

176 | P a g e



DTI AND DOLE SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDELINES ON WORKPLACE

PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF COVID-19

WORKPLACE SAFETY AND HEALTH

Employers are required to implement all necessary workplace safety and health programs, including
the following COVID-related programs, at no cost to the employees?
A. Increasing Physical and Mental Resilience

1. Employers shall provide their employees with psychosocial support, especially those
presenting mental health concerns.

2. Employers shall likewise promote work-life balance, especially in these trying times through
proper scheduling of activities and workforce rotation.

3. Company policies on prevention and control of COVID-19 should be aligned with the
existing minimum public health standards and guidelines issued by the DOH and other
regulatory agencies.

B. Reduced transmission of COVID-19

The following are the minimum public health standards to be complied with in all workplaces:

a) Masks
i. Face masks must be worn at all times.
ii. Medical grade masks are highly encouraged and should be properly disposed of after use.
iii. Masks with vents should not be used.
iv. Cloth masks, with additional filter such as tissue paper or similar material, may be used
as long as they are clean and washed daily. The filter should be changed daily or after
every sneezing or coughing episode, and should be properly disposed of after use. Hands
should be washed/disinfected before replacing the filters.
v. Frequent mask handling and manipulation should be avoided.
b) Face shields
i. Face shields shall cover the entire face (completely cover the sides and length of the face).
If possible, face shields should extend to the ears and below the chin.
ii. Visor-type and masks should always be worn together when interacting with colleagues,
clients and/or visitors.
iii. Face shields may be removed according to the demands of the work or when the
occupational safety and health of the employees so requires.
c) Physical Distancing
i. Physical distancing of at least one (1) meter or two (2) meters when possible, shall be
observed at all times. This must be practiced in combinations with the wearing of masks
and face shields.
d) Frequent Disinfection
i. Frequent handwashing with soap and water or the application of alcohol-based
disinfectants shall be mandatory in all workplaces and is encouraged to be practiced at
home.
ii. The following disinfecting/washing resources, supplies/materials should be made
available to employees and clients/visitors:
a. hand washing stations
b. soap and sanitizers
c. hand drying equipment or supplies (e.g. single use paper towel)
177 | P a g e



iii. Display of signages/visual cues and reminders to practice proper handwashing and other
hygiene behaviors among employees is mandatory. These include:
a. Hand washing with soap and water, or use of hand disinfectants with alcohol-
based sanitizers specifically, but not limited to, the following instances:
i. After using the bathroom
ii. Before and after taking off their face mask and/or face shield
iii. After touching frequently-touched surfaces and objects (e.g. stair railings,
elevator controls, door knobs)
iv. Before and after touching their face
b. Advising employees to conduct surface disinfection in their work stations before
the start of the shift, intermittently during shift and at the end of the shift.
c. Discouraging sharing of personal items between employees to prevent possible
transmission
d. Advising
i. Before and after handling food or eating

SHUTTLE SERVICES
• Should be consistent with IATF Resolution 69:
• Large private establishments with total assets above P 100,000,000 located inside special
economic zones or other areas under Investment are REQUIRED to provide shuttle services to
their employees. In case, they cannot financially sustain this provision, they can adopt alternative
work arrangements, vouchers for TNVS, cost sharing or other alternative arrangements
• Employers may contract the services of public utility vehicles to subsidize public transport
operations.
•
MOST AT RISK EMPLOYEES (MARP) AND 18-21 YEARS OF AGE
Maybe allowed to work for 8 hours provided they are certified to be fit to work by an OH physician
and or government physician WITH OH TRAINING UNDER RULE 1967 OF
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS
Still, whenever applicable and possible, they are still advised to have work from home arrangement.

DESIGNATION OF ISOLATION AREA

• Isolation a rea of 1 room every 200 employees shall be based on the average number of employees
actually reporting to work per shift.
• Isolation areas maybe outside of establishments provided that they are within control of the
employer, the facility is readily available when necessary and a temporary holding facility is setup
within the immediate vicinity of the workplace/building.
• Establishments may also make arrangements with nearby treatment and monitoring facilities or
Barangay Local Government Unit.

CLOSURE AND DISINFECTION OF WORKPLACES

• Companies are encouraged to establish their company policies on temporary closure, disinfection
and contact tracing. Proactive disinfection is strongly encouraged.
• Granular lockdown may be allowed provided that a company policy/OSH program ensures safe
entry of employees.

178 | P a g e



• Shorter lockdown period is allowed provided that the safety of employees is ensured under
company policy/OSH program and a certificate of return to work from specialists is secured.
• AC units may be set according to nature of operations. Malls and shopping centers may set it at 24
degrees centigrade.
• The bottomline is that the OSH committee of the company especially the OH team analyzes the
situation based on company processes and needs and decides on what to do.
• DOLE DTI recognizes that the OSH committee of each company knows the company more than
anyone and hence they should decide on what to do based on company processes.

ASSISTANCE AND REPORTING

DTI and DOLE shall extend assistance and technical support to all workplaces, employers and
workers in complying with the Guidelines.
The employer shall provide the DOLE through its Regional Office, copy furnished the DOH, monthly
reporting of illness, diseases and injuries utilizing the DOLE Work Accident/Illness Report Form
(WAIR).

REDUCE CONTACT
1. Most-at-risk population (MARP) for COVID-19 in the workplace (e.g. senior citizens, pregnant
women, individuals with underlying health conditions) and those below 21 years old, shall continue
to observe work-from-home arrangements. When needed to occasionally report to work, they may be
allowed to, provided a certificate of fit to work is secured from the OSH personnel and must stay in
the workplace only for a specified number of hours. They shall limit physical contact inside the
premises.
2. Restriction of mass gatherings:
a. Depending on the risk classification of the workplace locality, as defined by IATF’s risk
severity grading, Employers shall follow the restriction on mass gatherings, (i.e only 10% of
seating capacity for meeting rooms in high/moderate-risk areas (e.g. confined spaces) and a
maximum of 50% seating capacity for low-risk areas (e.g. open areas)).
b. Videoconferencing shall always be used for meetings needing large attendance of
employees and/or for meetings lasting longer than 15 minutes.
c. The safety officer, which refers to any employee or officer of the company trained by the
DOLE and tasked by the employer to implement an occupational safety and health program,
and ensure that it is in accordance with the provisions of OSH standards, will determine the
maximum number of employees allowed to stay at any given time in areas where they usually
converge during breaks, or before/after work shifts (e.g. canteens, locker rooms, changing
rooms, lounges, rest rooms or comfort rooms). The safety officer shall ensure that minimum
public health standards are followed at all times.
3. Employers shall adopt staggered meal schedules to further restrict contact among its employees.
Eating alone in the workstation is highly encouraged. Dining in canteens may be allowed provided
that employees shall strictly comply with the physical distancing of at least one (1) meter and shall
be prohibited from talking with each other. Employers are required to provide signages, physical
barriers, and such other means to ensure compliance with these protocols.
To ensure compliance with the physical distancing requirements, employers may set up makeshift
dining areas to complement canteens in the workplace.
a. Masks should be immediately worn after eating.

179 | P a g e



b. Use of communal items such as, but not limited to, dipping sauces and condiments, utensil
dispensers, and straw dispensers shall be prohibited.
c. Serving of buffet meals and other similar set-ups shall be prohibited.
4. Employers shall, as much as practicable, minimize the duration of customer transactions to less
than 15 minutes.

REDUCE DURATION OF INFECTION

1. Detection.
All employees, upon entering the building premises/workplaces, shall be required to accomplish the
Health Declaration Form, or any digital iteration thereof. The security staff or other responsible
personnel shall immediately screen the accomplished form and perform a temperature check.
a. If “Yes” to any item is answered or if with a T> 37.5 degrees Celsius, the employee shall
be denied entry and referred to the workplace isolation area for further evaluation by the
Safety Officer.
b. If “No” to all items are answered and temperature is <37.5 degrees Celsius, the employee
shall be permitted entry.
c. The security staff or other responsible personnel on duty shall immediately give the
accomplished health declaration form to the company Human Resources (HR) for appropriate
action and storage.
d. Should an online health declaration form be used, the form should be electronically
submitted to HR.
e. The Health Declaration Form shall be handled and processed in accordance with the Data
Privacy Act and related issuances to ensure that –
i. Data collected should only include such necessary data proportional to the purpose
of contract tracing;
ii. The processing of personal data shall be transparent and that the data subjects shall
be apprised of the reasons for such collection;
iii. Reasonable and appropriate security measures and safeguards shall be
implemented to protect the personal data collected;
iv. The personal data collected shall be considered highly confidential; and
v. The personal data shall be stored only for a limited period and shall be disposed of
properly after thirty (30) days from date of accomplishment.
2. Employers shall direct symptomatic individuals through appropriate health system entry points
such as the primary care facility (e.g. Barangay Health Center, Infirmaries, Private Clinics / hospitals)
or telehealth consultation. Referral networks shall be established.
3. Employers may contact the DOH through its hotline 1555 for guidance on the handling and
referring symptomatic employees.

OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH COMMITTEES (OSH COMMITTEES)

A. Employers shall establish OSH Committees in accordance with Republic Act No. 11058, its IRR,
and DOLE Department Order No. 198, Series of 2018 which took effect on 25 January 2019.

180 | P a g e



B. The OSH Committee and/or safety officer of the workplace shall oversee enforcement and
monitoring of the minimum public health standards for COVID-19 prevention in the workplace and
this JMC.
C. Monitoring by the OSH Committees shall include evaluation and analysis of the company’s
implementation of the minimum health standards and protocols to immediately address the spread of
COVID-19 in the workplace, if any, and recommend and implement appropriate preventive measures.
Health surveillance may be conducted to determine the cause/s of the spread/transmission of the virus
in the workplace.
D. For 2 or more private establishments housed under the same building, a joint OSH Committee
shall also be established in accordance with DOLE Department Order No. 198, Series of 2018. They
may share resources for a successful implementation of a comprehensive OSH Program, including a
COVID-19 Prevention and Control Program.

SAMPLE PROTOCOL FOR SCREENING EMPLOYEES AND VISITORS

181 | P a g e



HEALTH CHECKLIST

SOURCE:
https://www.dole.gov.ph/news/dti-and-dole-interim-guidelines-on-workplace-prevention-and-control-of-covid-19/

182 | P a g e



MODULE 14:
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
Participants shall be able to identify and familiarized with:
• PPE General Requirements
• Proper donning, use, inspection, storage, and disposal of PPE

THE STATISTICS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - RULE 1080 OF OSHS

• Protective equipment, including personal protective equipment for:
§ Eyes,
§ Face,
§ Head, and extremities,
§ Protective clothing,
§ Respiratory devices, and
§ Protective shields and barriers,
• Shall be provided, used, and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition wherever it is
necessary by reason of hazards of processes or environment
• Employer to provide PPE free of charge to all workers.
• Any Deduction for the loss or damage of personal protective equipment shall be governed by
Book 3 of LCP.

183 | P a g e



• All personal protective equipment shall be of the approved design and construction appropriate
for the exposure and the work to be performed.
• The employer shall be responsible for the adequacy and proper maintenance of personal
protective equipment used in his workplace.
• No person shall be subjected or exposed to a hazardous environmental condition without
protection
• Hazards of processes or environment include:
§ Chemical hazards,
§ Radiological hazards, or
§ Mechanical irritants
• Encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or impairment in the function of any part of
the body through absorption, inhalation or physical contact.

HAZARD ASSESSMENT
Assess workplace to determine if hazards are likely to necessitate the use of personal protective
equipment (PPE)
If hazards are present the employer shall:
• Select and have each affected employee use appropriate PPE for identified hazards
• Communicate selection decisions
• Select PPE that fits each employee

TRAINING
• Employer must train employees before issuing PPE in at least these things:
§ When PPE is necessary
§ What PPE is necessary
§ How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE
§ Limitations of the PPE
§ Proper care, maintenance, useful life and disposal of the PPE
• Workers must demonstrate an understanding of the training and the ability to use PPE properly
before being allowed to perform work requiring the use of PPE
• Written certification, to verify that each employee has received and understood the required
training, contains:
§ Name of each employee trained
§ Date(s) of training
§ Subject of the certification
• Retraining necessary for employees without required understanding and skill:
§ Changes in the workplace
§ Changes in PPE used

184 | P a g e



§ Inadequate knowledge or use of PPE

TYPES OF PPE
A. OSHS Rule 1082: Eye and Face Protection
• Eyes and face protective equipment shall be required where there is reasonable probability of
exposure to such hazards.
• In such cases, the employer shall furnish a type of protective equipment suitable for the work
to be performed and the employees shall use such equipment.
• Employer assures that employee uses eye or face protection from hazards:
§ Flying particles
§ Molten metal
§ Liquid chemicals, acids or caustic liquids
§ Chemical gases or vapors
§ Potentially injurious light radiation
• Side protection for flying objects
§ Detachable side shields
• Eye and face protective equipment shall conform with the following minimum requirements:
§ provide adequate protection against the particular hazard for which they are designed or
intended.
§ be reasonably comfortable to use.
§ Fit snugly and shall not unduly interfere with the movement of the user.
§ be durable, easily cleaned and capable of being disinfected.
§ be kept clean and in good condition, and
§ be of the approved type
• Employees with prescription lenses:
§ Incorporate prescription in eye protection or
§ Wear eye protection over prescription lenses
§ Without disturbing proper position of prescription lenses or the protective lenses
• Each affected employee must wear appropriately shaded filter lenses for protection from
injurious light radiation
• For purposes of design, construction, testing, use of eye and face protection, the American
National Standards for Occupational Eye and Face Protection Equipment ANSI z87.1-1968)
is adopted.

B. OSHS Rule 1083: Respiratory Protection

Permissible Practice
• Primary objective: Prevent atmospheric contamination
§ Respiratory hazards:
§ dusts,

185 | P a g e



§ mists,
§ fogs,
§ fumes,
§ sprays,
§ smokes or vapors
• 1st Priority: Engineering controls:
§ Enclosure or confinement of the operation,
§ General and local ventilation, and
§ Substitution of less toxic materials
• Only where engineering controls are not feasible should respirators be used
• For purposes of proper selection, design, construction, testing and use of respirators, the
American National Standards Practices for Respiratory Protection (ANSI z88.-21059) is
adopted.
Respiratory protection program
• Where respirators are required, you need:
§ Written program
§ Worksite-specific procedures
• Required elements:
§ Training
§ Fit testing
§ Medical evaluations
§ Care and maintenance
§ Procedures for respirator selection
§ Procedures for routine & emergency use
Selection of respirators
• Respirators must be NIOSH-certified
• Provide enough variety so user can find the right fit
• Cartridge change schedule for gases and vapors
• IDLH atmosphere = immediately dangerous to life and health
§ Specific supplied-air respirators necessary for IDLH use
Use of Respirator
• Standard procedures shall be developed for the use of respirators. These should include all
information and guidance necessary for their proper selection, use and care. Possible
emergency uses of respirators should be anticipated and planned for.
• Written procedures shall be prepared covering safe use of respirators in dangerous
atmospheres that might be encountered in normal operations or in emergencies. All personnel
shall be familiar with these procedures and the available respirators to use.

186 | P a g e



• Workers in enclosed toxic or oxygen-deficient atmosphere shall be assisted in case of accident

by at least one additional worker stationed in an area unaffected by the incident and provided
with proper rescue equipment to assist the other(s) in case of emergency.
• Communication (visual, voice or signal line) shall be maintained among the individuals
present.
• When self-contained breathing apparatus or hose masks with blowers are used in atmospheres
dangerous to life or health, standby men must be present with suit- able rescue equipment.
• Persons using airline respirators in atmospheres hazardous to life or health, shall be equipped
with safety harnesses and safety lines for lifting or removing persons from hazardous
atmospheres or other equivalent provisions for the rescue of persons.
• A standby man or men with suitable self-contained breathing apparatus shall be at the nearest
fresh air base for emergency rescue.
• For the safe use of any respirator, the user shall be properly instructed in its selection, use and
maintenance.

Maintenance and Care for Respirators

A program for the maintenance and care of respirators shall be adopted to the type of plant,
working conditions, and hazards involved and shall include the following basic services:
inspection for defects (including leak check),
cleaning and disinfecting, and
repair and storage
Medical Evaluation
• Respirator use causes physiological burden, varying with
§ Type of respirator
§ Job and workplace conditions
§ Medical status of employee
• Medical evaluation provided before:
§ Fit testing
§ Worker respirator use
• Conducted by physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP)
• Additional evaluations if:
§ Employee reports related symptoms
§ PLHCP, supervisor, administrator recommends
§ Program information shows need
§ Change in workplace conditions increases physiological burden

OSHS Rule 1084: Head Protection

General requirements
• Ensure that each affected employee wears a protective helmet where there is a potential for head
injury from falling objects
187 | P a g e



• Ensure that each affected employee wears a protective helmet designed to reduce electrical shock
hazard when near exposed electrical conductors which could contact the head
• Protective helmets shall comply with ANSI Z89.1-1986
• The total weight of complete hard hat should not be more than 0.45 kgs. (16 ounces).
• Hard hats shall have a brim all around to provide protection for the head, face and back of the
neck
• Hard hats without brims and low crowns may be allowed only in confined spaces.
• The cradle and sweatband of hard hats shall be detachable and replaceable.
• For work in excessive moisture, hard hats shall be water-proof-material.
• OSHA requires head protection be worn in any environment where there is a potential for injury
to the head [29 CFR 1910.135]. In addition, the head protection must comply with ANSI Z89.1
performance guideline.
• All hard hats are classified according to the specific impact and electrical performance
requirements they are designed to meet. This classification is also commonly referred to as the
ANSI Z89.1 standard.
• Industrial head protective helmets meeting the requirements of the standard are classified as Type
I for top protection or Type II for lateral impact protection. Both types are tested for impact
attenuation and penetration resistance. Type II helmet performance requirements include criteria
for impact energy attenuation from impacts from the front, back and sides as well as the top: off-
center penetration resistance, and chin strap retention.
• All hard hats in accordance with this standard meet or exceed either Type I or Type II impact
requirements. In addition to type classifications, all hard hats are further classified as meeting
Class G, Class E, or Class C electrical requirements. Each of these types and electrical classes
are outlined below:
Impact Types
§ Type I Hard Hats – Type I hard hats are intended to reduce the force of impact resulting for a
blow only to the top of the head.
§ Type II Hard Hats – Type II hard hats are intended to reduce the force of impact resulting
from a blow, which may be received off center or to the top of the head. A Type II hard hat
typically is lined on the inside with thick high-density foam.
Electrical Classes
§ Class G (General) – Class G hard hats are intended to reduce the danger of contact exposure
to low voltage conductors. Test samples are proof tested at 2200 volts (phase to ground).
However, this voltage is not intended as an indication of the voltage at which the hard hat
protects the wearer. Please note: Class G hard hats were formerly known as Class A.
§ Class E (Electrical) – Class E hard hats are intended to reduce the danger of exposure to high
voltage conductors. Test samples are proof tested at 20,000 volts (phase to ground). However,
this voltage is not intended as an indication of the voltage at which the helmet protects the
wearer. Please note: Class E hard hats were formerly known as Class B.
§ Class C (Conductive) – Class C hard hats are not intended to provide protection against
contact with electrical conductors.

188 | P a g e



Hair Protection
• All persons with long hair employed around machinery shall completely cover their hair with
well-fitting caps or other equivalent protection.
• Caps shall be of materials not easily flammable and sufficiently durable to withstand regular
laundering, disinfecting and cleaning.

OSHS Rule 1085: Hand and Arm Protection

General requirements
• Appropriate hand protection required for employee hand exposure to hazards such as:
§ Skin absorption of harmful substances
§ severe cuts or lacerations
§ Severe abrasions

189 | P a g e



§ Punctures
§ Chemical burns
§ Thermal burns
§ Harmful temperature extremes
• Gloves shall not be worn by workers operating drills, punch presses or other machinery in which
the hand may be caught by moving parts.
• Gloves, mittens, and leathers or pads for workers handling sharp edged or abrasive objects shall
be made of tough materials and where necessary ` provided with special reinforcement.
• Gloves, mittens and sleeves for workers handling hot metals shall be made of suit able heat
resisting material.
• Gloves and sleeves for electrical workers shall be made of rubber or other suitable materials
conforming with the test requirements on dielectric strength.
• Gauntlets for workers handling corrosive substances, such as acids and caustics, shall be made
of natural rubber, synthetic rubber or pliable plastic material resistant to corrosion.
• Gauntlets for protecting workers against the action of toxic, irritating or infectious substances
shall:
§ cover the forearm as much as possible,
§ Have a close fit at the upper end and
§ not have the slightest break.
§ Gloves torn during use shall be replaced immediately
Hand Protection Selection
• Comply with ANSI ISEA 105-2016 in selecting hand protection for the job
• Employer selects based on:
§ Performance characteristics of the hand protection relative to the task(s)
to be performed
§ Conditions present
§ Duration of use
§ Hazards and potential hazards identified
Common Types of Gloves
• Disposable: light-weight plastic; can help guard against mild irritants.
• Fabric: cotton or fabric blend; improve grip or insulate from heat or cold.
• Leather: guard against injuries from sparks or scraping against rough surfaces. Combine with
an insulated liner when working with electricity.
• Chemical Resistance: nitrile, neoprene, vinyl, etc; protect hands from chemical exposure
• Metal Mesh: protect hands from cuts and scratches; used commonly with sharp instruments.
• Aluminized Fabric: insulate hands from intense heat; commonly used with molten materials

190 | P a g e



OSHS Rule 1086: Safety Belts, Lifelines and Safety Nets

General Provision
• Workmen working in unguarded surface above open pits or tanks, steep slopes, moving
machinery and similar locations, or working from unguarded surfaces six (6) meters (20 ft.) or
more above water or ground, temporary or permanent floor platform, scaffold construction or
where otherwise exposed to the possibility of falls hazardous to life or limb, shall be secured by
safety belts and life lines. In situations where safety belts and lifelines in guarded platforms and
scaffolds or temporary floors are not feasible, safety nets shall be provided and installed.
• Window washers or cleaners working outside buildings six (6) meters (20 ft.) or more above the
ground or other surfaces unless protected from falling by other means, shall use safety belts
attached to suitable anchors.
• Workmen entering a sewer, flue, duct, or other similarly confined places shall be provided and
required to wear safety belts with life-lines attached and held by another person stationed at the
opening ready to respond to agreed signals.
• Workers who are required to climb and work on top of poles six (6) meters or more shall use
safety belts. On top of structures where there is no place to strap a safety belt, a messenger line
shall be installed for strapping the safety belt or lifeline.
• Safety belts shall be made of chromed tanned leather, linen or cotton webbing, or other suitable
materials at least 11.5 cm. (4 ½ in.) wide and 0.65 cm. (1/4 in.) thick and of sufficient strength
to support a weight of 114 kgs. (250 lbs.) without breaking.
• Hardware used for safety belts should have a strength of approximately equal to the full strength
of the waist band.
• Buckles shall hold securely without slippage or other failure. This holding power should be
achieved by only a single insertion of the strap through the buckle in the normal or usual way.
• Belt anchors shall be made of metal machined from bar stock, forged or heat treated, capable of
supporting a pull of 2730 kgs. (6,000 lbs.) without fracture applied in the direction which the
anchor must withstand should a man fall.
• All anchors and fastenings shall be provided with means to prevent turning, backing off or
becoming loose. Anchor fittings with single thread section which is merely screwed into
reinforcing plates shall not be used. Metals recommended for belt anchors are nickel copper alloy
and stainless steel.
• Lifelines shall be made of good quality manila rope of at least 1.9 cm. (3/4 in.) diameter or
equivalent material such as nylon rope of at least 1.27 cm. (1/2 in.) diameter and shall be of
sufficient strength to support a weight of 1140 kgs. (2,500 lbs.) without breaking.
• Safety nets shall not be less than 0.94 cm. (3/8 in.) diameter mesh ropes and not less than 1.90
cm. (3/4 in.) diameter border ropes (perimeter) made of manila rope or other materials that can
absorb the impact of a falling body equally as nets fabricated from manila rope of the dimensions
specified. The mesh shall be arranged not to exceed 15.25 cm. (6 in.) on canters positively and
securely attached to avoid wear at each crossing point and at points of contact with the border
• Safety nets shall be equipped with adequately padded thimble sockets or equivalent means of
attachments.
• Supports and anchorages shall be of sufficient size and strength to catch any falling worker. The
nets shall be attached to sufficient supports outside and beyond the area of possible fall and

191 | P a g e



supported at sufficient heights to prevent sagging to any solid object beneath when cushioning
the fall of a worker.
• Safety belts, life- lines and safety nets shall be inspected before use and at least once each week
thereafter. Defective belts, lines or nets shall be immediately discarded and replaced or repaired
before reuse.
OSHS Rule 1087: Foot Protection
General requirements
• Each affected employee must use protective footwear where there is danger of:
§ Falling or rolling objects
§ Objects piercing sole
§ Feet exposed to electrical hazards
• Protective footwear shall comply with ANSI Z41-1991
Hearing Protection

Hearing Conservation Program

• Required for any employees exceeding 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA or 50% dose
§ Action level
• Monitoring, employee notification
• Audiometric testing
§ Baseline and annual
§ Evaluated for standard threshold shift (STS) (change in hearing sensitivity)
Hearing Protectors
• Available to all employees exposed over 85 dBA
• Replaced as necessary
• Must be worn by workers exposed >90 dBA, or before baseline or with STS
• Employees choose from variety
• Training, supervision of correct use
• Proper initial fitting
SOURCE:
https://www.mintragroup.com/
Occupational Safety and Health Standard Rule 1080

192 | P a g e



MODULE 15:
DEMOLITION SAFETY

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
Participants shall be able:
To identify the hazards and the precautionary measures available to control the hazards

DEFINITION
Demolition work means to demolish or dismantle a structure or part of a structure that is load bearing
or otherwise related to the physical integrity of the structure, but does not include:
the dismantling of formwork, falsework, scaffolding or other structures designed or used to provide
support, access or containment during construction work, or
the removal of power, light or telecommunication poles.
A structure is anything that is constructed, whether fixed or moveable, temporary or permanent, and
includes buildings, sheds, towers, chimney stacks, silos, storage tanks

DEMOLITION SAFETY PROGRAM

Employers establish effective Demolition Safety program
Everyone must be fully aware of the hazards they may encounter
Everyone must be fully aware of safety precautions they must take to protect themselves

CONTRACTOR PREPARATIONS
Steps to Safeguard the health and safety at work site
• Over-all planning of the demolition job
• Method to use to bring structure down
• Equipment necessary to do the job
• Measures to be taken to perform work safely
• Other Safety Plan
§ The wrecking of structure
§ Equipment to do the job
§ Manpower requirements
§ Protection to public
Safety of everyone is primary consideration

193 | P a g e



KEY AREAS FOR PLANNING

Safety Report is critical to planning the project. Safety Report should include:
A. Engineering Survey completed by Competent person
The Engineering Survey
• Provide contractor to evaluate the job in its entirety.
• Determine the condition of framing, floors and walls
• Prevent premature collapse of any portion of structure.
• Competent person must conduct the survey
• Adjacent structure existing damage and hazards I.e., fires
• Must take appropriate measures to Damaged Structures including bracing or shoring of walls
and floors
• Hazardous Substance or any similar substances must be determined and control i.e., testing
and purging
• Right PPE for the demolition job hazards.
Engineering Survey Report
A formal report with following sections:
• Protection to adjacent structure
§ Fencing and Barricading
§ Shoring and Trenching
• Demolition Technique
§ Sequential Demolition
The demolition process is separated into phases in which one type of material is
carefully dismantled at one time and salvaged for reuse and recycling. The wastes
generated in each dismantling stage are of similar types and nature such that
contamination of nonrecyclable items can be significantly reduced. The sequence of
demolition is principally carried out in reverse order to the construction process and it
shall be planned to allow the separation and sorting of building materials.
Principal phases in Sequential Demolition involve:
1. Demolition of part of the building structures with higher concrete content (such as
concrete parapet walls, etc)
2. Stripping of deleterious materials (such as bricks, tiles, etc) which may contaminate
the clean concrete debris of building bearing structure.
3. Step-by step demolition of the bearing and main structure by dismantling part of the
structures that are of similar materials to avoid contamination of clean concrete debris
and allow separation of concrete debris with other demolition arising
§ Induced – involves a carefully designed and calculated sequence of structural pre-
weakening followed by the application of sufficient force to induce a controlled
collapse.

194 | P a g e



• Method of demolition
Also considered to be a method of destruction, demolition techniques are known as the
different ways that the demolition industry can blow up, destroy or take apart a structure.
These demolition techniques will remove the old building so that new construction can take
place. Obviously, there are several factors that will play the role in deciding which technique
to use on a particular project including but not limited to the project size, the available budget
as well as any other factors surrounding the job site.
Here is a look at four different types of demolition techniques.
§ Non-Explosive/Mechanical Demolition
This type of demolition is normally used with machinery such as cranes, bulldozers and
a wrecking ball. As a general rule, wrecking balls, which will be connected to a crane
by a cable, are used on high-rise buildings so that the building has fewer stories for
implosion – the use of explosives. The only real downside to the wrecking ball is that
you lack absolute full control because you can’t be positive as to where exactly the
debris will fall or in what manner the structure will collapse. Another way the building
can be brought down is by undermining, which is the removal of supporting elements
of the structure so that the building falls quickly but safely and generally in the direction
that you desire.
§ Explosive/Implosive Demolition
This is the technique that comes to mind when you think of the demolition of a building
and it is the most theatrical. However, it is not as easy as it appears to be on TV. The
explosives are set around the structure in a controlled, pre-determined manner that when
detonated will collapse inward and is considered an implosion. The person in charge of
hitting the fire button will need to be qualified to do so as explosives can be dangerous
if they are not handled properly and/or handled by someone without the necessary
training. While it takes only seconds for this demolition method to actually take place,
it makes up for time by taking an adequate amount of time to set up and then clean up.
§ Green Demolition/Deconstruction
Something that is growing within the demolition industry is green demolition or
deconstruction. It is by far the most environmentally friendly of the demolition
techniques that are available. It is a carefully planned method of deconstruction that
does take time. The building will be tearing down manually and as much of the
building’s material will be salvaged so that it can be reused somewhere else. Not only
does this recycle materials but it minimizes the amount of material that must be taken
to the landfill.
§ Selective Demolition
Last but not least is selective demotion, which is usually used when a building is being
renovated, rebuilt or an addition is being included. This is a difficult method of
demolition and thus requires:
1. Careful planning.
2. Architectural research.
3. High level of accuracy.
4. A highly qualified, talent professional that can have a section demolished without
hurting the remainder of the structure.
• Method of protection to public

195 | P a g e



• Protection to utilities
• Protection of above and below tank
• Hazardous material removal
• Blasting requirements (Rule 1419.02)
• Training requirement
B. Locating, securing and/or relocating any nearby utilities
• Should be shut off otherwise controlled
• Utility company should be notified in advance
• If necessary, to maintain utilities, this need to be relocated to a safe place and protected as
necessary
• Determine location of overhead power sources
• Inform workers of the location of any existing utility power services

C. Fire prevention and evacuation plan

• Should outline the assignment of key personnel in the event of any emergency
• Must provide evacuation plan for workers on the site.
• Medical services should include coordination with local providers and training of FA and
CPR.
• Evaluate all potential ignition sources and take corrective action
• Competent person to installed electrical wirings and equipment for providing power or
lighting
• Internal combustion engine equipment exhaust is away from combustible materials
• Maintain clearance at least six (6) inches between piping and combustible materials when
exhaust is piped outside the building.
• Shutdown all internal combustion engine prior to refueling. Fuel stored in safe location with
approved containers.
• Locate sufficient firefighting equipment near flammable materials
Smoking, Roadways and Storing Materials
• Smoking is prohibited near flammable materials
• Only smoke in designated area and use safe receptacles for smoking materials.
• Roadways between and around combustible materials storage piles are at least 15 feet wide.
• Maintain the area free from accumulation of rubbish, equipment and other materials,
• When storing debris or combustible materials inside structure, do not obstruct storage or
adversely affect means of exit.
Control Centre, Fire Equipment and Access
• Designate a suitable location at the job site and provide plan, emergency information, and
equipment needed for coordination.
• Ensure access for heavy firefighting equipment
196 | P a g e



• Free access to fire hydrant (if present) or any firefighting equipment

• No pedestrian or other access to be constructed near emergency access and equipment.
• Sufficient and suitable firefighting equipment at strategic area
• Establish an alarm system at the area and all workers must be familiar with the alarm system.
• Reporting instruction must be posted near emergency equipment
D. Emergency first aid and security devices
• Establish medical emergency procedure and conduct training
• Locate nearest hospital as required by OSHS
• Ensure emergency equipment and other first aid supplies available
• Make sure communication system is available and accessible
• Designated OH Service Personnel as required by OSHS
• Emergency shower and eye wash station is provided at the area
• Training to be given to personnel involved in emergency services and workers be aware of
emergency procedure in calling for help
• Maintain local service provider number and keep up to date.
E. An assessment of health hazards completed before any demolition work
Primary Type of Accident
• Falls from elevated work surfaces
• Exposure to hazardous components/ air contaminants
• Struct by falling or collapsing structure
• Electrical shock
• Caught in between equipment and structure
• Musculoskeletal Disorder brought by material handling

Hazards Associated with Building Demolition

• Hazardous Materials
§ Concrete
§ Wood (from building
§ Asphalt (road and roofing shingles
§ Gypsum (component of dry wall)
§ Metals; Bricks
§ Glass; Plastic
§ Salvage building components (doors, window, plumbing fixtures
§ Trees, earth and rocks from clearing sites

197 | P a g e



• Assessment of Health Hazard

Demolition workers may be exposed to several different hazards as a result of their work.

These include:
§ Chemical - silica dust, lead, asbestos, VOC, heavy metal
§ Physical – noise, vibration, extreme temperature, pressure, radiation
§ Microbiological hazards – animals and pest droppings, sewerage
§ Ergonomics – manual handling
These hazards can arise from activities such as:
§ crushing concrete
§ handling lead-containing materials
§ compressors
§ hand-held concrete breakers
§ Use of Construction Heavy Equipment
§
• Safety Hazards
§ Changes from structure design introduced during construction
§ Approved or unapproved modification that altered original plan
§ Materials hidden from structural members such as lead, asbestos, silica and other heavy
metals requiring specialized handling
§ Unknown strength or weaknesses of the construction materials such as post tensioned
concrete
§ Underground utilities and pipe works
§ Flammable and combustible materials

F. Training requirements
• Asbestos, lead and silica awareness and removal
• Oxygen and fuel cutting
• Scaffolding
• Working at height
• Demolition supervisory course
• Abrasive grinding
• Power industrial operations
• Blasting operations
• PPE

198 | P a g e



Hierarchy of Control
• Elimination – Physically remove the hazards
• Substitution – Replace the hazards
• Engineering Controls – Isolate workers from the
hazards
• Administrative Control – change the way work is
performed
• PPE – protect the workers with suitable and
sufficient PPE
Control Measures for Structural Instability
• During engineering survey identify unstable part of the building
• Shore/brace walls as needed and maintain safe work area during demolition
• Competent person to inspect the area to detect hazards resulting from weakening or deteriorated
floors, walls and other structure
• Do not allow falling debris/ stored materials or heavy equipment to exceed the safe carrying of
the floor.
• Conduct demolition from the topmost floors down
• Do not cut or remove load bearing members until upper or supported load has been removed
Control Measures for Unsecured Hazard in the Work Area
• Use debris netting, sidewalk shed, canopies or catch platform to reduced falling objects
• Employee entrances to multi-storey structure are protected by sidewalk shed or canopy or both,
providing protection from the face of the building for a minimum of 8 feet.
• Canopies should be at least 2 feet wider than the building entrances or openings capable of
sustaining a load of 150 lbs per square foot.
Control Measures for Utilities, Walkways and Illumination
• Verify location of utilities
• Ensure line has been shut off, capped or controlled outside the building before beginning of the
work
• Notify utility companies before controlling the utility lines.
• To prevent STF provide safe access to reach any point without having to walk on exposed beams
• Walkways should be at least 18” wide and formed by 2” thick wood with stringer as needed
support
• Stairwell being use for access and egress must be properly illuminated either by natural or
artificial. Sufficient number of lights to provide in all area.
Control Measures for Hazardous Substances
1. Conduct worksite inspection to assess for the presence of hazardous chemicals, gases or
flammable materials

199 | P a g e



2. If condition of tanks or equipment is suspected, avoid disturbing until all precautionary

measures is developed to reduced exposure to hazards.
3. Purge lines, tanks, and equipment containing hazardous substances
4. Use air monitoring device – O2, HC, and toxic gas
5. Forced ventilation
6. Respiratory Protection
7. For CS work – ensure everyone involved is competent.
Controlling Asbestos and Lead Hazard
• Asbestos and Lead Health
§ Asbestos and lead is well recognized as health hazard and its use is now regulated by Health
governing bodies local and international.
§ Breathing Asbestos fibres can cause a build-up scar like tissue in the lungs called Asbestosis
and result loss in lung function while Lead exposure causes damage to nervous system or
affect reproductive system and blood streams.
§ Asbestos also causes cancer of the lungs and other disease such as Mesothelioma of the pleura
which is a fatal malignant tumour of the membrane lining the cavity of the lung or stomach
• Hazard Location
§ Renovating or demolishing buildings or ships – Thermal system insulation; roofing
§ Clean up activities – vinyl floor tiles, cement, putties
• Controlling Asbestos Hazard
§ Industrial pipe wrapping, heat resistant textile and automobile break lining
§ Painted walls, braces, linings, structures, tanks
• Reducing Asbestos and lead Hazards
§ Medical health surveillance
§ Local exhaust ventilation
§ Training and PPE
• Exposure Limits
§ TWA – no exposure in asbestos in excess of 0.1 fibre per cubic centimetre of air for 8 hours
TWA; 50 micrograms per cubic meter of air.
§ Excursion Limit – no exposure to an airborne concentration of asbestos in excess of 1.0 fibre
per cubic centimetre as averaged over a sampling period of 30 mins.
• Training
• Initial and Annual training for all employees who are exposed to hazardous subs.
• Training topics includes:
- Method of recognizing asbestos
- Health effect associated with asbestos exposure
- Relationship between smoking and asbestos in producing lung cancer
- Importance of necessary protective controls to minimized exposure

200 | P a g e



1. Engineering Control; Work Practices; Housekeeping and waste disposal

2. Respirators; Protective Clothing; Hygiene Facilities & Decontamination Procedure
3. Emergency Procedure and special instruction in handling hazardous substances

OSHS RULE 1417- DEMOLITION

1417: Demolition:
1417.01 General Requirements
All demolition operations of building or other structure over six (6) meters high shall be
under supervision of a competent person. No person except the workers who are directly
engaged in the demolition shall enter a demolition area to within a distance equal to 1 1/2
times the height of the structure being demolished, where this distance is not possible the
structure shall be fenced around and no unauthorized person shall be allowed within the
fenced area.

1417.02: Demolition Work

1. On every demolition work, danger signs shall be posted around the structure and all doors
and opening giving access to the structure shall be kept barricaded or guarded.
2. Demolition work shall not commence until:
a. all necessary steps have been taken to prevent injury to any person or damage to
adjoining property, and
b. all existing gas, electrical and other services likely to endanger a worker shall have
been shut off or disconnected.
3. Prior to demolition all glass shall:
a. be removed from windows and other locations, or
b. otherwise shall be protected so that there is no possibility of breakage at any stage of
the demolition.
4. Shoring or other necessary measures shall be taken to prevent the accidental collapse of
any part of the building or structure being demolished or any adjacent building or structure
endangering the workers.
5. Demolition shall proceed systematically, story by story, in a descending order and the
work on the upper floors shall be completely over before removing any of the supporting
members of the structure on the lower floor. This shall not prohibit the demolition on
section, in the same descending order if means are taken to prevent injury to workers and
damage to property.
6. All precautions shall be taken to avoid damage from collapse of a budding being
demolished or any part of it when any part of the framing is removed from a framed or
partly framed building.
7. No building or any part of the structure shall be overloaded with debris or materials to
render it unsafe and hazardous to persons working.
8. Adequate precautions shall be taken to avoid danger from any sudden twisting, springing
or collapse of any steel or ironwork cut or released.

201 | P a g e



9. No workers shall stand on top of wall, pier or chimney more than six (6) meters (1 8 ft.)
high unless safe flooring or adequate scaffolding or staging is provided on all sides of the
wall, three (3) meters (9 ft.) away from where he is working.
10. A truss, girder, or other structural member shall not be disconnected until it has been:
a. relieved of all loads other than its own weight, and
b. provided with temporary supports.
11. Stairs and stair railings, passageways and ladders shall be demolished last.
12. When demolition is suspended or discontinued all access to the remaining part of the
building shall be fenced or barricaded.
1418.00 Mechanical Demolition:
The demolition area where work is done by mechanical devices such as weight balls or power
shovels shall:
a. be barricaded for a minimum distance of 1 1/2 times the height of the structure.
b. not allow entrance of unauthorized persons.
c. arranged and maintained so the mechanical devices used shall not cause any damage to
adjacent structures, power lines or public road.
1419.00; Explosives:
1419.01: Supervision:
1. A competent person shall be appointed in charge of and personally present at a blasting
operation who shall supervise the fixing of all charges and other blasting, activities.
2. The names of persons designated to handle, transport, prepare or use dynamite or other
high explosives shall be posted in the field office and on or in the magazine.
3. No person inexperienced in handling dynamite or other high explosives shall handle,
transport, prepare or use dynamite, unless the inexperienced person work under the
personal supervision of a person with experience in blasting operations.
4. A record of explosives received and used shall be properly maintained and open for
inspection by the enforcing authority.
1419.0 2: Blasting:
8. Only the quantity of dynamite required for immediate use in blasting of a part of a
building or other structure shall be removed from the magazine.
9. No holes shall be drilled:
a. within 3.3 m. (10 ft.) of a hole containing explosives or blasting agents.
b. within 6.6 m. (20 ft.) of a hole being loaded with explosives or blasting agents.
10. Every firing circuit in connection with blasting operations shall be broken in a suitable
manner at a safe distance from the blasting area.
11. When a charge is fired, steps shall be taken to see that persons employed are in a position
free from the explosives or from flying objects.
12. The applicable provisions of Rule 1140 shall also apply to the use, handling, and storage
of explosives in construction industry.
SOURCE:
DEMOLITION WORKS SAFE WORK AUSTRALIA
Occupational Safety and Health Standard Rule 1417: Demolition

202 | P a g e



MODULE 16:
ROUTINE SITE SAFETY INSPECTION

Learning Objective:
At the end of this module, participants will be able to conduct an actual safety and health
inspection.

Safety inspection is a formal and properly documented process of identifying hazards in the
workplace. This is one of the best tools available to find problems & assess their risks before
an accident & other losses might occur through a close and critical scrutiny of the working
environment for comparison with the acceptable/ established standard.

Safety and health inspection is the central part of most safety, health and environmental
protection programs. They provide a reliable way for identifying and eliminating conditions
that could contribute to accident, illness or environmental damage.

OSHS DO-13

“General safety and health inspection” refers to inspection of the work environment, including
the location and operation of machinery other than those covered by technical safety inspections,
adequacy of work space, ventilation, lighting, conditions of work environment, handling, storage or
work procedures, protection facilities and other safety and health hazards in the workplace.

“Technical safety inspection” refers to inspection for the purpose of safety determination of boilers,
pressure vessels, internal combustion engines, electrical installations, elevators, hoisting equipment
and other mechanical equipment

203 | P a g e


Elements of effective safety and health inspection programs

The key to an effective inspection program is preparation, which includes addressing each of the following.

Type

• Planned— This type of inspection is scheduled in advance with the deliberate intention of
detecting unsafe conditions or procedures (for example, a department inspection)
• Continuous or informal— This type of inspection is meant to complement the planned inspection,
but is typically done on a more frequent basis, often daily and part of a work process or routine (for
example, a daily forklift inspection)
• Unplanned— This type of inspection is unanticipated and typically not done on a routine basis (for
example, after a ladder tips over)

Frequency

The organization should determine how often inspections will be done and identify flexibility to
establish a schedule given the circumstances and variables in their workplace.

Personnel
Generally, inspections are performed by a member or a team of members from the safety committee,
but managers, supervisors, employees, maintenance personnel, and other individuals from within a
company may do inspections or be part of the inspection process. Utilizing many people from different
areas of the company to do inspections improves the odds of finding hazards in your workplace.

Training

Regardless of who does inspections at your company, you need to adequately prepare them for the
process. Unless the individuals who will be doing the inspection have a well-rounded background in
safety, they need training or education on safety procedures or regulations pertinent to the areas,
equipment, or processes to be inspected. This will allow them to adequately identify unsafe conditions
or procedures they may not have otherwise noticed.

Scheduling

Although spot inspections of equipment and procedures are useful, it is helpful to arrange schedules
where most of the equipment will be operating and employees will be working. On the other hand, the
inspection team should ensure their work can be carried out at a time and in a way that does not
interfere with production processes. Avoid particularly heavy workflow periods, unless the point of the
inspection is to see if those time periods generate more hazards than at other times.

Also, consider asking supervisors of the areas to be inspected to be present. They can provide valuable
insight to particular production processes or work hazards unique to the area. Questions can be
answered, some infractions may be able to be fixed on the spot, and the supervisor can show the
inspector the area properly.

Equipment

Equipment might be necessary to effectively carry out certain inspections, and will depend upon several
factors, including:

204 | P a g e


• How in-depth the inspection will be

• What is being inspected
• The background of the inspector

Purposes of safety and health inspection

Inspections are important as they allow you to:

• listen to the concerns of workers and supervisors

• gain further understanding of jobs and tasks
• identify existing and potential hazards
• determine underlying causes of hazards
• recommend corrective action
• monitor steps taken to eliminate hazards or control the risk (e.g., engineering controls,
administrative controls, policies, procedures, personal protective equipment)

Types of Inspection
Formal Inspection
§ Periodic / Regular Planned Inspections – those scheduled made at regular
intervals.
§ Continuous Inspections / Observation – made where most of time are spent on
observing certain equipment and/or operation.
§ Special Inspections – necessary due to installation of new equipment or new
processes, etc.
Informal Inspection
Intermittent / Spot Inspections – made at irregular intervals and it includes
unannounced inspections.

Qualification of a Safety Inspector

• Tactful and diplomatic

• Good analytical and problem-solving skills
• Good communication and interpersonal skills
• Good observational skills
• Able to work independently or as part of a team
• Able to work at heights and in various weather conditions
• Integrity and sound judgment. (the good university guide)

DO 198-18 Section 14
Safety Officer shall assist government inspectors in the conduct of health and safety inspection at
any time whenever work is being performed or during the conduct of an accident investigation by
providing necessary information and OSH reports as required by OHS standards.

OSHS Rule 1046 (5)

Workers shall assist government agencies in the conduct of health and safety inspection programs

OSHS Rule 1047 (5)

The safety man shall Conducts health and safety inspection as member of the committee.

205 | P a g e


How frequent should inspections be done?

The purpose is to keep the workplace free of hazards. The schedule should state:

• when to inspect each area or item within the workplace

• who carries out the inspection
• what degree of detail to inspect each area or item

How often inspections are performed will depend on several factors:

• the frequency of planned formal inspections may be set in your legislation

• past incident records
• number and size of different work operations
• type of equipment and work processes - those that are hazardous or potentially
• number of shifts - the activity of every shift may vary
• new processes or machinery
• legislative requirements for your jurisdiction

Preparations to be made in conducting site safety inspection

• What to examine
• Workplace elements

Items and Conditions need to be inspected:

• environmental factors (illumination, dust, fumes, gases, mists, vapors, noise, vibration,
heat, radiation sources)
• hazardous supplies and materials (explosives, flammables, acids, caustics, toxic or
nuclear materials or by-products)
• power source equipment (steam and gas engines, electrical motors)
• electrical equipment (switches, fuses, breakers, outlets, cables, extension and fixture
cords, grounds, connectors, connections)
• hand tools (wrenches, screwdrivers, hammers, power tools)
• personal protective equipment (hard hats, safety glasses, safety shoes, respirators, hearing
protection, gloves, etc.)
• personal service and first aid facilities (drinking fountains, wash basins, soap dispensers,
safety showers, eyewash fountains, first aid supplies, stretchers)
• fire protection and emergency response equipment (alarms, water tanks, sprinklers,
standpipes, extinguishers, hydrants, hoses, self-contained breathing apparatus, toxic
cleanup, automatic valves, holes, phones, radios)
• walkways and roadways (ramps, docks, sidewalks, walkways, aisles, vehicle ways, escape
routes)
• elevators, electric stairways, and manlifts (controls, wire ropes, safety devices)
• working surfaces (ladders, scaffolds, catwalks, platforms)
• material handling equipment (cranes, trollies, conveyors, hoists, forklifts, chains, ropes,
slings)
• transportation equipment (automobiles, railroad cars, trucks, front-end loaders, helicopter,
motorized carts and buggies)
• warning and signaling devices (sirens, crossing and blinker lights, warning signs, exit
signs)
• containers (scrap bins, disposal receptacles, carboys, barrels, drums, gas cylinders,
solvent cans)
• storage facilities and area both indoor and outdoor (bins, racks, lockers, cabinets, shelves,

206 | P a g e


tanks, closets)
• structural openings (windows, doors, stairways, sumps, shafts, pits, floor openings)
• building and structures (floors, roofs, walls, fencing)
• miscellaneous – any items that do not fit in preceding categories

PPE to be used
Wear the prescribed personal protective equipment (PPE). Avoid entering the area wearing
inappropriate and inadequate PPE. Include PPE requirement during the planning stage of inspection.

Inspection report
Ensure to write a comprehensive report with supporting documents and attachments such as
photos, copies of certificates, licenses, etc. The following items should be highlighted:
• Good points on safety observations
• Opportunities for improvement
• Critical findings

Monitoring of Implemented Corrective Action

Review the information from regular inspections to identify where corrective action was needed.
Determine if these actions have been taken. Use older reports to identify trends. Analysis of inspection
reports may show the following:

• priorities for other corrective action

• need for improving safe work practices
• insight about why incidents are occurring in particular areas
• need for education and training in certain areas
• areas and equipment that require more in-depth hazard analysis

The health and safety committee can review inspections, identify trends, and monitor the progress of
the recommendations. This analysis can be used as part of the continual improvement process for the
occupational health and safety program or management system.
Checklists
Creating Checklists:
1. Write down every potential hazard within the category that you know exists in your work
area
2. Check the written sources you have available to add any hazards that you did not think of
3. Examine the work area itself to see if you overlooked any conditions that need to be
checked and note the locations of the hazards already listed.
4. Have employees review your list to make sure you have included all the hazards and
identified the locations of each one

Written records:
• Previous inspection reports
• JHA
• Maintenance records
• SDS
• Accident investigation reports
• Work environment monitoring

207 | P a g e


Scheduling
1. Determine how much time is required for each type of inspection
2. Inspect as often as possible.
3. Make sure each inspection is thorough
4. If conditions don’t improve, or if hazards occur between inspections, increase the
frequency
5. If no hazardous conditions are found, do not decrease the frequency of inspections.
6. Stick to the schedule

Involving Employees
§ Increases total manpower
§ Increases the chance that the hazards are corrected quickly
§ Increases the amount of attention to SHE conditions in the area

A sketch or layout
allows you to distinguish between…
• similar pieces of equipment
• similar safety devices
• other checklist items

Conducting the Inspection

• Stay on the task
• Take notes
• Complete and specific remarks make your inspection efforts useful in the future as a
health and safety resource

Recommending Corrective Actions

• Aimed toward reducing or eliminating the hazard
• Priority-based

Patterned as:
• What to do (Action Plan)
• Who is responsible (Accountability)
• When is it due (Target Date)
• What to expect (Output)

Communicating Inspection Results

• Discuss them at safety meetings
• Post the completed checklists
• Post maintenance requests

Hazard Recognition
• Biological
• Physical
• Ergonomic
• Mechanical
• Electrical
• Chemical

208 | P a g e


Inspecting for Chemical hazards

• Check containers and labels - SDS
• Use recommended Personal Protective Equipment
• Observe proper ventilation, especially in chemical storage, transfer areas, & workstations
• Have the necessary emergency equipment available and a trained staff to use it

Keys to effective inspection

• Create checklists
• Schedule inspections (v.v.)
• Focus on one hazard at a time
• Modify checklists as needed
• Follow-up corrective actions
• Communicate & Involve Employees
• Acknowledge participation

209 | P a g e


MODULE 17:
JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS

Objective: To teach the participant how to analyze jobs in the workplace and spot possible
sources of accidents in these different tasks.

Definition

Accidents can occur when:

§ Work is performed incorrectly
§ Workers use hazardous materials
§ Work under hazardous conditions

OSHA defines a job hazard analysis (JHA) as a technique that focuses on job tasks as a way
to identify hazards before they occur. It focuses on the relationship between the worker, the
task, the tools, and the work environment. Ideally, after you identify uncontrolled hazards,
you will take steps to eliminate or reduce them to an acceptable risk level.

Hazards that present risks to:

1. Environment
2. Safety
3. Health

Benefits of JHA
Findings of a job hazard analysis can be used to eliminate and prevent hazards in their workplaces.

210 | P a g e


This is likely to result in fewer worker injuries and illnesses; safer, more effective work methods;
reduced workers ‘compensation costs; and increased worker productivity.

The analysis also can be a valuable tool for training new employees in the steps required to perform
their jobs safely.

JHA involves the following steps

1. Identify basic steps of a job
2. Determine associated hazards
3. Make recommendations to control the hazards
Uses of a JHA
§ Create / improve SOP’s
§ Guide in observing employee performance
§ Accident investigation
§ Safety inspection

Prioritizing JHA’s
§ High Frequency of Accidents
§ Increase occurrence of Near-Misses
§ History of Serious Accidents / Fatalities
§ Potential for Serious Harm
§ New Jobs
§ Changes in Procedures or Standards

JHA Team
§ Supervisor
§ Employee most familiar with the job
§ Other employees who perform the job
§ Experts or specialists (maintenance personnel, occupational hygienists, ergonomists or
engineers)

Basic Steps in Preparing JHA

Step 1. Identify the Basic Job Steps

Watch carefully as a worker performs the entire job at least once
§ As the operator performs the job again, list the individual steps on the left-hand
column.
§ Using simple action phrases that are short and to the point
§ Steps should always be numbered to indicate the order

Most common errors:

§ Describing the job in too much detail, or
§ Describing the job in too little detail.

Solution:
List as steps only those tasks that would be described to someone being trained to perform the
job.

Step 2. Determine the Hazards:

Identify all of the existing or potential actions or conditions that could lead to an injury or
211 | P a g e


illness, or harm to the environment.

Hazard Guide:
§ The physical actions required for that specific step.
§ The materials used.
§ The equipment used.
§ The conditions under which the step is normally performed.

Physical Action:
§ Force (weight)
§ Frequency (repetition)
§ Posture (prolonged)
§ Position (distance)
Materials (Chemicals)
§ Corrosive
§ Flammable
§ Volatile

Equipment
§ Mechanical hazard
§ Electrical hazard

Conditions
§ Noisy environment
§ Temperatures extremes
§ Vibration present
§ Poor or high Illumination
§ Pressure (atmospheric force)
§ Prolonged hours

"What if” Questions

§ Anticipate hazardous situations
§ Abnormal operating conditions
§ Incorrect or out of sequence
§ Additional attachments
§ Replacements / alternatives
§ Consequence

4 factors to identify hazards

§ Physical action
§ Material
§ Equipment
§ Condition

Physical Actions
§ Modifying
§ Rearranging
§ Combining actions
§ Change the process
§ Training

212 | P a g e


§ Use of PPE

Materials
§ Substitution of materials
§ Machine guarding
§ Safeguarding
§ Limit employee exposure
§ Use of PPE

Equipment
§ Installation of machine guards
§ Use automatic safeguard devices,
§ Replacement of a particular piece of equipment.
§ Training, experience, skills
§ Use of PPE should also be considered

Work Area Conditions

§ Improved housekeeping procedures
§ Installation of additional lighting
§ Use ventilation system
§ Noise reduction systems
§ Vibration damping
§ Use of PPE
§ Relocation (isolation by place)
§ Rescheduling (isolation by time)
§ Redesign of the work area.
§ Height
§ Weight
§ Distance

Using A Job Hazard Analysis

§ Developing or updating SOP’s
§ Training employees
§ Observing employee performance
§ Conducting inspections
§ Investigating accidents

Develop / improve SOP’s

§ To constantly improve / develop written procedures to perform the job in the safest &
healthiest way possible.

Employee Training
§ Ensuring that each job step is performed safely & efficiently
§ To point out particular job steps / hazards that require special precautions.
§ Refresher training (infrequent jobs)
§ Increase awareness on hazards

Employee Observations
§ Guide in employee performance observations
§ Allows supervisors to focus on especially hazardous steps
§ Ensures employee is performing steps according to SOP
213 | P a g e


Inspections
§ When developing inspection checklists, supervisors can use JHA’s to help identify
hazardous conditions that may need to be included.

Accident Investigations
§ To determine if the job was being performed incorrectly
§ To tell if a hazard was overlooked in the initial analysis.

214 | P a g e


MODULE 18:
ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION

Regretfully, accidents now place fifth in the leading cause of deaths in the Philippines (June
2015 The Medical Grind Medical News) worldwide. Employee safety records speak of man-
hours worked safely while Lost Time, on the other hand, is the technical term for an accident.
It can maim or kill a worker and put a halt to the construction project.

Objective: To teach the participant to conduct investigations systematically

Accidents are the result of:

§ Hazardous Acts
§ Hazardous Conditions

Purpose of Accident Investigation

• to determine the cause of accidents and to prevent similar accidents in the future
• to fulfill the legal requirement
• to determine the cost of an accident
• to determine compliance with applicable safety regulations
• to process workers' compensation claims

215 | P a g e


All accidents must be investigated:

• LTA
• Non-LTA
• Property Damage
• Near Misses

Near-Miss or dangerous occurrence is an event that could have caused harm but:
• Did not happen
• Could happen …
• still subject for investigation

Accident Investigations are usually considered a Supervisors responsibility. Advantages

of Supervisors over other investigators:
§ More familiar with the people involved
§ Better understanding of the operations and equipment
§ Personal interest in Investigations

Method or process of accident investigation

• Control the Scene

• Report the incident occurrence to a designated person within the organization.
• Provide first aid and medical care to injured person(s) and prevent further injuries or damage.

The incident investigation team would perform the following general steps:

• Scene management and scene assessment (secure the scene, make sure it is safe for
investigators to do their job).
• Witness management (provide support, limit interaction with other witnesses, interview).
• Investigate the incident, collect data.
• Analyze the data, identify the root causes.
• Report the findings and recommendations.

The organization would then:

• Develop a plan for corrective action.

• Implement the plan.
• Evaluate the effectiveness of the corrective action.
• Make changes for continual improvement.

Controlling Remaining Hazards

If a hazardous environment or toxic materials exist:
§ Notify necessary personnel
§ Provide PPE to potentially exposed
§ Refer to MSDS

216 | P a g e


Isolate the site

§ To protect people from further injury
§ To preserve evidence and valuable clues

Investigate immediately
§ Operations are disrupted
§ Memories fade
§ Employees are at risk

Steps in Conducting the Investigation

1. Gather information
2. Analyze the facts
3. Make recommendations

1. Gathering Information (Preliminary Facts)

§ NOI, POI, DOI, TOI
§ personnel involved
§ property damage
§ environmental harm

Sources of Information
§ Witnesses
§ Physical evidence at the scene
§ Existing records

Witnesses (these satisfy the 5 senses: sight, hearing, touch, smell, taste)
§ Victim and onlookers
§ Those who heard what happened
§ Saw area prior to incident
§ Others with info about involved individuals, equipment or circumstances

Skills in Interviewing Witnesses

The purpose of the interview is to establish an understanding with the witness and to obtain his or her
own words describing the event:
DO...

• put the witness, who is probably upset, at ease

• emphasize the real reason for the investigation, to determine what happened and why
• let the witness talk, listen
• confirm that you have the statement correct
• try to sense any underlying feelings of the witness
• make short notes or ask someone else on the team to take them during the interview
• ask if it is okay to record the interview, if you are doing so
• close on a positive note

DO NOT...

• intimidate the witness

• interrupt

217 | P a g e


• prompt
• ask leading questions
• show your own emotions
• jump to conclusions

Ask open-ended questions that cannot be answered by simply "yes" or "no". The actual questions
you ask the witness will naturally vary with each incident, but there are some general questions that
should be asked each time:

• Where were you at the time of the incident?

• What were you doing at the time?
• What did you see, hear?
• What were the work environment conditions (weather, light, noise, etc.) at the time?
• What was (were) the injured worker(s) doing at the time?
• In your opinion, what caused the incident?
• How might similar incidents be prevented in the future?

Asking questions is a straightforward approach to establishing what happened. But, care must be
taken to assess the accuracy of any statements made in the interviews.
Another technique sometimes used to determine the sequence of events is to re-enact or replay them
as they happened. Care must be taken so that further injury or damage does not occur. A witness
(usually the injured worker) is asked to reenact in slow motion the actions that happened before the
incident

A Healthy tip in asking Questions

When you ask questions, pretend you are blind, and you want a description, which you can picture
in your imagination.

Steps in Preparing Reports

Physical Evidence
These are the objects that the witness saw, heard, felt, tasted and smelled. Provides information
about an accident that witnesses may overlook or take for granted. In absence of the objects,
there are 2 additional tools that serve as physical evidence:

a. Sketches
To record details at the accident site for later study Include everything that could be
important:
§ Floor plan from overhead view
§ Location of involved man, machine, tool
§ Size/location of transient evidences (spills, dust, footprints, skid marks)

b. Photographs – these tools capture

§ detail
§ color differences
§ complex shapes difficult to recall

218 | P a g e


c. When taking Photographs, follow some tips

§ General area
§ Detailed shots
§ Show scale on small objects
§ Indicate reference point
§ Better to take too many than too few

d. Examining: Materials, Machines, Environment

Machines & Equipment

§ Physical condition
§ Position of switches/levers
§ Reading of gauges
§ Safeguards

e. Analyzing the Facts

§ Fault trees
§ Process safety review
§ Change analysis- Compares how a job was actually performed with the way it should
have been performed

f. Recommending Corrective Actions

§ Specific
§ Measurable
§ Attainable
§ Realistic
§ Time-bound

g. Follow-up -
It’s the best way to ensure that recommendations are carried out

h. Report forms require four basic types of information

§ General information
§ A Summary
§ An Analysis
§ Recommendations

Reports should be
§ Clear
§ Detailed
§ Neat
§ Legible

Accident Investigation is not just for incidents involving serious injury, it’s for ANY
occurrence that has even the POTENTIAL of causing harm.

219 | P a g e


DOLE Report Form

Please refer to DOLE/BWC/OHSD/IP-6, otherwise known as the “Employees Work
Accident / Illness Report” form on page 89 or to your OSH standards

Employees Work Accident / Illness Report

Included in the OSH Standards is Rule 1050: Notification and Keeping id Records of
Accidents and/or Occupational Illnesses.

Aside from your company’s own report form, the DOLE/BWC requires that accidents and
work-related illnesses be reported. (Reference: DOLE/BWC/OHSD/IP-6)

OSHS Rule 1050 and DO 13:

Disabling Work Accidents And Illnesses
• must be reported to DOLE Regional Office on or before the 20th of the month

Accident or illness resulting to death or permanent total disability

• Must be reported to DOLE Regional office within 24 hours;
• DOLE will conduct investigation within 24 hours upon receipt of report

Dangerous occurrences w/c may or may not cause harm or damage:

• Boiler explosion
• Bursting of grinding wheel
• Collapse of cranes, winch, hoist
• Fire (plant stoppage not less than 24 hours)
• Failure of electrical machinery (plant stoppage not less than 24 hours)

These are of use in statistical analysis of accidents & Illnesses

Actual Loss Measurements (Injuries)

§ Disabling injury frequency rate (FR)
§ Disabling injury sensitivity rate (SR)
§ Disabling injury index
§ Serious injury frequency rate (FR)
§ Non-LTI frequency rate (FR)

Calculation of Frequency and Severity Rate:

# !" #$%&'($)* $)+,-$.%

Disabling Injury (FR) = ( ) ∗ 0, 111, 111
.23(!4.. 5!,-% !" .63!%,-.

Disabling Injury (SR) = (7!7&( #&4% 85&-*.#) ∗ 0, 111, 111

employee hours of exposure

220 | P a g e


;6 <;
Disabling Injury index = :
0, 11

The other forms found in the appendix of your OSH standards will be discussed as needed.

221 | P a g e


MODULE 19:
ROLE OF SAFETY OFFICERS

Management reveals its presence through a key person known as safety officer – a professional
whose tasks have been outlined on OSHS Rule 1030. At the end of this course, the participant will
join the ranks as a safety officer.

Objectives: This section discusses the task and responsibilities, which his office will carry out.

Importance of having a Safety Officer On Construction Site

The Construction Safety officer is an employee of the company trained by DOLE or by a

DOLE-Accredited Training Organization and tasked by the employer to implement the
Construction OSH programs. He should ensure that the programs are in accordance with the
provisions of the OSH standards highlighting DOLE DO 13.

A construction safety officer ensures that construction workers are following the established policies
(Construction Safety and Health Program) and other applicable safety regulations.

222 | P a g e


The Category of Safety Officer is stated under the Section 14 of DOLE DO 198-18 as follows:

Minimum OSH
Category Prescribed Training on OSH
Experience
Mandatory eight (8)-hour OSH orientation course
Safety Officer 1
and -
(SO1)
Two (2) - hour trainers’ training
Safety Officer 2 Mandatory forty (40)-hour basic
-
(SO2) OSH training course applicable to the industry

a. Mandatory forty (40)-hour basic OSH training

course applicable to the industry;
At least two
b. Additional forty-eight (48) hours of
(2)
Safety Officer 3 advanced/specialized occupational safety training
years of
(SO3) course relevant to the industry;
experience in
and
OSH
c. Other requirements as prescribed by the OSH
standards.

a. Mandatory forty (40)-hour OSH training

course applicable to the industry;
b. Additional eighty (80) hours of advanced/
specialized occupational safety training
course relevant to the industry;
c. An aggregate of three hundred twenty (320) Actual experience
Safety Officer 4 hours of OSH related training or experience as SO3 for at
(SO4) (additional training may be converted to years least
of experience where eighty [80] hours of four (4) years
training may equal to one [1] year of
experience and vice versa.);
and
d. Other requirements as prescribed by the OSH
standards.

Requirement to be an accredited safety practitioner in the construction industry

Under Rule 1030 of the Occupational Safety and Health Standards as amended by Department Order
No. 16, Series of 2001, the Accreditation of Practitioners, Consultants and Organizations on
Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) is issued to OSH Personnel and Training Organizations to assist
the Department in instituting new and update existing programs to ensure safe and healthful working
conditions in all places of employment (Article 162 Book IV, Title I, of the Labor Code of the
Philippines, as amended).

Client/s/Applicant/s
• Qualifications of Practitioners who are qualified to practice OSH in the Philippines: Must
have completed the prescribed 40-hour Basic Occupational Safety and Health Training
Course from DOLE accredited or recognized organizations.

223 | P a g e


• Must have relevant experience in occupational safety and health. Three (3) years experience
is required if applicant is duly licensed, four (4) years experience, if graduate of any 4 or 5
years college course without license and ten (10) years experience if college undergraduate.
• Relevant experience shall mean actual work experience on OSH or a combination of actual
work experience and attendance or participation in various trainings, seminars and other
related learning processes.
Roles and responsibilities of construction safety officers
The main responsibility of a safety officer is keeping employees, the company, and the surrounding
community safe from safety and environmental hazards. The responsibilities of the safety officer are
clearly defined under Department Order 198-18, Section 14. In the implementation of OSH program,
safety officers shall be employed or designated with the following duties and responsibilities:

a) Oversee the overall management of the OSH program in coordination with the OSH committee;
b) Frequently monitor and inspect any health or safety aspect of the operation being undertaken
with the participation of supervisors and workers;
c) Assist government inspectors in the conduct of safety and health inspection at any time
whenever work is being performed or during the conduct of an accident investigation by
providing necessary information and OSH reports as required by the OSH standards; and
d) Issue Work Stoppage Order (WSO) when necessary based on the requirements and procedures
provided by the OSH standards.

OSHS Rule 1047: Duties of the Safety Man

The principal function of the safety man is to act as the employee principal assistant and the consultant
in the application of programs to remove the hazards from workplace and to the correct unsafe work
practices. For the purpose, the safety man has the following duties.
1. Serves as the secretary to the health and safety committee, As such, he shall:
• Prepare minutes meeting;
• Report status of Recommendation made;
• Notify Members of the meeting; and
• Submit a report of the activities of the committee, including recommendation made to
employer.
2. Acts in an advisory capacity on all matters pertaining to health and safety for the guidance of
the employer and the workers.
3. Conducts investigations of accidents as a member of the health and safety committee and
submits his separate report and analysis of accidents to the employer.
4. Coordinate all health and safety training programs for the employees and employer.
5. Conducts health and safety inspection as a member of the committee.
6. Maintains or help in the maintenance if an efficient accident record system and coordinates
actions taken by supervisors to eliminate accident causes.
7. Provides assistance to government agencies in the conduct of safety and health inspections,
accident investigation or any other related programs.
8. For the purpose of the effectiveness in a workplace where fulltime safety man is required, he
shall report directly to the employer.

224 | P a g e


MODULE 20:
TOOL BOX MEETING

Clear instructions and daily updates are the concerns in a Toolbox Meeting or TBM. This is a
short meeting usually held to discuss safety health conditions in the workplaces. The name
‘Toolbox Meeting” became popular since a group of workers meet together when a leader sat
or stood-up on a Toolbox to preside over a meeting. It is usually held in the morning before
starting to work.

Objectives:
The participant should be able to list the function of TBM; as well as list the steps to prepare
and carry out the meeting proper.

Tool box meeting (TBM)

Sometimes called as gang meeting” refers to daily meeting among workers and their
respective supervisors for the purpose of instructions, discussion and proper briefing on
the planned work, the assessment of past work, the possibility or actual occurrence of
accidents at the site, tips and suggestions on how to prevent possible accidents and
other related matters.
• a 10-15 minute on-the-job meetings held to keep employees alert to work-
related accidents and illnesses.
• Proven technique for safe work habit.
• Explain the role of each worker (proper work assignment);
• Confirm the qualification and skill of each worker;
• Discover safety problems by danger searching activity;
• Check clothing and protective devices of workers (hang-over, lack of
sleep, etc.)

225 | P a g e


Importance and Benefit of Toolbox Talks

1. PREVENTING ACCIDENTS:
Promotes safety awareness, encourages employee involvement in the safety program. Introduces
workers to new safety rules, equipment, preventive practices and motivates workers to follow
standard operating procedures.

2. TRAINING:
Toolbox Talks Helps when reviewing new laws or industry standards, company policies, and
procedures. The market is continuously altering and evolving and without consistent knowing,
your workers are going to fall behind without any method to capture up. Toolbox talks not only
keep your crew up to date on the latest safety news however on how safety is altering and
advancing.

3. GOOD COMMUNICATION:
Opening lines of interaction in an everyday setting keeps little things from slipping through the
cracks and going unnoticed. If there are tools that are broken or outdated, this is a method to let
management understand they need to be replaced or to remind other employees not to use them.

DO 13 Section 5.1 b
The Construction Safety and Health Program shall state specific safety policies which the General
Constructor undertakes to observe and maintain in its construction site, including the frequency of
and persons responsible for conducting toolbox and gang meetings.

Requirements in Conducting TBM

Toolbox meeting can be held as far as suitable topics to be discussed are available, enthusiasm of
discussion & safety officer are in place. Furthermore, the following conditions support successful
TBM.

Management Support
Conducting a toolbox meeting during working hours is almost impossible without management
support. At first, it is only a waste of time. Management should understand toolbox meeting must
be performed since workers would enhance to involve themselves in discussing issues and
problems on the safety and health conditions. In return, such this meeting will benefit company in
form of low production cost and quality product improvement if an appropriate accident
prevention measure is taken.

Careful Preparation
It is necessary to make careful preparations before conducting a toolbox meeting or it may result
in setbacks. The following are the necessary preparations to be made before the meeting.

a. Significance of the meeting should be firmly decided

It is better to conduct a meeting in the morning. Initially meeting may exceed to more than
twenty (20) minutes because of lack of preparation, poor experience in managing meeting
or long discussions that result to waste of time. It is recommended finishing the meeting
within 10 – 15 minutes once it is underway. Frequency of the meeting should be more than
twice a month and less than twice a week. Meeting should be decided based on actual

226 | P a g e


conditions or each workplace. Therefore, it is advisable that a leader should be a supervisor,

shift supervisor, or a safety officer.

b. Topic of the meeting should be clearly supplied

In order to make a Toolbox meeting fruitful, topic to be discussed should be properly
selected. Safety officer of a leader in-charge of the meeting must understand issues and
problems on safety and health commonly arising during the performance of the job. It may
happen through company publications. The office in charge of safety and health or a safety
officer should endeavor to supply appropriate information as a primary topic to discuss.
Examples of causes of accidents occurring in the plant, countermeasures taken, unsafe
behavior, etc. are also considered to be suitable subjects for discussions.

c. Training of Meeting Leaders

A toolbox meeting is not just meeting for discussing process operation. TBM becomes
valuable if definite conclusions are made as a result of exchanges of positive opinions of all
the participants. A toolbox meeting can end with failure of insufficient responses are made
by the participants. So, how can we convince the attendees be increased? Of course, it is
necessary to select a multiple that participants/workers always understand safety and health
problems. More important factors for successful meeting should be enriched culture and
skillful chairmanship of a leader.

Who Should Attend the TBM

All employees must attend their specific TBM.

How to Conduct TBM

§ Prepare the workers
§ Define the job
§ Procedure & responsibility
§ Precautions needed
• hazards present
• safety & health reminders
• use of PPE

Planning for Tool Box Meeting

§ When should the meetings be held?
§ Who will be required to attend the meetings?
§ What topics will be discussed at the meetings?
§ What kind of preparations will be required for the meetings?
§ What kind of records will be kept of the meetings?

How to Proceed with Toolbox Meeting

• First Stage – Introduction
This is a stage to prepare a good mood of the meeting. It is necessary to make the
participants and let them feel the sense of intimacy with the meeting. Topic to be discussed
is given to the participants to draw their interest in the topic and to let them direct their
attentions towards the problem.
• Second Stage – Draw Attendees Opinion
At this stage, drawing participant’s opinions and ideas on the topic is necessary to urge
227 | P a g e


utterances of as many participants as possible. Leader should take control of the

discussions and should focus on the topic, less discussions should be confused, and lest
discussion should be monopolized by one speaker.
• Third Stage – Summarizing
This is the stage to draw conclusions by looking back all the discussions made during the
meeting. If no conclusions has been made available methods for putting into practice must
be decided. On the problems to which no conclusion was drawn, it should be decided how
to handle these problems in the future.
Management Procedures of TBM
Describe below are the orthodox management procedures of Toolbox meeting. However,
it should be pointed out that it is not necessary to stick in such procedures. At any rate, the
meeting can be regarded as successful opinions are exchanged, and if the leader
successfully drew conclusions made during the meeting. Remarks for successful
management of toolbox meeting are as follows:

1. Although the leader should predict the conclusion of the meeting in advance, he should not
limit the course of the meeting towards the conclusion to be only one since there are many
view and ideas on one thing.
2. If original opinions or mistaken ideas are raised during the meeting, the leader should not
deny such opinions immediately, but he should ask opinions of other participants, ideas,
and make the speaker consent his opinion’s impertinence based on overall judgment.
3. If the problem is of implicated, it should be broken into several items and discussions
should not be made on each of the items one after another. Once the conclusion is obtained
on one item, the leader should clearly notify the conclusions to all of the attendees for the
confirmation before proceeding to the next item. If there are too many problems, to be
discussed, it is recommended to leave off the discussion at a certain point, and carry over
the rest to the next morning.
4. Meeting may come to a deadlock or may become excessively emotional sometimes. In
such cases, the leader shut the points at the issue in order before the atmosphere or the
meeting becomes serious as soon as possible.
5. The leader should always manage the meeting with confidence and quite calm. He should
not lose his positions as a leader being excited with him when the discussion becomes
heated.
6. In toolbox meeting, all of the attendees are principally in a position to discuss on equal
terms. Therefore, leader should not assume instructive attitude or suppress his subordinates’
utterances by abusing his organizational position.
7. Toolbox meeting become meaningless if it is excessively dragged on. Therefore, the
meeting should proceed tactfully and should be closed at fixed time. However, it is not
advisable to close the meeting while the discussion is still going on. Attendees of the
meeting should try to obtain at least one conclusion at the end of the meeting under any
circumstances.
8. At the end of the meeting, as many materials are possible, which are related to the
discussion, subjects should be distributed to the attendees. This will make the toolbox
meeting more meaningful. It is desirable that materials to be distributed here are of pocket
size. Attendees will become more intimate with those materials if they were prepared in
the workplace.

228 | P a g e


MODULE 21:
EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS

Discussion is now turned to emergencies. Part and parcel of any occupational health and
safety program is emergency preparedness. This section is reserved for that discussion.

Objectives:
At the close of the session, the participant will be able to:
1. Give the basic responses to emergency situations
2. Cite a guide on identifying scenarios in the company
3. Categorize a plan to prepare individuals for such occurrences.

Some Definitions
• Emergency – a sudden event, possibly life threatening case, demanding immediate
action.
• Pro-Active Safety – This is when people anticipate and prepare for incidents, not
waiting for them to happen; it starts with a basic assumption that they can work in the
workplace without accidents. They believe they have the ability and capacity to work
without suffering accidental damage to themselves or to the materials with which they
work.
• Reactive safety – This is when people prepare for incidents, because they had suffered
an accident. This is the only time that the person will consider safety as a consequence
only after the injuries or damage to properties occurred.
• Hazard Identification – recognizing situations that may lead to accidents or injuries.
o Chemical Hazards
o Mechanical Hazards
o Electrical Hazard
o Bio-Physical Hazards

229 | P a g e


Examples of hazardous conditions:

o Flammable liquids
o Excessively sharp instruments
o Unguarded in-running or nip points
o Chemical is gaseous and toxic
o Noise machinery
o The old electrical wire is energized
o The steel drum contained heptane chemical
o Abrasive dust is in the air

General Procedures in Response to Different Types of Emergencies

First Aid – is the immediate care given to a victim who has been injured or suddenly taken
ill.
a. Role of First Aider
o Serves as the bridge the fills the gap between the victim and the
physician
o He is not to compete with nor take the place of the physician
o He will assist the physician when the medical team later arrives
b. Objectives in Giving First Aid
o To alleviate suffering of the victim
o To prevent added injury to the victim and to prevent further harm
o To prolong the life of the victim
c. Emergency Action Principle
o Survey the scene
o Do the primary survey of the victim
o Activate medical assistance or transfer facility
o Do the secondary survey of the victim

Shock
Is depressed condition of many body functions due to failure of enough blood to circulate
throughout the body following a serious injury. This can be caused by Severe bleeding, heart
attack, starvation, crushing injury, Perforation of stomach, disease, infection, poisoning.

Objective of First Aid to Shock victims

1. To improve circulation of the blood
2. To ensure adequate supply of oxygen
3. To maintain normal body temperature

Wound
Is a break in the continuity in the body either internal or external.
First Aid for Open Wounds
1. Control bleeding
2. Stop contamination
3. Refer to physician

230 | P a g e


Earthquake
• DUCK, COVER, HOLD
• Act quickly! Protect your body from falling debris by getting under sturdy desk, table
or doorway
• Keep away from glass windows and free standing furniture

• When outside, stay away from tall buildings, move to an open field
• At the end of initial shock, evacuate building when given clearance by the Safety
Officer
• Go to the assembly area assigned near your position

Fire Emergency
• Sound the alarm
• Alert the Fire Department
• Fight the fire
• Evacuate the assembly
area

Most fires are relatively small when they start, they can be easily handled with portable fire
extinguishers. Therefore, industrial firefighters should be familiar with the types and location
of fire extinguisher distributed throughout the plant. Brigade members should know how fire
extinguisher work, how they are used, and how they are maintained.

231 | P a g e


Proper Used of Fire Extinguisher

1. Determine the class of fire and use appropriate type of fire extinguisher
2. Check the content/pressure
3. Pull safety pin
4. Extend discharged horn toward the base of fire
5. Approach the fire with the win at your back
6. Apply with back and forth horizontal sweeping motion
7. Direct the stream at base of fire except burning liquid on open top container

Requirements for Fire Extinguish

1. Be kept fully charged and in their designated places, along normal paths of travel
2. Not be obstructed or obscured from view
3. Not be mounted higher than 5 ft. or 1.5 m. to the top of the extinguisher if they weigh
40 lbs.
4. Be inspected by management or a designated employee at least monthly to make
sure that they are in their designated places, they have not tampered with or actuated
and they do not have corrosion or other impairments.
5. Be examined at least yearly and/or re-charged or repaired to ensure operability and
safety. A tag must be attached to show the maintenance or re-charged date and
signature or initials of the person performing the service.
6. Be hydrostatically tested.
7. Be selected on the basis of type of hazard, degree of hazard, and area to be protected.
8. Be placed so that the maximum travel, distances, unless there are extremely
hazardous conditions do not exceed 75 ft. or 23 m. for Class A Extinguisher or 50
ft. for Class B Extinguisher.

After Use
• Have your extinguisher re-charged or replace immediately even if only partially
discharged.
• A momentary discharged could cost total lost pressure.
• Bring your unit to a qualified fire extinguisher service agency for re-charging, repair or
test.
• Non-refillable extinguishers should be identified, and a replacement should be obtained
immediately for continued fire protection.
• Do not dispose used fire extinguisher by throwing on fire.
• Do not refill your extinguisher with any material other than that specified on the nameplate.
This may cause damage to the extinguisher causing to rapture, resulting to bodily injuries.

Fire Hose

Is a flexible material use to convey water under pressure from the source of water to the scene of fire.

232 | P a g e


Types of Fire Hose

• Woven-jacket, rubber lined – Consist of a lining or tubing made of natural or synthetic
rubber covered by a woven jacket of cotton and synthetic fibers.
• Wrapped or Braded in Plies – Consist of a rubber tube reinforced by a wrapped or braded
fabric and an outer rubber called “booster hose” and is used in ¾ “and 1” sizes by fire
departments.
• Unlined Hose – Consist of a fabric tube, usually made of linen, when the fabric becomes
wet, the tread swell and make the tube watertight, this type of hose is use at indoor standpipe
locations where it can be kept dry when not in use.

Straight Ladder – also called wall ladder, made in one section only.
Extension Ladder – generally made of 2 or 3 sections. (Fly Ladder-Upper section,
Bed Ladder - Lowest section)
3. Roof Ladder – a straight ladder with a pair of hooks mounted at the top secure
to it
4. Collapsible Ladder – useful for inside work, can be easily carried up stairways.
Aerial Ladder – operated by hydraulic power that is mounted upon a specially
5.
built chassis.
6. Tower Ladder – Combines some features of both aerial ladder and elevating
233 | P a g e ladder.



Ladders
Fire service ladders are similar to any other ladders in shape, design and purpose, but the way
in which they are use requires them to be constructed under rigid specifications. Their use under
adverse conditions further requires them to provide a margin of safety not usually expected of
commercial ladder

Rescue
Rescue Operation is the careful removal of victim from the unsafe place of safety.

Five Questions to Remember

1. Is there anybody inside?
2. If so, are they in danger?
3. How could they be reached?
4. What must be done to affect the rescue?
5. Is additional help necessary?

Search and Rescue Procedures

1. Always wear protective apparatus when performing search and rescue in fire building.
2. By observing exterior of building, locate more than one means of egress.
3. Once you enter the building, visibility will be poor at best. If you cannot see your feet, do
not remain standing, search on hand and feet.
4. Completely search one room before moving to the next room.
5. Start your search on an outside wall. This will allow you to ventilate by opening windows
as soon as possible. Ventilate only if ventilation will not cause spread of fire.
6. Move all furniture, searching behind and under.
7. Search all closets and cupboard including shower stalls.
8. Occasionally, pause during search and listen for cries of help or other such signs or signals.
9. Move up and down stairs on your hands and knees, keeping heads up whether ascending
or descending.
10. After searching a room, leave a sign or signs indicating that room had been searched. Chairs
turned over, mattress rolled, folded or sideways on bed, closet doors open. But close entry
door to room to prevent the spread of fire.
11. Always look for extension of fire and report any extension to Commanding officer.

Ventilation is to remove smoke gases and heated air allowing pure air to circulate through the
involved building. It plays an important part in the attack, control and extinguishments of
building fires. Firefighters cannot work inside a building until smoke, gases and heated air had
been reduced.

Objective:
• To relieve the structure of accumulated heat and gases thereby making entry possible
• To draw heat, smoke and gases up to the selected channel, thereby preventing the
spread of fire.
• To safely remove accumulated heat, smoke and gases thereby preventing back draft.

234 | P a g e


And the best way to prevent a fire is to HAVE NO FIRE AT ALL

Gauge Pin

Handle

Nozzle

Tank

Fire Extinguisher
Storm/Food

• Stay indoors and keep calm

• Monitor your TV and radio reports
• Trim trees near dwellings
• Keep road clear for emergency vehicles If our house is in flood-area zone, to the
nearest designated evacuation center
• Have a flashlight and radio handy, with fresh batteries
• Stock up on food, potable water, kerosene, batteries and first-aid supplies
• In case of flooding, turn off main source of electricity, gas and water in your home
• Stack the furniture above the expected flood. Keep appliances, valuables, chemicals,
toxic substances, and garbage beyond reach of flood waters.
• Avoid low-lying areas, riverbanks, creeks and coastal areas, slopes, cliffs and
foothills. Rains can trigger landslides, rockslides, or mudslides
• Avoid wading through flooded areas. Do not attempt to cross flowing streams
• Do not operate any electrical equipment during a flood
• Do not use gas or electrical appliances that have been flooded

Boom Threat
If a bomb or suspicious object is discovered – do not touch it, clear the area
• Notify security police
• Prevent other personnel from going into the area
• Security will take any other action required

Evacuation
On hearing the alarm signal, gather vital personal effects and go for the nearest exit near you.
• Go to the assembly area at the open field assigned near your present location
• If you are away from normal work floor, obey instructions from safety officer of that
floor
• Do not attempt to return to your own floor

235 | P a g e


If you happen to receive a call

Attract the attention of another staff member to ring your local hotline
1. Record details of threat as per procedure given; do not hang up your phone
2. Try to record exact words; keep the caller talking (try to obtain as much information
as possible)
3. Security will take further action required

Questions to Ask
• When is the bomb going to explode?
• Where is it right now?
• What does it look like?
• What kind of bomb is it?
• What will cause the bomb to explode?
• Who placed the bomb?
• Why?
• Where are you?
• What is your name?

Security
Most senior security officer on-duty shall respond when an emergency arising from fire,
earthquake and explosions occurs upon notice given by the safety officer
• The compound shall be cordoned to prevent unauthorized person’s entry
• Security Officers shall supervise crown control to prevent employees and looters
around the affected area.
• Follow the safe and orderly evacuations of employees to the assembly area.

FIRST AID

236 | P a g e


Objective: To give initial aid when and where it is needed in order to save victims, prevent
complications, and reduce debilitating injuries.

First Aid – is an immediate care given to a person who has been injured or suddenly taken ill. It
includes self-help and home care when medical assistance begins.

Roles Of First Aider

Bridge that fills the gap between the victim and the physician.
• It is not intended to complete with or to take the place of the services of the physician.
• It ends when medical assistance begins.

Objectives:
1. To alleviate suffering.
2. To prevent added or further injury or danger.
3. To prolong life.

Emergency Action Principes

• Survey the scene.
• Do a Primary Survey of the Victim.
• Active Medical Assistance or Transfer Facility.
• Do a Secondary Survey of the Victim.

Survey the Scene: Is the scene safe?

1. What happened?
2. How many people are injured?
3. Are there bystanders who can help?
If you are a trained first aider, identify yourself as one.

Primary Survey of the Victim

A – Airway
• Do the head tilt/chin lift maneuver.
• Is the victim conscious or unconscious?
B – Breathing
• Do the LLF (Listen, Look and Feel)
• Is the victim breathing?
• It is shallow or deep?
• Is he cyanotic?
C – Circulation
• Check the carotid pulse.
• Is the victim’s heart beating?
• Assess the pulse, Is he severely bleeding?

Do a Secondary Survey of the Victim

1. Interview the victim
2. Check vital signs
3. Do the head-to-toe examination

237 | P a g e


What to do:
1. Obtain consent, whenever possible.
2. Think the worst.
3. Call or send for HELP.
4. Identify yourself to the victim.
5. Provide comfort and emotional support.
6. Respect victim’s modesty and physician privacy.
7. Care for the most serious injuries first.
8. Assist the victim with his or her prescribed medication.
9. Keep onlookers away from the injured person.
10. Loosen all tight clothing.

What not to do:

1. Do not harm by trying to arouse an unconscious victim (administering
fluids/alcoholic drink)
2. Do not let victim see his own injury.
3. Do not leave the victim except to get HELP.
4. Do not assume that the victim’s obvious injuries are the only ones.
5. Do not deny a victim’s physical or emotional coping limitations.
6. Do not make unrealistic promises.
7. Do not trust the judgment of a confused victim.
8. Do not require the victim to make the decision.
Wounds – a break in the continuity of the tissue. Most common form of injury

First Aid for open wounds

1. Stop the bleeding
2. Prevent infection

Four ways to stop the bleeding

D – direct pressure – pressure is directly applied over the wound (except if it is the eye)
E – elevation raise the body part above the level of the victims heart – just be sure there is
no fracture
P – Pressure point bleeding control – pressure on the supplying artery.
T – Tourniquet







Abrasion Laceration Incision Puncture Avulsion

238 | P a g e


MODULE 22:
EMPLOYEES COMPENSATION PROGRAM

Down time or Loss time occurs during accidents. Affected workers who suffer physical injuries
get assistance through the Employees Compensation Commission Program (ECP). It was
established as an improvement over the old Workmen’s Compensation Program (WCP), as
created by a written policy (P.D.626) under the Labor Code of the Philippines. Both programs
provide benefits to workers in case of work-connected contingencies.

Objectives: By the end of the ECC Module, the participant will be able to list the different
compensable diseases and injuries under the law. He can also point out the instances that will
label the injury as work-related.

WCP provides for a litigious process between the employee and employer where the
responsibility of compensating the employee is with the employer. ECP is simple and non-
litigious, benefits are paid from a fund that is managed and guaranteed by the government.

It is a government agency mandated by the law to provide meaningful and appropriate

compensation to workers in the event of WORK-RELATED CONTINGENCIES. Its main
function are:
1. Formulate policies and guidelines for the improvement of the employees compensation
program
2. To review and decide on appeal all EC claims disapproved by the Systems
3. To initiate policies and programs towards adequate occupational health and safety and
accident prevention in the working environment.

Eight members of the Commission

1) Secretary of Labor – Chairman
239 | P a g e


2) SSS Head
3) GSIS Head
4) Phil Health Chair
5) CSC Chair
6) EC Exec Director Employer Representative
7) Employee Representative

ECP is the present compensation package for public and private sector employees and their
dependents in the event of work-related contingencies. It was created under Presidential Decree
No. 626, which was made effective on January 1975.

The ECP is for public and private sector employees and their dependents. All sectors in industry
are covered. All employers are required by law to have their employees covered by the SSS or
GSIS, which is requirement for them to be covered by the ECP.

Designed to provide employees and their families with

• Income benefits
• Medical and
• Other benefits
It is for work-connected sickness/disease, injury or death.

Compensable Diseases:
Under Annex “A” of PD 626 as amended: For an occupational disease and the resulting
disability of death to be compensable, all of the following conditions must be satisfied:
1. The employee’s work and / or the working conditions must involve risk/s that caused
the development of the illness;
2. The disease was contracted as a result of the employee’s exposure to described risks;
3. The disease was contracted within a period of exposure and under such other factors
necessary to contract it;
4. There was no deliberate act on the part the employee to disregard the safety measures
or ignore established warning or precaution
5. Not any disease is compensable
6. Only diseases caused by work or the working environment compensable
7. List of 32 Occupational Disease with specific conditions set – conditions or risk
factors on the job must be present for the disease to be compensable

Newly amended rules in Annex “A” of PD 626

• Cardiovascular Diseases, BR No. 11-05-13, May 26, 2011
• Cerebrovascular Accidents, BR No. 11-05-13, May 26, 2011
• Essential Hypertension, BR No. 11-05-13, May 26, 2011
• Tuberculosis (Pulmonary & Extra pulmonary) BR. No. 11-11-29,
Nov 28, 2011
• Pneumoconiosis, BR No. 12-09-18, Sept 27, 2012
• Pneumonia, BR No. 12-09-18, Sept 27, 2012
• Occupational Asthma, BR No. 12-09-18, Sept 27, 2012
• Asbestos-related Diseases, BR No. 12-09-18, Sept 27, 2012
• Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis, BR No. 12-09-18, Sept 27,
Year 2012
• Byssinosis, BR No. 12-09-18, Sept. 27, 2012
• Other diseases not in the list may still be compensable if employee can establish casual

240 | P a g e


connection with the nature of his work or the working environment

Compensable injuries
For the INJURY and the resulting disability or death to be compensable, the injury must be
the result of an accident arising out of or in the course of employment.

Work – Connected Injuries

1. Happened in the workplace
2. Happened while performing official function
3. Outside of workplace but performing an order of his employer
4. When going to or coming from work
5. While ministering to personal comfort
6. While in a company shuttle bus
7. During a company sponsored activity

Progression of Illness (deterioration) or injury

Where the primary illness or injury is shown to have arisen in the course of employment, every
natural consequence that flows from the illness or injury shall be deemed employment related.
Excepting Instance
1. Intoxication
2. Notorious negligence
3. Willful intent to injure oneself or another

ECP Benefits
1. Loss of Income Benefit
2. Medical Benefit
3. Career’s allowance
4. Death benefit
5. Rehabilitation service

Loss of income benefit – It is the incapacity to work (DISABILITY) as result of the illness
or injury that is being compensated.

Types of Disability
1. Total temporary TTD
2. Partial Total PTD
3. Partial Permanent PPD

Daily Income Benefit for TTD

• For disability not exceeding 120 days
• Paid from first day of disability
• May go beyond 120 days but not to exceed 240 days
• P200/day for public sector employees (P200/day starting May 31, 2013)
• P200/day for private sector employees

Monthly Income Benefit for PTD

• For disability that is permanent and total

• Also paid for

o Complete loss of sight of both eyes

241 | P a g e


o Loss of two limbs/permanent complete paralysis of two limbs

o Brain injury resulting in imbecility/insanity

• Guaranteed for life if disability remains until death of the worker but my be
suspended
o Failure to present for examination
o Failure to submit quarterly medical report
o Complete or full recovery
o Upon being gainfully employed
o Rehabilitation appliances e.g. hearing aid, crutches,
o Re-skilling for re-employment
o Training for entrepreneurship

Kagabay Program of ECC

o Physical therapy, Occupational therapy

Complete & Permanent Number of Months

Loss of the Use of
One Thumb 10
One index finger 8
One middle finger 6
One ring finger 5
One little finger 3
One big toe 6
Any other toe 3
One hand 39
One arm 50
One foot 31
One leg 46
One ear 10
Both ears 20
Hearing of one ear 25
Hearing of both ears 50
Sight of one eye 25

Medical Benefits
§ Ward services for hospital confinement
§ Medical attendance by an accredited doctor
242 | P a g e


§ Surgical expense benefit

§ Reimbursement of cost medicines

Career’s Allowance
• Granted to employee who gets permanently and totally disabled and has difficulty
taking care of basic personal needs
• PhP575/month allowance for private sector employees only (for public sector
employees starting May 31, 2013)

Death Benefits
• Monthly Income Benefit pension to beneficiary plus 10% for each dependent child
not exceeding five
• Funeral benefit of PhP10,000 for private sector; PhP3,000 for public sector
(PhP10,000 for public sector starting May 31, 2013)

Rehabilitation Services for ODW’s

What is the KAGABAY Program?
It is a component of the ECP that extends Rehabilitation Services to Occupationally Disabled
Workers (ODW’s)

ECC-Quick Response Team Program (ECC-QRTP)

The Employee’s Compensation Commission (ECC) extends assistance to private and public
sector employees or their dependents in the event of work-related sickness, injury, or death. In
view of this, the ECC believes that there is a need for its presence to be felt as soon as the
contingency occurs. It is on this premise that the ECC-QRTP was created.

Availing of ECP benefits

• Claims for EC Benefits are filed with the Systems
o SSS for private sector
o GSIS for public sector
• Fill up prescribed forms and attach support documents such as
o Job description
o Medical/hospital records
o PEME and annual exam reports

Prescriptive Period
No claim for compensation shall be given due course unless said claim is filed with the
systems within THREE (3) years from the time the cause of action occurred.
• Enjoyed only by those with Employee – Employer relationship
• Coverage/entitlement to benefits begin on first day of employment
• Benefits are in addition to SSS and Phil Health benefits

Employee’s Compensation Commission postal address:

4th and 5th Flr, ECC Building, 355 Sen. Gil J. Puyat Avenue, Makati City

243 | P a g e


MODULE 23:
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY and HEALTH LEGISTATION

Managing the worker, employers and maintaining industrial peace is the aim of PD 442, known
as the Labor Code of the Philippines which gave rise to the Occupational Safety and Health
Standards (OSHS).

Objective: The objective this Standard is to protect every workingman against the dangers of
injury, sickness or death through safe and healthful working conditions, thereby assuring the
conservation of valuable manpower resources and the prevention of loss or damage to lives and
properties, consistent with national development goals and with the State’s commitment for the
total development of every worker as a complete human being. The OSH Standards shall apply
to all places of employment.

By the end of this module, the participant will understood the government requirements to
maintain a healthy and safe workplace.

Enforcing Authority
The OSH Standard are enforce by the fourteen (14) Regional Labor Offices and their District
Offices of the Department of Labor and Employment (DOLE) in different parts of the country.

Penal Provision
All violations of the provisions of this OSH Standard shall be subject to the applicable penalties provided for in
the Labor Code, P.D. 442 as amended.

244 | P a g e


Scope of OSH Standard

The OSH Standard shall over all places of employment with no exemption. DOLE works hand
in hand with the Philippine Regulation Commission (PRC) and Dept. of Trade and Industry
(DTI) in seeing to the implementation of its rules. And although there are quite a number of
them, attention is drawn to the reason you are attending this course – that refers to Rule 1030.

Rule 1030. Training of Personal in Occupational Safety and Health

1) The Bureau, either directly or through accredited organizations, shall conduct

continuing programs to increase the supply and competence of personnel qualified to
carry out the provisions of the Standards.
2) The Bureau shall prescribe the required training programs, which shall, in consultation
with the UP institute of Public Health, World Health Organization and other technical
societies, contain provisions requiring the incorporation into the training programs of
the latest trends, practices and technology in occupational safety and health.

As safety officer accredited thru the BOSH course, your responsibilities include:
• Advice the employer, supervisors and workers on OSH
• Coordinate safety training programs Introduction
• Conduct safety and health inspections
• Investigate & maintaining accident records system
• Provide assistance to government agencies in the conduct of health and safety
inspections, accident investigation or any other related programs.

Occupational Safety Personnel required:

Number of Workers Hazardous Highly hazardous

1-50 1 part-time Safety Officer 1 full-time Safety Officer
51-200 1 full-time and 1 part-time 1 full-time and 1 part-time
Safety Officer
201-250 2 full-time Safety Officers 2 full-time and 1 part-time
Safety Officers
251-500 1 additional full-time
Every add’l. 500 or any
fraction thereof
Every add’l. 250 or any 1 additional full-time Safety
fraction thereof Officer

Numbers of Workers Non- Hazardous

1-250 1 part-time Safetyman (Safety Officer)
251-500 2 part-time Safetyman
501-750 1 full-time Safetyman
751-1000 2 full-time and 1 part-time Safetymen
Every additional 500 or fraction thereof 1 additional full-time Safetyman

245 | P a g e


Occupational Health Personnel required

1 bed capacity Per 100 workers in excess of 300
Contract with hospital Within 5 kms. or 25 min. of travel
Emergency Health Provider
Occupational Health Facilities

Numbers of Workers Occupational Health Personnel

50 or less First aider
51 to 100 Full-time nurse
201 to 300 Full-time nurse, part-time physician, part-time
dentist
More than 300 Full-time nurse, full-time physician, full-time
dentist

246 | P a g e


D.O.13 Series of 1998 - Guidelines Governing Occupational

Safety & Health in the Construction Industry

Section 1: Definition of terms

As used herein, the terms below shall be defined as follows:

a) “Accredited organization” means any organization duly accredited by the

Department of Labor and Employment (DOLE) delegated or authorized to perform
functions related to improvement of occupational safety and health in the form of
training, testing, certification, safety and health auditing or any other similar activity.

b) “Certified first-aider” means any person trained and duly certified or qualified to
administer first-aid by the Philippine National Red Cross or by any organization
accredited by the same.

c) “Construction project manager/consultant” means a person or entity who is hired

by the project owner, to act in the owner’s behalf concerning supervision and
monitoring of all matters related to the overall execution of a construction project. The
construction project manager shall be a separate entity from the general constructor or
any subcontractor of the construction project.
d) “Construction safety and health committee” means the general safety and health
committee for a construction project site that shall be the overall coordinator in
implementing OSH programs.

e) “Construction safety and health officer” means any employee/worker trained

and, in addition to their regular duties and responsibilities, tasked by his employer to
implement occupational safety and health programs in accordance with the provisions
of the Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHS).

247 | P a g e


f) “Construction safety and health program” refers to a set of detailed rules to cover
the processes and practices that shall be utilized in a specific construction project site in
conformity with the OSHS including the personnel responsible and the penalties for
violations thereof.

g) “Construction safety signage” refers to any, but not limited to, emergency or
danger sign, warning sign or safety instruction, of standard colors and sizes in
accordance with the specifications for standard colors of signs for safety instructions
and warnings in building premises as described in Table II of the OSHS.

h) “Constructor” is deemed synonymous with the term “builder”. It refers to any

person or organization who undertakes or offers to undertake or purports to have the
capacity to undertake or submits a bid to, or does himself or by or through others,
construct, alter, repair, add to, subtract from, improve, move, wreck or demolish any
building, highway, road, railroad, excavation or other structure, project, development
or improvement, or to do any part thereof, including the erection of scaffolding or other
structures or works in connection therewith. The term constructor includes
subcontractor and specialty contractor.

i) “Emergency health provider” means any person or organization who is certified

or recognized by the Department of Health and who can provide the same or equivalent
emergency health services as an emergency hospital, including emergency treatment of
workers on site, emergency transport and care during transport of injured workers to
the nearest hospital, with adequate personnel, supplies and facilities for the complete
immediate treatment of injuries or illnesses.

j) “General constructor” means a constructor who has general supervision over other
constructors in the execution of the project and who directly receives instructions from
the owner or construction project manager (if one is appointed by the owner).

k) “General safety and health inspection” refers to inspection of the work

environment, including the location and operation of machinery other than those
covered by technical safety inspections, adequacy of work space, ventilation, lighting,
conditions of work environment, handling, storage or work procedures, protection
facilities and other safety and health hazards in the workplace

l) “Heavy equipment” refers to any machine with engine or electric motor as prime
mover used either for lifting, excavating, leveling, drilling, compacting, transporting
and breaking works in the construction site, such as but not limited to crane, bulldozer,
backhoe, grader, road compactor, prime mover and trailer, with minimum operating
weight and horsepower rating of 1,000 KG and 10 HP, respectively.

m) “Imminent danger” means a condition or practice that could reasonably be

expected to cause death or serious physical harm before abatement under the normal
enforcement procedures can be accomplished.
n) “Occupational health personnel” refers to a qualified first-aider, nurse, dentist, or
physician, engaged by the employer to provide occupational health services in the
establishment/undertaking.

o) “Project manager” mean the overall technical personnel of the general contractor
248 | P a g e


and/or the subcontractor in charge of the actual execution of a construction project.

p) “Resident engineer” means a duly licensed engineer who shall be tasked to be

present at the construction site at all times, whenever work is being undertaken, and
shall have the responsibility of assuring the technical conformance of all designs,
materials, processes, work procedures rendered for the execution of the construction
project, including safety and health of all persons within the construction site.

q) “Safety and health audit” refers to a regular and critical examination of project
sites, safety programs, records and management performance on program standards on
safety and health.

r) “Safety and health committee” means a group tasked with the authority to
monitor, inspect, and investigate all aspects of the construction project pertaining to
health and safety of construction workers.

s) “Safety organization” means any organization recognized and accredited by the

DOLE to conduct occupational safety and health training and/or safety and health audit.

t) “Safety personnel” refers to any person engaged by any constructor, trained,

accredited by DOLE and tasked to provide occupational safety and health services for
the workers/employees in any construction project.

u) “Skills standards” refers to the written specification of the minimum stock

knowledge and skills a worker should possess to perform the functions identified in the
job description of his occupation.

v) “Technical safety inspection” refers to inspection for the purpose of safety

determination of boilers, pressure vessels, internal combustion engines, electrical
installations, elevators, hoisting equipment and other mechanical equipment.

w) “Trade test” refers to an instrument used to measure workers’ skills and

knowledge based on the requirements of the skills.

x) “Treatment Room” refers to any enclosed area or room equipped with the
necessary medical facilities and supplies, and located within the premises of the
establishment where workers maybe brought for examination and treatment of their
injuries or illnesses in cases of emergency.
y) “Tool box meeting or gang meeting” refers to daily meeting among workers and
their respective supervisors for the purpose of instruction, discussion and proper
briefing on the planned work, the assessment of past work, the possibility or actual
occurrence of accidents at the site, tips and suggestions on how to prevent possible
accidents and other related matters.

z) Unguarded surface” refers to any working surface above water or ground,

temporary or permanent floor platform, scaffold construction or wherever workers are
exposed to the possibility of falls hazardous to life or limb.

Section 2: Jurisdiction
The DOLE, through the Secretary of Labor and Employment, has the exclusive
jurisdiction in the preparation of Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHS) for
249 | P a g e


the Construction Industry including its very enforcement, as provided for by law.

1. 2.1. As embodied in Article 162, Chapter 2, Title I of Book Four of The Labor Code
of the Philippines, "The Secretary of Labor and Employment shall by appropriate
orders set and enforce mandatory occupational safety and health standards to
eliminate or reduce occupational safety and health hazards in all work places and
institute new and update existing programs to ensure safe and healthful working
conditions in all places of employment."
2. 2.2. As embodied in Article 165, Chapter 2, Title I of Book Four of The Labor Code
of the Philippines, "(a) The Department of Labor and Employment shall be solely
responsible for the administration and enforcement of occupational safety and
health laws, regulations and standards in all establishments and workplaces
wherever they may be located"

Section 3: Delegation of Authority and Accreditation

The authority to enforce mandatory occupational safety and health standards in the
construction industry may be delegated in part by the Secretary of Labor and
Employment, under the following conditions:

1. a) Chartered Cities and Municipalities may be allowed to conduct Technical Safety

Inspections and general safety audit of construction project sites within their
respective jurisdiction where they have adequate facilities and competent personnel
for the purpose as determined by the DOLE and subject to national standards
established by the latter, provided they submit for approval an application for such
authority.
2. b) Private Safety Organizations with adequate facilities and competent personnel
for the purpose, may be accredited by DOLE to conduct technical and/or general
Safety and Health Audit of construction project sites, for and in behalf of the
company or establishment.
3. c) Accreditation of safety organizations and practitioners shall be in accordance
with Rule 1030 of the OSHS.

Section 4: Coverage
This issuance shall apply to all operations and undertakings in the construction industry
and its subdivisions, namely, general building construction, general engineering
construction and specialty trade construction, based on the classification code of the
Philippine Construction Accreditation Board (PCAB) of the Construction Industry
Authority of the Philippines (CIAP); to companies and entities involved in demolition
works; and to those falling within the construction industry as may be
by the Secretary of Labor and Employment.

Section 5: Construction Safety and Health Program

Every construction project shall have a suitable Construction Safety and Health
Program, which must be in accordance with these rules, and other orders and issuances
issued by the DOLE. The Construction Project Manager, or in his absence, the Project
Manager as authorized by the owner, shall be responsible for compliance with this
Section.

2. 5.1 The Construction Safety and Health Program shall state the following:
1. a) composition of the Construction Safety and Health Committee, if one has
been formed, otherwise, an undertaking to organize such committee and
250 | P a g e


appoint its members before the start of construction work at the project site;
2. b) specific safety policies which the General Constructor undertakes to
observe and maintain in its construction site, including the frequency of and
persons responsible for conducting toolbox and gang meetings;
3. c) penalties and sanctions for violations of the Construction Safety and
Health Program;
4. d) frequency, content and persons responsible for orienting, instructing and
training all workers at the site with regard to the Construction Safety and
Health Program under which they operate; and
5. e) the manner of disposing waste arising from the construction.
3. 5.2 The Construction Safety and Health Program shall be executed and verified by
the Construction Project Manager or Project Manager and shall be submitted to the
Bureau of Working Conditions (BWC) which may approve, disapprove or modify
the same according to existing laws, rules and regulations and other issuances by the
DOLE.

5.3 The cost of implementing the Construction Safety and Health Program shall be
integrated into the project’s construction cost, provided, that said cost shall be a
separate pay item, duly quantified and stated in the project’s tender documents and
construction contract documents.

Section 6: Personal Protective Equipment

Every employer shall, at his own expense, furnish his workers with protective
equipment for eyes, face, hands and feet, lifeline, safety belt/harness, protective shields
and barriers whenever necessary by reason of the hazardous work process or
environment, chemical or radiological or other mechanical irritants or hazards capable
of causing injury or impairment in the function of any part of the body through
absorption, inhalation or physical agent.
Provision of personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be in accordance with Rule
1080 of the OSHS. The equivalent cost for the provision of PPE (life span, depreciation,
replacement, etc.) shall be an integral part of the project cost.

1. 6.1. The employer shall provide adequate and approved type of protective
equipment. Workers within the construction project site shall be required to wear
the necessary PPE at all times.
2. 6.2. Construction workers who are working from unguarded surfaces six (6) meters
or more above water or ground, temporary or permanent floor platform, scaffold or
where they are exposed to the possibility of falls hazardous to life or limb, must be
provided with safety harnesses and life lines
3. 6.3. Specialty construction workers must be provided with special protective
equipment, such as specialized goggles or respirators for welders and painters or
paint applicators.
4. 6.4. All other persons who are either authorized or allowed to be at a construction
site shall wear appropriate PPE.

Section 7: Safety Personnel

To ensure that a Construction Safety and Health Program is duly followed and enforced
at the construction project site, each construction project site is required to have the
minimum required Safety Personnel, as described herein:

7.1. The General Constructor must provide for a full time officer, who shall be assigned
251 | P a g e


as the general construction safety and health officer to oversee full time the overall
management of the Construction Safety and Health Program.

The general construction safety and health officer shall frequently monitor and
inspect any health and safety aspect of the construction work being undertaken. He
shall also assist government inspectors in the conduct of safety and health inspection
at any time whenever work is being performed or during the conduct of accident
investigation.

7.2. The General Constructor must provide for additional Construction Safety and
Health Officer/s in accordance with the requirements for Safety Man/Officer of Rule
1033 (Training and Personnel Complement), depending on the total number of
personnel assigned to the construction project site, to oversee the effective compliance
with the Construction Safety and Health Program at the site, under the direct
supervision of the general construction safety and health officer.

7.3. The General Constructor must provide for one (1) Construction Safety and Health
Officer for every ten (10) units of heavy equipment assigned to the project site, to
oversee the effective compliance with the Construction Safety and Health Program at
the construction project site, in terms of heavy equipment utilization and maintenance.

7.4. Each construction subcontractor must provide for a representative, who shall have
the same qualifications as a Safety Man/Officer, to oversee the management of the
Construction Safety and Health Program for the subcontractor’s workforce and the
specific area of work operations in accordance with the requirements of Rule 1033 of
the OSHS.
All safety personnel who will be employed by an employer on full-time basis should be
accredited by the BWC of the DOLE.
Safety Personnel*
Number of Workers Safety Personnel
1 - 50 1 part-time Safetyman
51 - 200 1 full-time Safetyman
201 – 250 1 full-time and 1 part-time Safetymen

Every additional 500 or fraction thereof 1 additional full-time Safetyman

*1 Safetyman for every 10 units of heavy equipment

Occupational Health Personnel

Number of Workers OH Personnel
50 or less First aider
51 to 200 Full-time nurse
201 to 300 Full-time nurse, part time physician, part time dentist
more than 300 Full-time nurse, full-time physician, full-time dentist

Occupational Health Facilities

1 bed capacity Per 100 workers in excess of 300

252 | P a g e


Contract with hospital Within 5 kms. Or 25 min. of travel

Emergency Health Provider

Section 8: Emergency Occupational Health Personnel and Facilities

8.1 The construction project owner or his duly authorized representative shall provide
competent emergency health personnel within the worksite duly complemented by adequate
medical supplies, equipment and facilities, based on the total number of workers in the site as
indicated below:

a) The services of a certified first-aider when the total number of workers is fifty
(50) or less;

b) The services of a full-time registered nurse when the total number of workers
exceeds fifty (50) but not more than two hundred (200);

c) The services of a full-time registered nurse, a part-time physician and a dentist,

and an emergency clinic when the total number of workers exceeds two hundred
(200) but not more than three hundred (300); and

d) The services of a full-time registered nurse, a full-time physician, a dentist and

an infirmary or emergency hospital with one (1) bed capacity when the number of
employees exceed three hundred (300). In addition, there should be one (1) bed
capacity for every one hundred (100) employees in excess of three hundred (300).

8.2 Where an employer provides only a treatment room, he shall provide for his workers in case
of emergency, access to the nearest medical/dental clinic or to a medical/dental clinic located
within five (5) kilometers radius from the workplace and can be reached in twenty-five (25)
minutes of travel. Such access shall include the necessary transportation facilities. In such
situation, there shall be a written contract with the medical/dental clinic to attend to such
workplace emergencies
8.3The engagement of an Emergency Health Provider for the construction project site shall be
considered as having complied with the requirement of accessibility to the nearest hospital
facilities.

8.4The employer shall always have in the construction site the required minimum inventory of
medicines, supplies and equipment as indicated in Table 47 of the OSHS.

Section 9: Construction Safety Signages

Construction Safety Signages must be provided to warn the workers and the public of hazards
existing in the workplace. Signages shall be posted in prominent positions at strategic location
and, as far as practicable, be in the language understandable to most of the workers employed.

9.1 The signages include but are not limited to:

a) Mandatory requirement on the usage of personal protective equipment prior to

entry to the project site.

b) Areas where there are potential risks of falling objects.

253 | P a g e


c) Areas where there are potential risks of falling.

d) Areas where explosives and flammable substances are used or stored.

e) Areas where there are tripping or slipping hazards.

f) Approaches to working areas where danger from toxic or irritant airborne

contaminants/substances may exist which should indicate the name of the
contaminant/substance involved and the type of respiratory equipment to be worn.

g) All places where contact with or proximity to electrical/facility equipment can

cause danger.

h) All places where workers may come in contact with dangerous moving parts of
machineries or equipment.

i) Location of fire alarms and fire fighting equipment.

j) Instructions on the usage of specific construction equipment.

k) Periodic updating of man-hours lost.

9.2 Signages should be regularly inspected and maintained in good condition. Signages that
are damaged or illegible or that no longer apply should be removed and replaced by the safety
officer, as needed.

Section 10: Safety on Construction Heavy Equipment

In relation to heavy equipment operation in all construction sites, the following are
required in the different phases of the project.
10.1 Pre-Construction

The General Constructor must ensure that appropriate certification is obtained from
DOLE duly accredited organizations for the following:

a) All heavy equipment operators assigned at the project site must be tested
and certified in accordance with a standard trade test prescribed by
Technical Education and Skills Development Authority (TESDA) in
coordination with its accredited organization/s.
b) All heavy equipment must be tested and certified in accordance with the
standards prepared by DOLE or its recognized organization/s prior to
commissioning of said equipment.

10.2 During Construction

The General Constructor must ensure that the following conditions are met or complied
with:

10.2.1 Mobilization or Transport of Heavy Equipment.

a) Load restriction of trailers carrying such heavy equipment.

254 | P a g e


b) Load restrictions, height and width clearances as imposed by Department of

Public Works and Highways (DPWH) for all roads and bridges to be utilized
during transport.

c) Only duly certified operators are allowed to load and unload heavy

equipment to trailer.

d) Equipment to be transported must be properly secured to the trailer.

10.2.2 Erection/Set-up of Heavy Equipment

a) Existing hazards must be avoided.

b) Standard checklist of steps and procedures must be observed.

c) List of necessary equipment, tools and materials must be available and

properly utilized.

10.2.3. Routine Inspection

In the interest of accident prevention, duly certified mechanics and operators shall
conduct daily routine inspection of all heavy equipment deployed at the site in
accordance with standards set by TESDA in coordination with the Association of
Construction Equipment Lessors (ACEL, Inc.).

a) Routine inspection of all heavy equipment must be performed by DOLE

accredited professionals in accordance to standards set by DOLE recognized
equipment suppliers.

b) All equipment which do not comply with the minimum safety standards for
equipment certification shall be immediately removed from the work site for
restoration or repair until they meet said standards or requirements.

The General Constructor and the equipment owner shall maintain a separate logbook for
data on maintenance, repairs, tests and inspections for each heavy equipment. Such
logbook shall be used as a necessary reference during the conduct of equipment
inspection.

10.2.4. Certified Operators

a) Only duly certified operators shall be allowed to operate their designated

heavy equipment.

b) All operators and riggers must wear personal protective equipment as

prescribed in the above pertinent sections.

10.3 Post-Operation and Post-Construction

The procedures for dismantling and demobilization of heavy equipment shall follow
255 | P a g e


the same requirements as listed under 10.2.1 and 10.2.2 above.

Section 11: Construction Safety and Health Committee

11.1 Composition

To ensure that these rules and the Construction Safety and Health Program are observed
and enforced at the project site, each site shall, at the start of the construction have a
construction safety and health committee composed of the following personnel as
described under Section 7 above:

a) Project Manager or his representative as the chairperson ex officio;

b) General Construction Safety and Health Officer;
c) Construction Safety and Health Officers;
d) Safety representatives from each subcontractor,
e) Doctors, Nurses and other Health personnel, pursuant to the requirements
stated in Rule 1042 of the OSHS, who shall be members ex officio;
f) Workers’ representatives (minimum of 3, union members if organized, not
necessarily from one employer).

The persons constituting the Safety and Health Committee shall, as far as practicable, be found at the
construction site whenever construction work is being undertaken.

The time spent by the members of the Safety and Health Committee in the performance of their
duties such as committee meetings, seminars and training, investigation and other tasks that
maybe assigned or planned by the committee shall be considered hours worked and therefore
compensable time.

11.2 Authority and Duties of the Construction Safety and Health Committee

The chairperson shall convene the Construction Safety and Health Committee at regular
intervals so as to effectively and efficiently monitor the implementation of the
Construction Safety and Health Program. As such, he shall have the following duties:

a) plan, develop and oversee the implementation of accident prevention programs

for the construction project;
b) direct the accident prevention efforts for the construction project in accordance
with these rules and the Construction Safety and Health Program;
c) initiate and supervise the conduct of brief safety meetings or toolbox meetings
every day;
d) review reports of safety and health inspections, accident investigations;
e) prepare and submit to DOLE reports on committee meetings;
f) provide necessary assistance to government inspecting authorities in the
proper conduct of their enforcement and other activities;
g) initiate and supervise safety and health training for employees;
h) develop and maintain a disaster contingency plan and organize such emergency
service units as may be necessary to handle disaster situations; and
i) perform all duties provided in the Construction Safety and Health Program or
those that are necessary and incidental to the fulfillment of their duties herein
described.
256 | P a g e


Section 12: Safety and Health Information

12.1 Workers should be adequately and suitably:

a) informed of potential safety and health hazards to which they may be exposed
at their workplace; and
b) instructed and trained on the measures available for the prevention, control and
protection against those hazards.

12.2 No person shall be deployed in a construction site unless he has undergone a safety
and health awareness seminar conducted by the Occupational Safety and Health Center
(OSHC), BWC and other concerned offices of DOLE or by safety professionals or
safety organizations or other institutions DOLE has accredited or recognized. The
DOLE in collaboration with constructors shall promote programs for the
implementation of these awareness seminars for construction workers.

12.3 Every worker shall receive instruction and training regarding the general safety
and health measures common to construction sites which shall include:

a) basic rights and duties of workers at the construction site

b) means of access and egress both during normal work and in emergency situations
c) measures for good housekeeping
d) location and proper use of welfare amenities and first-aid facilities
e) proper care and use of the items or personal protective equipment and
protective clothing provided the workers
f) general measures for personal hygiene and health protection
g) fire precautions to be taken
h) action to be taken in case of any emergency
i) requirements of relevant health and safety rules and regulations.

12.4 The instruction, training and information materials shall be given in a language or
dialect understood by the worker. Written, oral, visual and participative approaches
shall be used to ensure that the worker has assimilated the material.

12.5 Each supervisor or any designated person (e.g. foreman, leadman, gangboss, etc.)
shall conduct daily tool box or similar meetings prior to starting the tasks for the day to
discuss with the workers and anticipate safety and health problems related to every task
and the potential solutions to those problems. The supervisor shall remind the workers
on the necessary safety precautions that need to be undertaken.

12.6 Specialized instruction and training should be given to:

a) drivers and operators of lifting appliances, transport, earth-moving and

materials-handling equipment and machinery or any equipment of specialized
or dangerous nature;
b) workers engaged in the erection or dismantling of scaffolds;
c) workers engaged in excavations at least one meter deep or deep enough to
cause danger, shafts, earthworks, underground works or tunnels;
d) workers handling explosives or engaged in blasting operations;
e) workers engaged in pile-driving;
257 | P a g e


f) workers working in compressed air, cofferdams, and caissons;

g) workers engaged in the erection of prefabricated parts of steel structural frames
and tall chimneys, and in concrete work, form work and other such work;
h) workers handling hazardous substances and materials;
i) workers as signalers; and
j) other workers as maybe categorized by TESDA.

Section 13: Construction Safety and Health Training.

The basic construction safety and health training shall be a forty (40)-hour training course as
prescribed by the BWC. The training course shall include the provisions of Rule 1410 of the
OSHS. The BWC, from time to time, may modify the basic construction safety and health
training course, as the need arises.

All safety personnel involved in a construction project shall be required to complete such basic
training course. Every constructor shall provide continuing construction safety and health
training to all technical personnel under his employ. Continuing training shall be a minimum
of 16 hours per year for every full-time safety personnel.

Specialized Instruction and Training

• Operation of construction equipment
• Erection or dismantling of scaffolds
• Excavation works
• Handling of explosives
• Workers engaged in pile-driving
• Compressed air, cofferdams, and caissons
• Erection of steel structural frames and tall chimneys
• Handling hazardous substance and materials
• Rigging and signaling

Section 14: Construction Safety and Health Reports

All general constructors shall be required to submit a monthly construction safety and health
report to the BWC or to the DOLE Regional Office concerned. The report shall include a
monthly summary of all safety and health committee meeting agreements, a summary of all
accident investigations/reports and periodic hazards assessment with the corresponding
remedial measures/action for each hazard.

In case of any dangerous occurrence or major accident resulting in death or permanent total
disability, the concerned employer shall initially notify the DOLE Regional Office within
twenty-four (24) hours from occurrence. After the conduct of investigation by the concerned
construction safety and health officer, the employer shall report all permanent total disabilities
to DOLE Regional Office on or before the 20th of the month following the date of occurrence
of accident using the DOLE/BWC/HSD-IP-6 form.

258 | P a g e


Section 15: Construction Workers Skills Certificates

In order to professionalize, upgrade and update the level of competence of construction

workers, the TESDA shall:

a) establish national skills standards for critical construction occupations;

b) prepare guidelines on skills testing and certification for critical construction
occupations;
c) accredit construction sector organizations in the area of skills training and trade
testing; and
d) extend relevant assistance to construction sector organizations.

In this regard, all construction workers in critical occupations shall undergo mandatory skills
testing for certification by TESDA.

An occupation shall be considered critical –

a) when the performance of a job effects and endangers people’s lives and limbs;
b) when the job involves the handling of tools, equipment and supplies;
c) when the job requires a relatively long period of education and training;
d) when the performance of the job may compromise the safety, health and
environmental concerns within the immediate vicinity of the construction site.

Section 16: Worker’s Welfare Facilities

The employer shall provide the following welfare facilities in order to ensure humane
working conditions:

16.1 Adequate supply of safe drinking water.

a) If the water is used in common drinking areas, it should be stored in closed

containers from which the water is dispensed through taps or cocks. Such
containers should be cleaned and disinfected at regular intervals not exceeding
fifteen (15) days.
b) Notice shall be conspicuously posted in locations where there is water supply
that is not fir for drinking purposes.

16.2 Adequate sanitary and washing facilities

a) Adequate facilities for changing and for the storage and drying of work clothes
b) Adequate accommodation for taking meals and shelter.

16.3 Suitable living accommodation for workers, and as may be applicable, for their
families

16.4 Separate sanitary, washing and sleeping facilities for men and women workers.

Section 17: Cost of Construction Safety and Health Program

The total cost of implementing a Construction Safety and Health Program shall be a mandatory
integral part of the project’s construction cost as a separate pay item, duly quantified and
reflected in the Project’s Tender Documents and likewise reflected in the Project’s
259 | P a g e


Construction Contract Documents.

Section 18: Miscellaneous

All provisions of other existing occupational safety and health guidelines not inconsistent
with the above Guidelines shall form part of this Department Order.

All provisions of other existing occupational safety and health standards, rules and
regulations not specifically provided herein shall remain in full force and effect.

In the event that any provision of this Guidelines is declared invalid by competent authority,
the rest of the provisions thereof not affected shall remain in full force and effect.

Section 19: Violations and Penalties

19.1. As circumstances may warrant, the DOLE shall refer to the Philippine
Contractors Accreditation Board (PCAB) its findings, after due process, on any act or
omission committed by construction contractors in violation of labor standards, safety
rules and regulations and other pertinent policies. Any such violation committed by
construction contractors, whether general constructors or sub-contractors, shall
constitute as prima facie case of a construction malperformance of grave consequence

due to negligence, incompetence or malpractice contemplated under R.A. 4566

(Constructors’ Licensing Law), as amended, and its Implementing Rules and
Regulations.

19.2. In cases of imminent danger situations, the DOLE Regional Director shall issue a
stoppage order, in conformance with the guidelines specified under Rule 1012.02 of the
OSHS and other pertinent issuances for stoppage of operation or for other appropriate
action to abate the danger. Pending the issuance of the order, the employer shall take
appropriate measures to protect his workers. The stoppage order shall remain in effect
until the danger is removed or corrected. Non-compliance with the order shall be
penalized under existing provisions of labor laws.

Section 20: Effectivity

This issuance shall serve as policy and procedural guidelines for this Department and its
agencies in the administration and enforcement of applicable labor and social legislation and
their implementing regulations.

Nothing herein shall be construed to authorize diminution or reduction of benefits being

enjoyed by employees at the time of issuance hereof.

This Department Order shall take effect immediately.

260 | P a g e


D.O. No. 13, s.1998 was signed on July 23, 1998 and published on August 01, 1998 in the
Philippine Daily Inquirer and on August 03, 1998 in People’s Tonight

Safety Responsibilities of everyone

Responsibility - Is having to answer to higher management for activities and results.

Authority - Is the right to correct, command, and determine the courses of action.

Delegation - Is sharing the authority and responsibility with others. Even though we
delegate responsibility, we cannot completely relieved from it.

Accountability - Is an active measurement taken by management to ensure compliance

with standards.

261 | P a g e


MODULE 24:
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY and HEALTH PROGRAM

Health and safety programs are a systematic plan of action to identify and control hazards to
accomplish workplace that is accident and injury/illness free.

Objectives:
• Identify the elements needed in the successful implementation of OSH program;
• Determine the commitment and participation of various levels of the organization in
implementing the OSH Program;
• Identify the company resources needed to develop and implement an OSH program

The safety program outlines out specific details on:

1. Responsibilities – Refers to the person or group responsible. Usually this would be the
person or group performing the hazardous procedures or work practice.
2. Resources – the means or resources used to accomplish the task or work, for instance,
a worker might use a magnifying glass to look for tiny cracks in the fall protection
metal parts or tears in the fabric.
3. Procedures – the hazardous procedure or practice to be done. Example, a safety
inspection program might specify that an inspection must be completed before and after
each use of the fall protection equipment.

It has been found out that effective management of worker safety and health programs:
• Reduces the extent and severity of work-related injuries and illnesses
• Improves employee morale and productivity
• Reduces worker’s compensation costs
262 | P a g e


Safety and Health Program Criteria

1. The act and regulations set out minimum requirements reflecting accepted industry
practices. However, every workplace is different and the best way to prevent injuries
and occupational illnesses may differ from one workplace to another. Safety and health
programs need to be workplace-specific. A program developed for one workplace may
not meet the needs of another.
2. To be effective, a workplace safety and health program needs the active support and
commitment of senior management to ensure the program is carried out with no
exceptions. Doing the job safety must be as important as doing it efficiently and
effectively.
3. The workplace safety and health program needs worker involvement. It must be
developed in consultation with your workplace safety and health committee. But more
than that, all employees need to be involved in safety and health activities.
4. Everyone must be held accountable for carrying out his or her responsibilities for making
the safety and health program succeed. Senior management must be accountable for
developing and implementing the program. Individual supervisors and employees
should be assigned responsibility for carrying out specific elements in the program.
Safety and shape should then be assessed in the same basis as any other important part
of the job.
5. Each of the program’s elements must be in writing. Elements must be supported with
all documents and information covering matters listed in the regulations. If elements of
the safety and health program have been implemented in separate procedures and
policies, those documents must be referred to in the main safety and health program
document.
6. The program must also address the safety and health of contractors, contract employers
or self-employed persons, and their workers. If workers form two or more employers
that have workplace safety and health programs are working at a construction project
site that has a prime contractor, the prime contractor must coordinate the programs of
those employees.
7. The program must be effectively communicated to all employees. It must be available
to your workplace safety and health committee, workers, or a workplace safety and
health officer (on request).
8. Setting up a program is not simply about the producing documents. A safety and health
program is a living thing that should be constantly adapted, evaluated, and enhanced to
make the workplace healthier and safer. Effective implementation and monitoring is
crucial to its success.

Safety Policies
Safe and healthy working conditions do not happen by chance. Employers need to have a
written safety policy for their enterprise setting out the safety and health standards, which it is
their objective to achieve. The policy should name the senior executive who is responsible for
seeing that the standards are achieved, and who has authority to allocate responsibilities to
management and supervisors at all levels and to see they are carried out. The safety policy
should deal with the following matters:
1. Specific to the organization, concise, clearly written, dated, signed
2. Indicates management commitment, support, and accountability
3. Includes principles and objectives of protecting SH of all members of the organization
4. States compliance with OSHS and related laws
5. States objectives to continually improve the OSH MS
6. Employees are aware of the policy (communicated/posted
7. Covers all workers and community
263 | P a g e


A safety policy is a document stating the following:

• Top management’s safety objectives
• The level of safety that can be performed by the organization
• The responsibility of the organization’s members for executing the policy and
ensuring safety

Sample:
Corporate OSH Policy

Matuwid na Daan Company ensures a safe and healthy workplace for employees
conducive to greater productivity. The company is committed to continually improve its
occupational safety and health management systems and comply with all relevant safety
legislation and requirements to prevent accidents resulting in personal injury and illnesses,
damage to equipment and materials, and operational interruption. Concern for
occupational safety and health is a shared responsibility between the Company and its
employees. All managers, supervisors and employees are enjoined to ensure that safety
programs and practices are in place in their areas of responsibility.

Assignment of responsibility and accountability to operating officials, safety directors,

supervisors, health and safety committees. The organization of safety on the construction site
will be determined by the size of work site, the system of employment and the way in which
the project is being organized. Safety and health records should be kept which facilitate the
identification and resolution of safety and health problems on the site. In construction projects
where subordinates are used, the contract should set out the responsibilities, duties and safety
measures that are expected of the subcontractor’s workforce. These measures may include the
provision and use of specific safety equipment, methods of carrying out specific tasks safely,
and the inspection and appropriate use of tools. The person in charge of the site should also
assure that materials, equipment and tools brought on to the site meet minimum safety
standards.

Safety and health duties should be specifically assigned to certain persons. Some examples of
duties, which should be listed, are:
• Provision, construction and maintenance of safety facilities such as access roadways,
pedestrian routes, barricades and overhead protection;
• Construction and installation of safety signs;
• Safety provision peculiar to each trade;
• Testing of lifting machinery such as cranes and goods hoists, and lifting gear such as
ropes and shackles;
• Inspection and rectification of access facilities such as scaffolds and ladders;
• Inspection and cleaning of welfare facilities such as toilets, clothing accommodation
and canteens;

• Transmission of the relevant parts of the safety plan to each work group; emergency
and evacuation plans

264 | P a g e


Safety and Health Committee

An active safety and health committee (SHC) is a great spur to safety. Its primary purpose is to
enable management and workers to work together to monitor the site safety plan so as to prevent
accidents and improve working conditions on site. Its size and membership will depend on the
size and nature of the site, but it should always be an action-oriented group of people in which
both management and workers are represented. The safety committee carrying out by an active
safety committee will include:

• Plan and develop accident prevention programs for the establishment

• Regular and frequent meetings to discuss the safety and health program on site and to
make recommendations to management, at least once a month
• Conduct safety and health meetings at least once a month
• Review report of inspection, accident investigations and implementations of programs
• Submit report to the manager
• Planning and taking part in educational and training programs, and information
sessions.
• Develop and maintain disaster contingency plans
• Discussion of accident and illness reports in order to make recommendations for
prevention
• Examination of suggestions made by workers, particularly by safety representatives
• Consideration of reports of safety personnel; Composition of SHC

Construction Safety and Health Committee shall be consistent with the minimum requirements
of Section 11 of D.O 13, Series of 1998, but it always depends on the size of the construction
project:
1. CEO/Manager of his representative
2. Worker’s Representatives (union members if organized)
3. Company Physician, nurse or first-aider
4. Safety Officer

Roles of workplace Safety and Health Committee

• Regular workplace safety and health committee inspection and meetings are a good
source of information about workplace hazards
• Committed are useful for encouraging workers to discuss their concerns and suggest
solutions
• Committee inspections can focus on the general physical conditions of the workplace
• Committees can support the safety and health activities of supervisors and workers by
finding defects workers and supervisors have become “used to”. In some cases,
committee inspection may focus on special problems in the workplace.

CEO/Managers of His Representative

Effective safety program can be achieved basically through control of people’s actions. Only
top management has the authority to implement such controls.
• Management Leadership and Attitude
• Assumption of responsibility stated in the OSH policy
• Enforce safe practices and conditions

• Comply with company policy

• Follow safety instructions
• Obtain good preventive maintenance of equipment or selection of proper equipment
when purchased
265 | P a g e


Management Commitment
Management commitment provides the motivating force and resources for organizing and
controlling activities within an organization. Employee involvement provides the means
through which workers develop and express their own commitment to safety and health
protection. Management commitment and employee involvement are complementary. The
improvement of safety, health, and working conditions depends ultimately upon people
working together, whether government, employers or workers. Safety management involves
the functions of planning, identifying problem areas, coordinating, controlling and directing
the safety activities at the work site, all aimed at the prevention of accidents and ill health.
Accident prevention is often misunderstood, for most people believe wrongly that the word
“accident” is synonymous to “injury”. This assumes that no accident is of importance unless it
results in an injury. Management is obviously concerned with injuries to the workers, but their
prime concern should be with the dangerous conditions that produced the injury – with the
“incident” rather than ‘injury”. In a workplace there are more “incidents” than injuries. A
dangerous act can be performed hundreds of times before it results in an injury, and it is to
eliminate these potential dangers that manager’s efforts must be directed. They cannot afford
to wait for human or material damage before doing anything. Safety management means
applying safety measures before accidents happen. Effective safety management has htee main
objectives:
• To make the environment safe
• To make the job safe
• To make the workers safety conscious

Safety Officer/ Manager

Every construction company of any size should appoint a properly qualified person (or persons)
whose special and main responsibility is the promotion of safety and health. Whoever is
appointed should have direct access to an executive director of the company. His or her duties
and responsibilities shall comply with those outlined in Tule 1047 of the OSHS and should
include:
• The organization of information to be passed from management to workers, including
those of subcontractors
• The organization and conduct of safety training programs, including induction
training for all workers on the site
• The investigation and review of the circumstances and causes of accidents and
occupational diseases so as to advise on preventive measures
• Acting as consultant and technical adviser to the safety committee
• Participation on pre-site planning

To carry out these functions, the safety officer should have experience of the industry and
should be properly trained and qualified and, where such exist, should be a member of a
recognized professional safety and health body.

Strategies to involve workers

1. Workers should know their roles in the safety and health program including their right
and responsibilities
2. Consultation directly between an employer and workers
3. Requiring and encouraging workers to report safety and health concerns promptly
4. Encourages workers to suggest improvements in the safety and health programs
5. Making safety and health committee effective:
a) Training committee members
266 | P a g e


• Enhancing communication between the committee, workers, and senior

management
• Responding promptly to problems or concerns raised by the committee
• Considering the committee’s recommendations during the development of
plans, policies, programs or procedures required by regulations/standards
b) Providing safety and health incentive

Workers Representative
These are appointed by workers, sometimes in accordance with national legislation, to present
them in dealing with safety and health matters on site. They should be experienced workers
well be able to recognize construction site hazards, although they are likely to required training
to acquire new skills in inspection and using information. Safety representatives should be
given sufficient time off to be trained and to carry out their duties properly. These activities
should be without loss of pay, for a safe and healthy site benefits for both employers and
workers.

Supervisors
Good planning and organization at each work site and the assignment of clear responsibility to
supervisors are fundamental to safety in construction. “Supervisor” here means the first level
of supervision, which on site is variously termed as “foreman”, “leadman”, and so on.

Each supervisor requires the direct support of site management and should seek to assure
within his or her field of competence that:
• Working conditions and equipment are safe
• Workplace safety is regularly inspected
• Workers have been adequately trained for the job they are expected to do
• Workplace safety measure are implemented
• The best solutions are adopted using available resources and skills
• Necessary personal protective equipment is available and used

Making the work site safe will require regular inspection and provision of the means for taking
remedial measure. The training of workers enables them to recognize the risks involved and
how they can overcome them. Workers should be shown the safe way of getting the job done.

Workers
Every worker is under a moral, and often also a legal, duty to take the maximum care for his
or her own safety and that fellow workers. There are various ways involving workers directly
in site conditions, such as:
“Toolbox Briefing”, a five to ten minute session with the supervisor just prior to starting task
gives the workers and the supervisor a chance to talk about safety problems likely to be
encountered and potential solutions to those problems. This activity is simple to implement and
it may prevent serious accident.

OSH Programs
Contains many “programs” and each program will require a more narrowly-fashioned “plan”.
Other minimum requirements of a specific construction safety and health program are:

1. Safety Control Program – focuses on Rule 1410 “Construction Safety” of the

Occupational Safety and Health Standards and other Rules of the OSHS which applies
to construction works like Rule 1940 Fire Protection and Control, Rule 1200 Machine
Guarding, Rule 1080 PPE, Rule 1100, Rule 1210 and others.
267 | P a g e


2. Occupational Health Programs – focus on following: Employment or hiring or

medical staff, availability of clinical, dental, and medical equipment, preparation and
submission of Annual Medical Report, Compilation of medical records of employees,
including analysis of the data, HMO or in-house health services or both, Medical
services and other programs implemented.
3. Occupational Environmental Protection Program - focus on Rule 1070 of the
Occupational Safety and Health Standards. Capability building program for chemical
users, materials handling and storage procedures, abatement of physical hazards, data
on classification and volume of waste generated, pollution prevention facilities,
employment of Pollution Control Officer (PCO)
4. Monitoring, Control and Reporting Program – a safety and health program is “living
thing” that should be constantly analyzed, adapted, evaluated and enhanced to make the
workplace healthier and safer. It is deployed to everyone through instructions, training,
feedback, program analysis and evaluation, and continuous improvement.
5. Communication and Information Program – sec 1.6 of the D.O 13 or otherwise
known as the Occupational Safety and Health Standards in the Construction Industry
requires safety and health promotion information and dissemination or advisories. Prior
to onsite assignment for example, employees should be given safety orientation,
company’s safety and health policy, safe work procedures, and other safety issues. There
should also be a system so that site management has information quickly about unsafe
practices and defective equipment. The following are some of the applicable
communication and information strategies:
a) Information program, materials and dissemination strategies
b) Some promotional methods
c) Safety meetings
d) Safety contest
• Injury rate contest
• Non-injury rate contest: safety slogan, poster, housekeeping,
construction
• Use of posters, bulletin boards and displays to publicize safety
• Others like safety campaigns, safety courses and demonstrations, public
address systems, publications, suggestion systems
6. Hazard Identification and Control Program – the goal of the program is to make the
workplace and its operations as safe as possible and to keep employees from being
harmed. It is an ongoing program that is actually never finished. Developing a program
to identify and control hazards starts by carefully planning and designing interrelated
processes and procedures. Identification starts with a process called Job Hazard
Analysis. A job hazard analysis is a technique that focuses on job tasks as a way to
identify hazards before they occur. It focuses between the relationship of the worker, the
task, and the tools, and the work environment. Ideally, after identifying uncontrolled
hazards, steps re to be taken to eliminate and reduce them to an acceptable risk level.
Controlling exposure to worksite hazards is the fundamental methods of protecting
workers. Traditionally, the widely accepted hierarchy of controls has been used as a
means of determining how to implement feasible and effective controls. The following
are the hierarchy of control measures.
a) Engineering Controls
o Elimination
o Substitution
o Control of Hazardous Energy
b) Administrative Controls
o Worksite inspections
268 | P a g e


o Analyzing past accident investigations

o Analyze confined space entry
o Analyze fall hazards
o Analyze hazardous chemicals
o Analyze Electrical Hazards
c) Personal Protective Equipment
7. First Aid, Medical, and Emergency Response Program – First-aid and rescue
equipment should always be available. What is needed will depend on the size of the site
and the numbers employed, but there should be at least a stocked first-aid box and a
stretcher and blanket. One person must at least be trained by the Philippines National
Red Cross.
8. Health and Safety Training Program – The OSHS of 1989 as amended states Rule
1030 the minimum requirement training for safety personnel. Worker’s training is
essential to every employer’s safety and health program. Effective training also help
inexperienced workers, who tend to have a higher injury and illness rates than
experienced worker.

Training should be conducted at all levels, including managers, supervisors, and

workers. Subcontractors and their workers may also need to be trained in site safety
procedures, because teams of specialist workers may mutually affect each other’s safety.

An effective safety training program should include the following:

o Design an effective safety training plan, lesson plans, and learning activities
o Devise workable training strategies
o Determine the appropriateness of training as a solution to worksite problems
o Identify what safety training is required
o Develop goals and learning objectives for the training
o Improve the training program based on feedback from employees, supervisors,
and others
9. Record keeping and Reporting Program – Rule 1050 of the OSHS requires employer
to keep records of occupational deaths, injuries, and illnesses. Records such kinds are
used by DOLE to help direct its program and measure its performance and for future
legislations.
10. Fire Prevention and Environment Control Programs – Rule 1940 of the OSHS
requires workplace Fire Protection and Control. This program should revolve around
this legal requirement, but every individual in the workplace should be aware of the first
risk, and should know the precautions to prevent a fire and the action to be taken if fire
does break out. If fire breaks out, get someone to call the fire brigade. Everyone on site
should be trained to/in:
o Know of two unobstructed ways off the site if there is a fire or other
emergency;
o Know how to raise the alarm;
o Know where firefighting appliances are kept;
o BE able to select and use the correct type of portable fire extinguisher for
specific types of fire
o Safety inspection
o Job hazard analysis
o Accident investigation
o Work environment measurement

Program Evaluation
Evaluation is a systematic, objective process for determining the success of a policy or

269 | P a g e


program. It addresses questions about whether and to what extent the program achieving its
goals and objectives. The primary attributes of most safety program evaluations include
objectivity, standardization, systematic, and formal. Evaluation has several distinguishing
characteristics. An evaluation:
1. Assesses the effectiveness of an ongoing program in achieving is objectives
2. Relies on the standards of project design to distinguish a program’s effects from those
of other forces
3. Aims at program improvement through a modification of current operations
An evaluation plan should include:
o What will be done
o How it will be done
o Who will do it
o When it will be done
o Why the evaluation is being conducted

Program Evaluations generally have four basic purposes

1. Evaluate the design
2. Evaluate Process
3. Evaluate Results
4. Evaluate Impact

Regardless of the primary focus of the evaluation, they all use data collected in a systematic
manner. The data may be:
o Quantitative, such as counts of safe/unsafe behaviors, or
o Qualitative, such as descriptions of the effectiveness of an incentive and recognition
program.

Program Effectiveness Measures

o Number of accidents and injuries are trending downward
o Cost of accidents and injuries is trending downward
o Time lost due to work-related injuries and illnesses is reduced
o Recommendations addressing health and safety issues are made and completed
o Organization is working towards compliance with applicable laws, codes and
o Judgment – perception of people

SAFETY CONSTRUCTION PROGRAM

Bagong Pag-Asa, Inc

Introduction
This Safety Manual is for the management, staff and workers of Bagong Pag-Asa, Inc.
This will serve as a guideline for accident prevention in the construction site.

It is the primary objective of this company that all employees must comply and follow
this Safety Manual in order for this program to be effective and successful.

1. On-Site Safety/Health Promotion And Education

o Objective – Safety knowledge, attitude, skills and habits at all levels of the project
workforce shall be promoted, maintained and enhanced by regular and continuing safety
training and education.

270 | P a g e


o Requirements
• Safety Orientation
• Tool Box Talks
• Safety seminars for supervisors and engineers

2. Safety Promotions

o Objective - Pertinent information shall be communicated to all employees at the work site
by practical means, to make employees well informed about matters important to their
safety and wellbeing.

o Requirements
• Safety shall be included in all job instructions.
• Safety Bulletin Boards
• Bulletin boards shall be positioned so that employees can view them while standing in
a casual manner.

o Responsibilities
• Project supervisors shall include the safety aspects when they give job instructions to
their workers.

3. accident/incident investigation and reporting

o Objective - In compliance to Rule 1054 of the OSHS of DOLE, records of accidents and
illness shall be kept and maintained open at all times for inspection by authorized
personnel.

o Requirements
• The Incident/Accident Investigation Report Form should be used we can use the
forms from the OSHS manual.
o Major Loss Announcements
• Summaries of vital information on major personnel accidents must be written and
promptly submitted to the PIC.

Contents
• The project in-charge will report in writing to the owner of a narrative of accident
details and what was done or is being done to prevent recurrence:
• Injured employee(s) name(s), occupation, length of employment, age, sex, date, and
time of accident.

o Recordkeeping Procedures
• The First Aid personnel with the assistance of the project safety officer must maintain
a variety of records for protection of the employees, the company and client.

• First Aid Log

• This is a chronological listing of all visits to the clinic or first aid station. Every injury
illness reported, no matter how slight must be recorded. A copy of the logbook and
necessary forms shall be provided to the clinic or first aid station.

271 | P a g e


4. Protection Of The General Public

Safety measures shall be implemented to protect the public from hazards connected
with construction operations and activities.

o Requirements
• Standard warning signs, traffic signs and barricades shall be installed as required by
government regulations and by the OSHS for building projects.

o Responsibilities
• The Project-in-charge shall anticipate the project needs and order the preparation the
required devices.

5. Construction Safety Practices

a) Excavation
• Excavation is defined as making a depression or cavity in the earth’s surface including
the removal of previously installed roadways, slabs or foundations at and below the
surrounding ground level. The principal hazards associated with excavation are
suffocation, crushing or other injury from falling material.

b) Concrete, Formwork And Shoring

Some of the hazards associated with concrete installations are:
• Failure of inadequately designed/installed forms and shoring.
• Pre-stressed concrete includes use of exposed steel bars or strands with much latent
energy.
• Safety for the installation of a finished concrete structure starts with its design. A
competent engineer should design the formwork for all structures requiring the use of
shoring and for large pours to be made at and below ground level.
• Provide adequate bearing capacity, (a function of soil conditions), for formwork vertical
support members.

c) Scaffolding and ladders

•The major hazards associated with the use of scaffolding and ladders are falling
men, material or tools.
• The following requirements are applicable to all scaffold work platforms:
• A guardrail shall enclose all working platforms more than 10 ft. (3m) above
ground or floor level. Guardrail shall be located 42 in. (1050 mm) above platform.
• Work platform shall be completely decked with no openings.
d) Welding, burning and cutting
The major hazards associated with burning and welding operations are Heat and fire.
Proper care of welding and burning equipment is a requisite for minimizing hazards.
o All gas cylinders shall have their contents clearly labeled.
In preparing for welding and burning, it shall be ensured that:
o Sparks or molten metal will not fall on people or combustible materials
particularly from work at elevated location.

e) Hand and power tools – associated hazards are:

o Failure or disintegration of tool.
o Proximity to moving or cutting parts of tool.

272 | P a g e


• Materials handling – associated hazards are:

o Falling or moving material and equipment.
o Pinching or crushing.
f) Industrial mobile equipment – associated hazards are:
o Inherent with the use of productive mobile equipment are the many potential
hazards that can result from:
o A large mass in motion.
o Any load extending beyond the confines of the equipment shall be marked or
tagged for easy visibility.

g) Electricity
The major hazards of electricity are electrical shock and the accompanying possibility
of death. Fatal electrical shock can be sustained with voltages of 120 or less with current
as low as 50 –200 milliamperes.
o The major source and distribution equipment (generators, transformers and switch
racks) shall be isolated by fences or in building with access restricted to authorized
personnel only.
o Where more than one voltage level is in service at a site, each receptacle shall have
its voltage identified.

h) Painting
The hazards associated with painting are: Toxic fumes, Flammable materials, Falls,
Dust and flying particles
o When solvent cleaning, the toxic and combustion characteristics of the solvent
shall be determined, and appropriate protection provided.
o The use of safety belts or safety harnesses is mandatory for all work more than
10ft (3m) above grade, which is not done from a fixed platform with guardrails.
o Pressurized spray guns are frequently used for paint application.
o If spray printing is done in an enclosed area, adequate ventilation and/or means of
safely exhausting fumes must be provided.
i) Masonry – associated hazards are :dust & fumes
o For work at an elevated location, in addition to having a work platform with
guardrails, care shall be exercised to insure that materials to be handled do not
exceed allowable scaffold loading. Bricks and blocks shall be neatly stacked. They
shall be passed by hand, not thrown, when moving.

j) Housekeeping
o Inherent with good housekeeping is the elimination of many hazards that could result
in falls, trips, cuts, fires and many other potential accidents. Good housekeeping is
a visible advertisement and promotion of safe working conditions.
L) Safety Signage
o Safety signage should be provided in order to warn the workers and the public of
hazards existing in the workplace. It shall be posted in the appropriate areas,
strategic locations and should be understandable. The size should conform to the
OSHS manual and same with color. All signage should be kept clean and be
inspected regularly. It should be in good condition, damage signage should be
removed or replaced.
o Signage shall include but not limited to the following:
• The use of Personal Protective Equipment
• Areas where there are potential risk of falling and falling objects

273 | P a g e


6. Environmental Control Plan

o Objective
Project the environment and surrounding communities from hazards and
environmental concerns posed by the construction activities in the project.
This plan covers and should be applied to all works in this project.
o Responsibilities
The Project-in-Charge shall be responsible for the implementation of this
Environmental Control Plan.
o Hazards & Environmental Concerns
Dust, Noise, Exhaust emission, muddy roads
o Specific Control Measures
§ Dust - Sprinkle dry grounds with water
§ Noise - Mount equipment so that vibration will be reduced
§ Exhaust Emission - Direct exhaust of stationary equipment away from work
areas and field offices
§ Muddy Roads - Provide tire washing facilities near exit gate
o Monitoring
The Project-in-Charge shall require strict monitoring of compliance with the
requirements of this Environmental Control Plan.

7. Personal Protective Equipment

All employees are required to wear appropriate personal protective equipment in all
operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions or where there is need for
using such equipment to reduce the hazard to the employees.

o Minimum requirements
• Safety Helmet, Safety Shoes, Pants (trouser) jeans. No worn out pants, Long Sleeve

o Guidelines in the use of PPE’s:

In providing safe working conditions, the use of personal protective equipment is the last
line of defense against possible injury. It must be recognized that the use of personal
protective equipment frequently reduces or restricts some of our normal senses that
contribute to our safety awareness. For example:
• Wearing safety glasses with side shields, goggles, or tinted goggles restricts normal
vision.
• Earmuffs or plugs reduce hearing capability.
• Use of respiratory equipment frequently restricts vision.
• Wearing gloves reduces the sense of feel.
• The discomfort of wearing many protective items is distracting to users.

8. Handling Of Hazardous Substances

Hazardous materials are substances or mixtures that may cause personal injury, illness, or
threat to the public or environment during handling, use, discharge or disposal.
o The hazard communication program shall include:
• Labels and warning forms
• Labels on hazardous material containers shall not be removed or defaced. They shall be
legible and identify the substance in the container, and display the appropriate warning
about the substance.
• Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
• An MSDS for each chemical shall be available at the site at which the hazardous

274 | P a g e


material is present. The MSDS shall be legible and available for worker review.

9. Testing And Inspection Of Heavy Equipment

Based on the D.O. 13 of The DOLE/BWC all heavy equipment should be tested prior
to commissioning, then routine inspection of equipment while on operation.
A logbook for data on maintenance, repairs, tests and inspections for each heavy
equipment should be maintained.

10. Workers Skills And Certification

New Company, Inc. Enterprises will hire skilled workers who are certified by TESDA,
this goes also for the heavy equipment operators. In compliance to Department Order
13.

11. Temporary Fire Protection Facilities And Equipment

o Fire Prevention – Good housekeeping in the construction site is the first step in a fire
prevention program. Trash shall be picked up and disposed to prevent accumulations that
can cause or contribute to a fire. Paper, rags, sawdust and scrap lumber are commonly
present; containers shall be provided to gather such debris. The containers shall be emptied
on a schedule that avoids excessive accumulations and overfilling.

o Fire Protection Installed – First aid/firefighting equipment shall consist primarily of

portable fire extinguishers. Refer to Rule 1944.05 of the OSHS. Extinguishers to be
permanently mounted shall have their location clearly marked and be accessible at all times.
The necessary instructions for using extinguishers shall be given to all personnel who may
be required to use them.

12. First Aid & Health Care Medicines, Equipment Facilities

The first aid station/clinic should have the following equipment & medicines as required in
D.O.13.
o Equipment
o Washing Area
o First Aid Cabinet
o Stretcher
o Examining Table and chair
o First Aid Pamphlet

13. Proposed Hours of work and rest breaks

o The work schedule will be from Monday to Saturday, 8:00 am- 5:00pm, with
15minutes break in the morning and afternoon and one (1) hour break for lunch.
Workers Welfare Facilities
o Adequate toilet, washroom and change facilities shall be provided for the work force.
Daily janitorial service shall be provided for these facilities.

o Potability of drinking water used on the site shall be checked regularly. Containers for
drinking water shall be identified for that use only, tightly covered when in use and not
user for any purpose.

14. Construction Waste Disposal

o Oil Leaks And Spillage
• Implement proper storage and handling of fuel and lubricants
• Provide oil catch or drip trays.

275 | P a g e


15. Emergency Action Plan

o Objectives
• To ensure readiness to cope with emergencies that may result in the loss of life
and property.
• To be able to effectively carry out an orderly, timely, and safe evacuation of all
personnel in affected areas of the emergency when necessary.

o Emergency Procedures -Should emergency occur, the Project In charge on site shall
immediately secure the area and implement the emergency action plan. According to
the situation, the person in charge will delegate authority and assure the safety of those
responding.

16. Construction Site Demobilization

o After the project, dismantling and demolition of temporary structure, scaffold, temporary
electrical wiring, transport of heavy equipment must be under the supervision of a
competent person and the project safety officer. It must be in accordance with OSHS
manual and D.O. 13 especially for heavy equipment.

17. Job Hazard Analysis

o Objective - to develop a preliminary hazard analysis on work operations as to their
potential for injury, property damage or both. Once potential hazards have been
identified, procedures can be developed to eliminate or mitigate their potential for
occurrence.

o In our company Bagong Pagasa, Inc. the workers will conduct tool box meeting every
morning for 15 minutes, here they will identify hazard in every scope of work and give
corrective action in order to avoid accidents.

18. Penalties and Reward

o Reward
Since the manpower of this project is less than fifty (50), we in Bagong Pagasa, Inc., propose
using incentives to the job-site Project In charge, supervisor, project safety officer, lead men,
foremen and workers based on a target recordable injury incidence rate measured at end of the
project.

276 | P a g e


RE-ENTRY PROGRAM/Training Evaluation

Objectives: The participant will be able to write a simple safety and health program by
applying the learning of the course.

Participants of the COSH training are now asked to apply what they learned. Our plan for
their re-entry to the Safety and Health Committee is outlined as follows:

Review
On their own, participants are to review their notes, manuals, workshops exercises
and experiences.
Application
On return to the company, they make a verbal or written report to their supervisor
signifying their intention to apply the contents of the BOSH training. The simplest way
to immediately use the material is by specific task, so as not to get overwhelmed by
the project.
Inspection
Investigation

277 | P a g e


Inspection
If the new member intends to conduct his application by inspection, he may opt to be
teamed up with another member, or conduct inspection alone.

Workplace inspection is by far the best way to begin. It involves 3 steps:

• Identification of hazards
• Evaluation of hazards
• Control of hazards
1) Identification of Hazards
a. Unsafe act

• Acts of Omission
• Acts of Commission
b. Unsafe Conditions
• Physical
• Chemical
• Biological
• Ergonomic
• Mechanical
• Electrical
2) Evaluate the Hazards
Indicate why you identified the act/condition to be unsafe by comparing against:
• Company standards (OEL)
• International Standards (TLV, PEL, OSHS)
• Conducting workplace monitoring procedures or simple determining what procedures
to conduct
3) Control the Hazard
• Engineering Control
• Administrative Control
• Personal Protective Equipment
Making an inspection report is carried out by an action plan directed toward the control
of the hazard.

Investigation
If the new member intends to conduct his application by investigation, he may opt to be
teamed up with another member or conduct an investigation alone. Result and processes
may be compared later.
Steps to follow are:
• Gather information
• Analyze the facts
• Make recommendations

1) Gathering Information
a. Witness interview – follows the different techniques to elicit information and
details of the events that transpired
b. Physical evidence – done initially by sketching or taking pictures of the accident
scene for reference. Should other materials be present that can contribute to
explaining the accident, they must be logged and examined carefully.
c. Review of written records – referring to previous accident reports, maintenance
278 | P a g e


records, and other data in the company’s file.

2) Analysis of Data
• Change analysis
• Fault tree method
• Fish-bone analysis
• Process safety review
• Job hazard analysis
• 7-Why Analysis
3) Making recommendations is carried out by an action plan directed toward the primary
and secondary causes of the accident. A report is made that includes:
• Problem
• Action Plan
• Accountability
• Target date
• Output

Implementation

1) Study/Review
• Once the report (inspection) has been made, they are submitted to the safety
management or counterpart for analysis. Feasibility is determined and the new
member may be asked for a simple explanation for his report.
• The action plan is then put into effect in an experimental area, or may be applied
directly to the act/ condition in question
• After the target date is met, results of the implementation are noted and discussed.

Evaluation
1) Scoring / ranking of the expected results is done to quantify / qualify the data
2) Discussion for result may be made by direct comparison
3) Other forms may require more intricate analysis like that of determination of p-
values in standard deviation
4) Depending on the outcome and the nearness/farness (proximity/distance) from the
expected output, modifications can be made to tailor fit the action plan
5) A final report is made to document the results and the action plan is applied to the
greater part of the company’s workplace.

Repeat Process
• Next step is to increase/ broaden the scope of responsibility of the new member.

279 | P a g e


NOTES

280 | P a g e